You are on page 1of 798

Autodesk Inventor

Topics in this section

Fundamentals
Work Environment
Parts
Assemblies
Drawings
Collaboration and Visualization
Design Optimization
System Performance
Glossary
Autodesk Inventor >

Fundamentals

Topics in this section

Getting started
Basic 3D Workflow
Transition from 2D
Transition from SolidWorks
About Help
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Getting started

Topics in this section

Getting Started tab


Environments
User Interface
Tools in the Application Window
The Ribbon
Enhanced Tooltips
InfoCenter
Navigation tools
Navigation Bar
Views of models
Browser Icon Reference
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Getting Started tab

Access learning components of the Inventor Help system, such as the


Ribbon Introduction (video), Command Locator, Ribbon Tutorial, Show Me
animations, New Feature Workshop and others, directly from the Getting
started tab on the ribbon. The Getting Started tab is available at all times
within Autodesk Inventor.
Tip If you are familiar with the location of commands in previous versions of
Autodesk Inventor, use the Command Locator to find the new location of the
command in the ribbon. Click on the Getting Started tab and select Command
Locator. In the Command Locator click the command you are trying to locate.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Environments
Concept Procedure

To access, work in, and exit environments

To access Environments within an Assembly file

To access Environments within a Part file

To access Environments within a Drawing file

Work in Environments

Once you enter an environment, all commands that enable you to work within
that environment are available for you. Each specialized environment has a
unique tab, called a contextual tab, with commands specific to that environment.
For example, when you enter the Studio environment, a new tab labeled Renter is
displayed.

Example of the Studio contextual tab

The Render tab is specific to Studio. Tabs specific to an environment have a


unique color to indicate you are working in a specialized environment.

To exit Environments

To exit an environment accessed from the Environments tab or the Sketch


environment and return to the general working environment, click Finish on the
Exit panel, which is located on the ribbon to the far right.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

User Interface
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Return

Access: On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow on the Return
button, and select an option.

Use Return to quit in-place editing and quickly return to the desired
environment. The destination depends on which modeling environment you
are working in.
Return (to Returns to the previous editing state. For example,
previous) Return (to previous) in the sketch environment returns to
the part that contains the sketch.
Return to Returns to the parent component in the browser. For
Parent example, when editing a part in a subassembly, Return to
Parent changes the edit target to the subassembly. When
editing a sketch, Return to Parent changes the edit target
to the part that owns the sketch.
Return to Top Returns to the top model in the browser, regardless of
how deep the edit target is in the browser hierarchy.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Tools in the Application Window


Concept Procedure

Customize the Quick Access toolbar


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Application Menu
Concept Procedure

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application
Window > Application Menu >

Search for Commands

In the Application Menu, perform a real-time search for all commands


located on the ribbon.

The Search field displays at the top of the Application Menu. Search results can
include menu commands, basic tooltips, and command prompt text strings. You
can enter a search term in any language.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application
Window > Application Menu >

Access Common Tools


Concept Quick Reference

Print models and drawings


Prints or plots all or any portion of a model or drawing.

Access: Click Print.

Print Model

Print Drawing

You can print or plot all or any portion of a model or drawing.

To print a model

To print a drawing

To print a note
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application
Window > Application Menu >

Recent Documents
Concept Procedure

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

You can view the list of recent documents, or open documents from the right
pane of the Application Menu when no first level item is selected:

Click Open
Documents
to view open
documents.

Click Recent
Documents
to view
recent
documents.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application
Window > Application Menu >

Currently Open Documents


Concept Procedure

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

You can view the list of recent documents, or open documents from the right
pane of the Application Menu when no first level item is selected:

Click Open
Documents
to view open
documents.

Click Recent
Documents
to view
recent
documents.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application
Window > Application Menu >

Preview Documents

View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents


lists.

When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is displayed
along with the following information:

Path where the file is stored

Date the file was last modified

Version of the product used to create the file

Name of the person who last saved the file

Name of the person who is currently editing the file

You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list. To change
the file icon to a thumbnail preview, click the drop-down list at the top of the
Recent Documents or Open Documents lists and choose a small, medium, or large
thumbnail.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Quick Access Toolbar


Concept Procedure

Customize the Quick Access toolbar

To add and remove commands to the Quick Access toolbar

1. On Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down arrow.

2. On the Customize menu, click the command name you want to display
on the Quick Access toolbar.
A check mark next to a command name indicates it is displayed on the
Quick Access toolbar.

To add commands to the Customize Quick Access toolbar menu

1. On the Ribbon, right-click on the command you want to add, and


select Add to the Quick Access toolbar.

To move the Quick Access toolbar menu above or below the ribbon

1. On Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down arrow.

2. On the Customize menu, click Show Above the Ribbon to display the
Quick Access toolbar above the ribbon, or Show Below the Ribbon to
display the Quick Access toolbar below the ribbon.
A check mark next to a command name indicates it is displayed on the
Quick Access toolbar.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Status Bar
Concept Quick Reference

Capacity Meter
The Capacity Meter provides several pieces of information with regards to memory
consumption. The meter has three indicators: total number of occurrences in the
active document, total number of files open in the session, and amount of
memory used by the session.

The meter can be used in Inventor Only: Restricts the display to just the
Autodesk Inventor process. The color changes from green to yellow when
more than 60% of the allotted space is used, then red once 80% has been
used.

When hovering over the Capacity Meter, the tooltip displays details of used and
available memory.

Note The Capacity Meter is not available in 64-bit operating systems.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Document tab
Concept Quick Reference

Capacity Meter
The Capacity Meter provides several pieces of information with regards to memory
consumption. The meter has three indicators: total number of occurrences in the
active document, total number of files open in the session, and amount of
memory used by the session.

The meter can be used in Inventor Only: Restricts the display to just the
Autodesk Inventor process. The color changes from green to yellow when
more than 60% of the allotted space is used, then red once 80% has been
used. The capacity meter is not available in 64 bit operating systems..

When hovering over the Capacity Meter, the tooltip displays details of used and
available memory.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Keytips

Use the keyboard to access the Application Menu, Quick Access toolbar,
and ribbon.
Press the Alt key or F10 to display shortcut keys for common tools in the
application window. Keytips allow you to perform tasks without using your mouse.

When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool. Keytips
appear as underlined characters to indicate which key or combination of keys on
the keyboard must be pressed to activate a command.

Keytips allow you to navigate in the Application Menu and in the ribbon using
only the keyboard. Use the keyboard arrows to navigate to commands on the
ribbon and Application Menu

Note Keytips are not customizable.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Glossary

application button
The button that is displayed in the top-left corner of the application. If you
click the application button, the Application Menu is displayed.

Application Menu
The menu that is displayed when you click the application button. The
Application Menu contains common tools for creating, saving, and publishing
a file.

push pin
A push pin-shaped button used on the ribbon and in the Application Menu.
On the ribbon, push pins are used to keep a ribbon panel expanded. In the
Application Menu, push pins keep an item in the list of recently opened
items.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

The Ribbon
Concept Procedure

To minimize the ribbon

To toggle the visiblity of all controls

To change the ribbon appearance

To move a command on the ribbon to the expanded panel

To move a command on a main panel on the ribbon to the expanded panel

To move a command from the expanded panel to the main panel on the ribbon

To ungroup commands from a drop-menu

To display or hide a ribbon panel

To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels

To change the docking position of the ribbon

To create and add a command to the User Commands panel

To remove a command from the User Commands panel

To export a .xml file containing command from the User Commands panel

To import a command from the User Commands panel


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Display and Organize the Ribbon


Concept Procedure

To minimize the ribbon

1. Click the ribbon minimize button to the right of the ribbon tabs.

2. The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options:

Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles


are displayed.

Minimize to Panels: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab


and panel titles are displayed.

Show Full Ribbon: Displays tabs and full panels, including


controls.

Note Minimize behavior is available only for the horizontal ribbon.

Shortcut menu: Right-click the ribbon tab bar, click Minimize, and then click one
of the minimize options.
Pointing device: Double-click the name of the active ribbon tab.

To toggle the visiblity of all controls

On the ribbon, click View tab Windows panel Clean Screen.

To change the ribbon appearance

Right-click the ribbon tab bar and select Ribbon Appearance and make a
selection.

To move a command on the ribbon to the expanded panel

Right-click on a command and select Move to expanded panel.

To move a command on a main panel on the ribbon to the expanded panel

Right-click on a command and select Move to expanded panel.

To move a command from the expanded panel to the main panel on the
ribbon

Right-click on a command in an expanded panel and select Move to


main panel.

To ungroup commands from a drop-menu

Right-click on a command that has a drop-down arrow and select


Ungroup from drop-down menu.

Note To return commands to the drop-down menu, right-click on the command


and select Return commands to drop-down menu.

To display or hide a ribbon panel

Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. Under Panels, click or clear the
name of a panel.

To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels

Right-click the ribbon tab bar and click Show Panel Titles.

To change the docking position of the ribbon

Right-click the ribbon tab bar, click Ribbon Docking and make a
selection.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Customize the Ribbon


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Customize User Commands


On the ribbon, you can create one custom panel within each tab to display
commands you want to be available from that tab in Autodesk Inventor. Creating
user-defined commands creates the User Command panel.

Access: Right-click on the ribbon, and select Customize User


Commands

Important The User Commands panel is created when you specify one or more
commands in the Customize User Commands dialog box. You can create a unique
User Commands panel for each tab. The User Commands are only for the active
Tab. If commands are not available for the active environment, they are disabled.

Choose Controls the display of the list of commands. Click the


commands drop-down arrow to narrow the selection.
from
Commands A display mode where all points of a model are projected
along parallel lines to the screen.
Add Adds specified commands to the User Commands panels
in the active tab.
Remove Removes specified commands to from the User
Commands panels in the active tab.
Import Imports the user-defined panel settings from an .xml
file. Click Import to display the Open dialog box.
Navigate to the desired file, and then click Open.
Export Saves the current user-defined settings in an .xml file.
Click Export to display the Save Copy As dialog box.
Select a file location, enter a file name, and then click
Save.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Color Themes

You can control the color of the icons in the ribbon using the Application
Options dialog box, Colors tab, Color Theme settings. Click the Amber Icon
Color Theme icon to display the ribbon icons for the amber icon color
theme. To use the cobalt icon color theme, click the Cobalt Icon Color
Theme icon.

Cobalt Color Icon Theme

Amber Color Icon Theme

The cobalt color icon theme closely matches the icon colors in other Autodesk
products. The amber icon color theme is similar to Autodesk Inventor 2009.

Note In addition to changing the icon color, you can control the color of the
Applicaton frame in the Colors tab in the Aplication Options dialog box using the
Application Frame setting.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon >

Glossary

contextual ribbon tab

A ribbon tab that is displayed only when a particular type of object, such as
a hatch or table, is included in a selection. Toolbars can be changed to
contextual tabs in the CUI.

expanded panel

An area on the ribbon associated with a ribbon panel. An expanded panel


contains additional tools and controls. See also ribbon panel and ribbon.

floating panel

A ribbon panel that is not attached to the rest of the ribbon or application
frame.

horizontal ribbon

The ribbon, when it is oriented across the top of the file window.

push pin

A push pin-shaped button used on the ribbon and in the Application Menu.
On the ribbon, pins keep panels expanded. In the Application Menu, pins
keep an item in the list of recently viewed items.

ribbon

A palette that displays buttons and controls used for both 2D drawing and
annotation and 3D modeling, viewing, and rendering. See also ribbon tab
and ribbon panel and slide-out panel. (RIBBON)

ribbon panel

A labeled control in the ribbon. Ribbon panels contain buttons or other


controls. Multiple ribbon panels form a ribbon tab.

ribbon tab

The most general control on the ribbon. Ribbon tabs contain ribbon panels,
which contain buttons or other controls.
vertical ribbon

The ribbon when it is oriented vertically, usually on the left or right of the
file window.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Enhanced Tooltips
Concept Procedure

To turn tooltips on or off

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.

2. In the Application Options dialog box, General tab, under Tooltip


Appearance, click Show Tooltips.

3. Click OK.

To control the display of the second-level tooltip

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.

2. In the Application Options dialog box, General tab, under Tooltip


Appearance, click arrows to specify the seconds to delay the display of
the second-level tooltip.

3. Click OK.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

InfoCenter

Topics in this section

Find Information Using InfoCenter


Glossary
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter >

Find Information Using InfoCenter


Concept Procedure

To browse search results

To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel

To search multiple sources for information

To search a single location for information

To add a location to search

To access the Subscription Center in the program

To display the InfoCenter Favorites panel

To save a link in InfoCenter as a favorite

To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel

To specify locations to search for information

To add a new location to search for information

To remove a search location

To specify the CAD Manager Channel location and name

To specify the channels to display in the Communication Center panel

To specify InfoCenter balloon notification settings

To add an RSS feed to Communication Center

To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center

To display topics in Help


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Overview of InfoCenter
Concept Procedure

To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel

1. Display a panel by doing one of the following:

In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. Then press


ENTER or click the Search button.

In the InfoCenter box, click the Communication Center button.

In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button.

2. Click and drag a category or group header to the desired position.

Note You can rearrange categories within a group, but you cannot move them
into other groups.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Search For Information


Concept Procedure

To add a location to search

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2. Click Add Search Location.

3. In the Add Search Location dialog box, specify a document or a file


location to search.

4. Click Add.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Access Subscription Center


Concept Procedure

To access the Subscription Center in the program

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the Subscription Center button.

2. On the Subscription Center panel, under Subscription Center, click the


subscription resource you want to access.

Note Subscription Center is not available to all product users. If subscription


resources are not available in your product, your product is not entitled to
subscription benefits.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Receive Product Updates and


Announcements

You can click the Communication Center button to display links to


information about product updates and announcements, and may include
links to RSS feeds.

Topics in this section

Overview of Communication Center


Receive New Information Notifications
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements >

Overview of Communication Center

To open Communication Center, click the Communication Center button in


the InfoCenter box.

Communication Center provides the following types of announcements:

Autodesk Channels: Receive support information, product updates, and


other announcements (including articles and tips).

CAD Manager Channel. Receive information (RSS feeds) published by


your CAD manager.

RSS Feeds. Receive information from RSS feeds to which you subscribe.
RSS feeds generally notify you when new content is posted. You are
automatically subscribed to several default RSS feeds when you install
the program.

You can customize the items that display in the Communication Center panel.

Communication Center Online Policy

Communication Center is an interactive feature that must be connected to the


Internet in order to deliver content and information. Each time Communication
Center is connected, it sends your information to Autodesk so that you receive
the correct information. All information is sent anonymously to Autodesk to
maintain your privacy.

Communication Center sends the following information to Autodesk:

Product name (in which you are using Communication Center)

Product release number

Product language

Country/region (specified in the Communication Center settings)


Your unique Customer Involvement Program (CIP) ID if you are
participating in the CIP program

Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from Communication


Center to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved. Autodesk
maintains information provided by or collected from you in accordance with the
company's published privacy policy, which is available at
http://www.autodesk.com/privacy.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements >

Receive New Information Notifications

Whenever new information is available, Communication Center notifies you


by displaying a balloon message below the Communication Center button
on the InfoCenter box.

Click the link in the balloon message to open the article or announcement.

If you don’t want to receive Communication Center notifications, in the InfoCenter


Settings dialog box, turn off Balloon Notification.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Save and Access Favorite Topics


Concept Procedure

To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button to display the


Favorites panel.

2. Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to
remove from the Favorites panel.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Specify InfoCenter Settings


Concept Procedure

To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center

1. In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2. Click Search Settings.

3. In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click RSS Feeds.

4. In the right pane, do one of the following:

Click Remove.

Right-click an RSS feed. Click Remove.

5. In the InfoCenter - Remove RSS Feed dialog box, click Yes.

6. Click OK.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using
InfoCenter >

Search Topics in Help


Concept Procedure

To display topics in Help

In the InfoCenter box, click the Help button.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter >

Glossary

Communication Center

Displays links to information about product updates and product


announcements.

InfoCenter

You can use InfoCenter to search a variety of information sources with one
query. You can also easily access product updates and announcements.

RSS feed

Information published by a website to which you subscribe. Usually allows


users to receive notifications when new content is posted, such as articles,
etc. RSS stands for Rich Site Summary (or Really Simple Syndication).

Subscription Center

Provides access to information about subscription services such as product


enhancements, web support from Autodesk technical experts, and self-
paced e-Learning.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Navigation tools

Navigation tools change the orientation and view of your model.


The display of a model can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the
magnification at which objects are displayed, rotating the model among other
ways of changing the orientation of the model using the tools on SteeringWheels.
You can create a view that defines an area of a model as the Home view and use
preset views to restore known viewpoints of a model with the Autodesk ®
ViewCube® navigation tool.

Topics in this section


View Cube
SteeringWheels
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools >

View Cube
Concept Procedure

To control the position of ViewCube

To control the size of ViewCube

To control the inactive opacity of ViewCube

To display the compass below ViewCube

To display the ViewCube menu


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

Overview of the ViewCube


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

ViewCube Options

Sets the preferences for working with the ViewCube.

Access: Select Tools tab Options panel Application Options


Display tab, and then click ViewCube.
Right-click on the ViewCube and select Options.

Application Options

Display

When Dragging on the ViewCube

When clicking on the ViewCube

Default ViewCube Orientation

Document Settings
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

ViewCube Menu
Concept Procedure

To display the ViewCube menu

To display the ViewCube menu, do one of the following:

Right-click on the compass, Home icon, or the main area of the


ViewCube.

Click the context menu button located near the ViewCube.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

Reorient the View of a Model with the


ViewCube
Concept Procedure

To reorient the current view to a preset orientation

To view an adjacent face

To interactively reorient the view

To use animated transitions when reorienting a view to a preset orientation

To automatically fit the model after a view orientation

To roll a face view

To define the Front view

To restore the Front view

To change the view projection mode

To define the Home view

To reorient the model to the Home view

To lock to the current selection

To examine an individual object with the ViewCube


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient
the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Reorient the Current View


Concept Procedure

To restore the Front view

Right-click on the ViewCube, and click Reset Front.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient
the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Set the View Projection Mode


Concept Procedure

To change the view projection mode

1. Right-click on the ViewCube, and click one of the following options:

Orthographic

Perspective

Perspective with Ortho Faces


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient
the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Home View
Concept Procedure

To reorient the model to the Home view

Use one of the following methods:

Click the Home button ( ) located near the ViewCube.

Right-click the ViewCube, and click Go Home.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient
the View of a Model with the ViewCube >

Examine Individual Objects with the


ViewCube
Concept Procedure

To examine an individual object with the ViewCube

1. In the model, select one or more objects to define the center point of
the view.

2. Click one of the preset locations on the ViewCube, or click and drag
the ViewCube to reorient the view of the model.
The ViewCube reorients the view of the model based on the center
point of the selected objects.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube >

Glossary

3D view

Any view where the UCS icon appears in rendered colored form: current
visual style is not 2D Wireframe.

compass

A visual aid that indicates the directions North, South, East, and West in
the current model.

Home view

A special view saved with the drawing that is controlled through the
ViewCube. The Home view is similar in concept to the default, initial view
presented when a drawing is first opened.

roll arrows

Curved arrows located above the ViewCube with which you can rotate the
current view 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise.

selection sensitivity

The ability to define the pivot point for reorienting a model based on the
current selection.

ViewCube

User interface element that displays the current orientation of a model. You
can interactively rotate the current view or restore a preset view.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools >

SteeringWheels
Concept Procedure

To display a Wheel

To close a wheel

To change the size of a wheel

To change the opacity of a wheel

To enable tooltips for a wheel

To enable tools messages for a wheel

To display the Wheel menu


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Overview of SteeringWheels
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

SteeringWheels Options

Access:

Click Tools tab Options panel Application Options


Display tab
Right-click the wheel in the graphics window and select Options

Show Tool Messages

Show Tool Tips

Display

Navigation Options
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Wheel Menu
Concept Procedure

To display the Wheel menu

Click the down arrow in the lower-right corner of the wheel or right-click
on the wheel.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Navigation Wheels
Concept Procedure

To switch to the big View Objects wheel

To switch to the mini View Objects wheel

To switch to the big Tour Building wheel

To switch to the mini Tour Building wheel

To switch to the big Full Navigation wheel

To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

2D Navigation Wheel

With this wheel, you can access basic 2D navigation tools; it is particularly useful
when you do not have a pointing device with a scroll wheel. The wheel includes
the Pan and Zoom tools.

The 2D Navigation wheel wedges have the following options:

Pan. Repositions the current view by panning.

Zoom. Adjusts the magnification of the current view.

Rewind. Restores the most recent view orientation. You can move
backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

View Object Wheels


Concept Procedure

To switch to the mini View Objects wheel

Right-click the wheel, and click Mini View Object Wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

Tour Building Wheels


Concept Procedure

To switch to the mini Tour Building wheel

Right-click the wheel, and click Mini Tour Building Wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels >

Full Navigation Wheels


Concept Procedure

To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel

Right-click the wheel, and click Mini Full Navigation Wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Navigation Tools
Concept Procedure

To specify a point on a model as the center of a view

To specify the target point for the Zoom and Orbit tools

To reorient a view by moving towards or away from the model

To look around a view with the Look tool

To look around and walk through a model with the Look tool

To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool

To orbit a model with the Orbit tool

To orbit around an object with the Orbit tool

To turn on selection sensitivity for the Orbit tool

To start the Orbit tool with the middle mouse button

To pan the view with the Pan tool

To start the Pan tool with the middle button

To restore the previous view

To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel

To change the elevation of a view

To use the Walk tool to move through the model

To change the movement speed for the Walk tool

To constrain the Walk tool to the ground plane

To adjust the height of the current view from the Walk tool

To zoom the view with a single click

To zoom a view in and out by dragging

To zoom in to an area of the model by specifying window


To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is
displayed
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Center Tool
Concept Procedure

To specify the target point for the Zoom and Orbit tools

1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the big View Object wheel.

2. Click and hold down the Center wedge.

3. Drag the cursor over the desired location of the model.

4. Release the button on your pointing device when the sphere is


displayed.
The model is panned until the sphere is centered.

5. Use the Zoom or Orbit tool to reorient the view of the model.
If you are using one of the Full Navigation wheels, hold down the CTRL
key before using the Zoom tool.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Forward Tool
Concept Procedure

To reorient a view by moving towards or away from the model

1. Display the big Tour Building wheel.

2. Click and hold down the Forward wedge within the scope of the model.
The Drag Distance indicator is displayed.
Note If you click the Forward wedge once, the model moves forward
50% of the distance between the current location and the pivot point.

3. Drag the cursor up or down to change the distance from which you
view the model.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Look Tool
Concept Procedure

To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool

1. Display a wheel.

2. Right-click the wheel, and click Options.

3. In the SteeringWheels Options dialog box, select Invert Vertical Axis for
Look Tool.
Dragging downward and upward lowers and raises the target point of
the current view.

4. Click OK.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Orbit Tool
Concept Procedure

To start the Orbit tool with the middle mouse button

1. Display one of the wheels other than the big View Object or Tour
Building wheels.

2. Press and hold down the SHIFT key.

3. Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button on your pointing
device and drag to orbit the model.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Pan Tool
Concept Procedure

To start the Pan tool with the middle button

1. Display the 2D Navigation wheel, the Full Navigation wheel, or one of


the mini wheels.

2. Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button.


The cursor changes to the Pan cursor.

3. Drag to reposition the model.

4. Release the wheel or button on your pointing device to return to the


wheel.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Rewind Tool
Concept Procedure

To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel

1. Display a wheel.

2. Click and hold the Rewind wedge.


The Rewind History panel is displayed.

3. While holding down the button on your pointing device, drag to the left
or to the right to restore a previous view.
Dragging to the left restores an older previous view. Dragging to the
right restores a view that is newer than the one you are currently
viewing. You must have previously used the Rewind tool to see views
available on the right. The current position in the navigation history is
indicated by the orange box dragged along the Rewind History panel.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Up/Down Tool
Concept Procedure

To change the elevation of a view

1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the Tour Building wheels.

2. Click and hold down the Up/Down wedge.


The Vertical Distance indicator is displayed.

3. Drag up or down to change the elevation of the view.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Walk Tool
Concept Procedure

To adjust the height of the current view from the Walk tool

1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the mini Tour Building
wheel.

2. Click and hold down the Walk wedge.


The cursor changes to the Walk cursor and the Center Circle icon is
displayed.

3. Do one of the following:

Press and hold down the SHIFT key to enable the Up/Down
tool; drag up or down.

Press and hold down the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key.

4. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation
tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools >

Zoom Tool
Concept Procedure

To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is


displayed

1. Display one of the wheels other than the big Tour Building wheel.

2. Scroll the wheel forward or backward to zoom in or out.

3. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels >

Glossary

basic wheels

A reference to the View Object wheel and Tour Building wheel.

big wheels

The large version of the SteeringWheels. Labels are displayed on each


wheel wedge and they are larger than the size of the cursor.

First Contact balloon

The interactive graphical tooltip that is displayed when the SteeringWheel is


pinned during startup.

heads-up display (HUD)

The process of transparently displaying user interface elements on top of or


over the drawing area without obscuring the view of the objects drawn on
the drawing area.

mini wheels

The small version of SteeringWheels. No labels are displayed on any of the


wedges, and they are often the size of the cursor.

rewind

Restores the previous view or movement path created by the Autodesk ®


ViewCube® navigation tool, SteeringWheels, and other navigation tools.

selection sensitivity

The ability to define the pivot point to reorienting a model based on the
current selection.

SteeringWheels

Tool set that provides access to 2D and 3D navigation tools.

tool message
A small instructional message that appears over the drawing window and is
specific to the active navigation tool from a SteeringWheel.

tracking menu

A cluster of buttons that follows the cursor as you move it over the window.

wheel

A reference to one of the individual user interface elements that make up


SteeringWheels. See also SteeringWheels.

wheel surface

Area of a SteeringWheel that is used to organize wedges and other buttons.

wheel wedge

A section on the surface of a SteeringWheel that is designated for a specific


navigation or orientation tool.

wheels

A reference to more than one of the individual user interface elements that
make up SteeringWheels. See also SteeringWheels.

wrap around

Behavior in which the cursor wraps around the window and appears on the
opposite side to allow the continuation of a drag operation instead of
stopping at the edge of the drawing area.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Navigation Bar
Concept Procedure

Use the navigation bar

View faces of models from selected planes

Pan views

Rotate views with the Free Orbit and Constrained Orbit command

Zoom views in or out

Zoom to view all

Zoom views of selected features

Zoom views of areas


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar >

Access Navigation Tools from the


Navigation Bar
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Viewing commands
The viewing commands manipulate the view in the graphics window of the active
part, assembly or drawing, or a view in the Engineer's Notebook. You can use
viewing commands to manipulate the view while performing other operations. For
example, rotating a part during a fillet operation so that you can select edges that
are otherwise hidden.

In a part or assembly, zooms the view so that all elements in


the model fit in the graphics window. In a drawing, zooms the
view so that all active sheet fits in the graphics window.

Changes the cursor into cross hairs that are used to define a
frame for the view. The elements within the frame zoom to fill
the graphics window.

Turns the cursor to an arrow that is used to zoom the view in


or out.

Changes the cursor to a four-directional arrow used to drag the


view in the graphics window.

In a part or assembly, zooms the selected edge, feature, line,


or other element to fill the graphics window. You can select the
element either before or after clicking Zoom. Not used in
drawings.

In a part or assembly, adds a rotate symbol and cursor to the


view. You can rotate the view planar to the screen around the
center mark, around a horizontal or vertical axis, or around the
X and Y axes. Not used in drawings.
In a part or assembly, zooms and rotates the model to display
the selected element planar to the screen or a selected edge or
line horizontal to the screen. Not used in drawings.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar >

Glossary

navigation bar

Interface element from which you can access both unified and product-
specific navigation tools from a centralized location.

unified navigation tools

Navigation tools that are common across multiple Autodesk programs. The
unified navigation tools include Autodesk ® ViewCube® and SteeringWheels
navigation tools.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Views of models
Concept Procedure

Display shadows

Navigating a model in 3D
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models >

Orthographic views
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Display shadows

To present a model more realistically and provide orientation when viewing a


model, you can cast a shadow on the plane beneath the model. If visibility of any
geometry such as a feature or surface is turned off, no shadow is cast. Work
features, annotations, and sketch geometry are not visible in shadows.

On the View tab, Appearance panel, click the down arrow on the Shadow
command.

Choose one:

No Shadow The default setting displays the model without a


shadow.

Ground Shadow Casts a shadow on the plane below the


model.

X-Ray Shadow Same as Ground Shadow, except that details


of individual components are visible.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models >

Perspective views
Concept Procedure

Navigating a model in 3D

In Perspective Camera mode, use the Zoom


and Pan commands in conjunction with key
combinations to navigate through a model in
3D.

Set the model view to Perspective Camera


mode by selecting the Perspective Camera in
the Appearance panel of the View tab. Then,
position the model so that you are sighting
down the axis of your intended initial motion.

1. Use the key combination SHIFT+F3. Click and hold


the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the
Zoom command is active. This moves the camera
and the camera target point along your current line
of sight.
2. Use key F3. Click and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse while the Zoom command is
active. This moves the camera and the camera
target point along your current line of sight.
2. Use the key combination SHIFT+F2. Click and hold
the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the
Pan command is active. This action pivots the
camera to change the line of sight.

Show Me how to navigate through a model in 3D.

Tip You can adjust camera position and lens focal length simultaneously to set
the amount of perspective distortion. For instance, for a given view or view path,
you may need a wider angle lens. Use SHIFT+CTRL+F3.

Note The term "camera mode" indicates only the particular view method used for
models in the graphics window. It is not meant to indicate that you can record
actions that take place in the graphics window by choosing either Perspective
Camera mode or Orthographic Camera mode.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Browser Icon Reference

Topics in this section

Sketch
Construction
Model
Sheet Metal
Assembly
Weldments
Drawing
Presentation
State
Substitute
Analysis
Notebook
Application
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Sketch

2D Sketch displays geometry in associated 2D sketch.

Shared 2D displays geometry in shared 2D sketch.


Sketch

Helical Curve displays geometry associated with a helical


curve in a 3D sketch.

Project to displays 3D sketch geometry created by


Surface Along projection of a curve onto a surface along a
Vector vector.

Project Cut Edges displays cut model edges projected onto the
sketch plane.
Project to displays 3D sketch geometry created by
Surface at projection of a curve onto a surface at the
Closest Point closest points. Projection directions are
defined by the surface normals.

Wrap Projected displays 3D sketch geometry created by


Curves to wrapping projected curves about a surface.
Surface

3D Sketch displays geometry in associated 3D sketch.

Shared 3D displays geometry in shared 3D sketch.


Sketch
Sketch Image displays associated sketch image.

Project Loop displays 2D sketch geometry created by


projection of a loop onto the sketch plane.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Construction

Construction displays geometry group in the construction


Group environment.
Construction displays solid geometry in the construction
Solid environment.

Construction displays surface geometry in the


Surface construction environment.

Construction Wire displays wire geometry in the construction


environment.

Data Checked indicates geometry was checked with the


with Errors Quality Check tool and errors exist.
Data Checked no indicates geometry was checked with the
Errors Quality Check tool and no errors exist.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Model

Angle iMate displays iMate defined with angle constraint.


Surface Part displays surface part model.

Shared Surface displays shared surface part model.


Part
Part displays the solid part model.

Blocks contains sketch block definitions.


Block Instance displays the associated sketch block
instance.
Bend displays the part bend feature.

Boundary Patch displays the associated surface boundary


patch.

Shared Boundary displays the surface boundary patch shared


Patch by different features.

Chamfer displays the associated chamfer feature.


Circular Pattern displays the associated circular pattern of
of Part the solid part and contains the pattern
occurrences.

Circular Pattern displays the associated circular pattern of


the feature and contains the pattern
occurrences.
Coil Surface displays the associated coil surface.

Shared Coil displays the coil surface shared by different


Surface features.

Coil displays the associated solid coil feature.


Composite displays the associated composite feature.

Shared displays the composite shared by different


Composite features.
Composite iMate displays iMate composed of multiple iMates.

End of Part bounds the features that are processed


Marker (above the marker) from those that are not
(below the marker).
Decal indicates a decal has been placed on a
model face.
model face.
Delete Face displays the delete face feature created with
the Delete Face command.
Broken Link indicates the link between the derived and
base components is broken.
Derived Part displays the associated derived part and
contains the included parts and features.
Derived Surface displays the associated surface for the
derived part.
Shared Derived displays the derived surface shared by
Surface different features.
Emboss displays the associated emboss feature.

Extend Surface displays the associated extended surface


feature.

Extrusion Surface displays surface extrusion feature.

Shared Extrusion displays surface extrusion feature shared by


Surface different features.

Extrusion displays solid extrusion feature.


Face Draft displays the associated face draft feature.

Face Loop displays the associated face loop feature.

Fillet displays the associated fillet feature.


Flush iMate displays iMate defined with flush constraint.

Hole displays the associated hole feature.

Insert iMate displays iMate defined with insert constraint.


3D Intersection displays 3D curve created at geometry
intersection.

iPart displays associated iPart.


Disabled iPart displays iPart that is not enabled.

Disabled displays grounded iPart that is not enabled.


Grounded iPart

Grounded iPart displays grounded iPart.

Stitch Surface displays the associated stitch surface


feature.

Shared Stitch displays stitch surface feature shared by


Surface different features.

Loft Surface displays surface loft feature.


Shared Loft displays surface loft feature shared by
Surface different features.

Loft displays solid loft feature.

Mate iMate displays iMate defined with mate constraint.

Mirror displays the mirrored part or features and


contains the mirror occurrences.

Move Face displays the associated moved face feature.


Derived Box displays a bounding box body representative
of the derived component.
Derived Cut indicates the component was subtracted
from the derived part.
Derived Intersect displays the solid created from the
intersection of the associated component
and the other solid components.

Derived Include displays the section of the associated


component included in the derived part.

Origin Plane displays the associated model origin plane.


Origin Point displays the model origin point.

Part displays part.

Disabled Part displays part that is not enabled.

Disabled displays grounded part that is not enabled.


Grounded Part

Grounded Part displays part with all degrees of freedom


removed.

Pattern displays feature or part occurrence in the


Occurrence pattern.

Pattern indicates the pattern occurrence is set to


Occurrence independent relative to the pattern.
Independent

Rectangular displays the associated rectangular pattern


Pattern of Part of the solid part and contains the pattern
occurrences.

Rectangular displays the associated rectangular pattern


Pattern of the feature and contains the pattern
occurrences.
Replace Face displays the associated replace face feature.

Revolve Surface displays surface revolve feature.

Shared Revolve displays surface revolve feature shared by


Surface different features.
Surface different features.

Revolve displays solid revolve feature.

Rib displays the associated rib feature.

Rotation iMate displays iMate defined with rotation motion


constraint.

Rotation- displays iMate defined with rotation-


Translation iMate translation motion constraint.

Sculpt displays the

Shell displays the associated shell feature.

Split displays the associated split feature.


Sweep Surface displays surface sweep feature.

Shared Sweep displays surface sweep feature shared by


Surface different features.

Sweep displays solid sweep feature.


Table Folder organizes iPart or iAssembly members in the
browser based on the keys chosen in the
author tables. Icons are shown when List by
Keys is selected in the context menu.
Table Item activates the iPart or iAssembly member.
The active member is shown with a check
mark.

Table accesses iPartor iAssembly authors.


Tangent iMate displays iMate defined with tangent
constraint.
Thicken Surface displays surface thicken feature.

Shared Thicken displays surface thicken feature shared by


Surface different features.

Thicken displays solid thicken feature.


Thread displays the associated thread feature.
Trim Surface displays the surface created with the trim
surface command.
iFeature displays the associated iFeature.

Grounded Work displays a work axis with all degrees of


Axis freedom removed.

Shared Grounded displays a grounded work axis shared by


Work Axis different features.

Work Axis displays a construction geometry axis used


to facilitate the creation of part features.
to facilitate the creation of part features.

Shared Work Axis displays a work axis shared by different


features.

Grounded Work displays a work plane with all degrees of


Plane freedom removed.

Shared Grounded displays a grounded work plane shared by


Work Plane different features.

Work Plane displays a construction geometry plane used


to facilitate the creation of part features.

Shared Work displays a work plane shared by different


Plane features.

Grounded Work displays a work point with all degrees of


Point freedom removed.

Shared Grounded displays a grounded work point shared by


Work Point different features.

Work Point displays a construction geometry point used


to facilitate the creation of part features.

Shared Work displays a work point shared by different


Point features.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Sheet Metal

Corner Chamfer displays sheet metal corner chamfer.


Contour Flange displays sheet metal contour flange.

Corner Seam displays seam between two sheet metal


faces.
Cut displays sheet metal cut feature.

Part displays sheet metal part.


Disabled displays grounded sheet metal part that is
Grounded Part not enabled.
Disabled Part displays sheet metal part that is not
enabled.
Invisible indicates presence of grounded sheet metal
Grounded Part part with visibility turned off.
Invisible Part indicates presence of sheet metal part with
visibility turned off.
Grounded Part displays sheet metal part with all degrees of
freedom removed.
Face displays sheet metal face.

Corner Round displays sheet metal corner round.


Flange displays sheet metal flange.
Flat Pattern displays sheet metal flat pattern when
active.

Folded Model displays sheet metal folded model when


active.

Fold displays sheet metal fold.

Hem displays sheet metal hem.

Punch displays cut or shape punched in a sheet


metal face.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Assembly

Angle Constraint displays components engaged in an angle


constraint.
Angle iMate displays components engaged in an angle
Result iMate.

Composite iMate displays components engaged in a


Result composite iMate.

Layout Constraint displays components engaged in a layout


constraint.

Private Design activates the associated private design view.


View
Design View activates the associated design view.

Locked Design indicates the design view is locked and


View cannot be affected by changes to the
assembly model.

Assembly displays assembly.

Disabled displays assembly that is not enabled.


Assembly
Disabled displays grounded assembly that is not
Grounded enabled.
Assembly
Grounded displays assembly with all degrees of
Assembly freedom removed.

Flush Constraint displays components engaged in a flush


constraint.

Flush iMate displays components engaged in a flush


Result iMate.

iAssembly indicates model is an iAssembly Factory


Factory
Disabled displays iAssembly Factory that is not
iAssembly enabled.
Factory
Disabled displays grounded iAssembly Factory that is
Grounded not enabled.
iAssembly
Factory
Grounded displays a grounded iAssembly Factory.
iAssembly
Factory
iAssembly displays component that is a member of an
Member iAssembly Factory.
Disabled displays component that is a member of an
iAssembly iAssembly Factory and that is not enabled.
Member
Disabled displays grounded component that is a
Grounded member of an iAssembly Factory and that is
iAssembly not enabled.
Member
Grounded displays grounded component that is a
iAssembly member of an iAssembly Factory.
Member
Insert Constraint displays components engaged in an insert
constraint.
Insert iMate displays components engaged in an insert
Result iMate.
Level of Detail contains the Level of Detail representations
Representation for the assembly.
Folder
Level of Detail activates the associated Level of Detail
Representation representation.
Level of Detail indicates Level of Detail browser entry is set
Representation to exclude.
Excluded
Substitute Level activates the associated substitute Level of
of Detail Detail representation.
Representation
Disabled displays the associated grounded substitute
Grounded Level of Detail in the assembly that is not
Substitute Level enabled.
of Detail
Invisible Level of indicates presence of a substitute Level of
Detail Substitute Detail with visibility turned off.
Invisible indicates presence of a grounded substitute
Grounded Level Level of Detail with visibility turned off.
of Detail
Substitute
Substitute Level displays the associated substitute Level of
of Detail (LOD) Detail (LOD) in the assembly.
Grounded displays the associated grounded substitute
Substitute Level Level of Detail in the assembly.
of Detail
Mate Constraint displays components engaged in a mate
constraint.

Axial Mate displays components engaged in a mate


Constraint constraint that includes at least one axis
Mate iMate displays components engaged in a mate
Result iMate.
Participant displays an assembly component that is
affected by an assembly feature.
Positional contains the positional representations for
Representation the assembly.
Folder
Positional activates the associated positional
Representation representation.
Representations contains the view, positional, and Level of
Folder Detail representations for an assembly.

User-defined groups assembly nodes for better browser


Folder organization.
Rotation displays components engaged in a rotational
Constraint motion constraint.
Rotation iMate displays components engaged in a rotation
Result iMate.
Rotation- displays components engaged in a
Translation rotational-translational motion constraint.
Constraint
Rotation- displays components engaged in a rotation-
Translation iMate translation iMate.
Translation iMate translation iMate.
Result
Tangent displays components engaged in a tangent
Constraint constraint.
Tangent iMate displays components engaged in a tangent
Result iMate.

Translational displays components engaged in a


Constraint translational motion constraint.
Virtual indicates presence of virtual component.
Component
Disabled Virtual indicates presence of virtual component that
Component is not enabled.
Disabled indicates presence of grounded virtual
Grounded Virtual component that is not enabled.
Component
Grounded Virtual indicates presence of virtual component with
Component all degrees of freedom removed.

Circular displays the associated circular pattern of


Component the component and contains the pattern
Pattern elements.

Element displays component as an element in the


pattern.

Rectangular displays the associated rectangular pattern


Component of the component and contains the pattern
Pattern elements.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Weldments

Cosmetic Weld displays graphical element representative of


a cosmetic weld.
Cosmetic Weld displays graphical element representative of
with Symbol a cosmetic weld with associated weld
symbol.
Weldment displays the weldment assembly. The
assembly is enabled and can be edited in-
place.
Weldment not displays the weldment assembly in the
Enabled background. The assembly is not enabled
and cannot be edited in-place.

Grounded displays the grounded weldment assembly in


Weldment not the background. The assembly is not
Enabled enabled and cannot be edited in-place.

Grounded displays the grounded weldment assembly.


Weldment The assembly is enabled and can be edited
in-place

Fillet Weld displays the assembly features that


represent a fillet weld

Fillet Weld with displays the assembly features that


Symbol represent a fillet weld with associated weld
symbol.
Groove Weld displays the assembly features that
represent a groove weld
Groove Weld with displays the assembly features that
Symbol represent a groove weld with associated
weld symbol.

Machining displays assembly features that represent


the post-weld machining and finishing. Valid
assembly features for machining include
chamfers, extrude cuts, and holes.

Preparations displays assembly features (chamfers,


extrude cut, and holes) used to remove
extrude cut, and holes) used to remove
material to prepare the model for welding.

Weld Symbol displays the weld and associated symbol.


Welds displays assembly features that represent
the actual weld. Assembly weld bead
features can be cosmetic welds or solid fillet
or groove welds and can only reside in the
Welds feature group. The Beads folder is
located in the Welds feature group. It
contains all consumed and unconsumed
weld bead features. Right-click to select
options to sort beads by All Beads,
Consumed Beads Only, or Unconsumed
Beads Only.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Drawing

AutoCAD Block contains the AutoCAD blocks.


Folder
AutoCAD Block displays the AutoCAD block instance.

AutoCAD Model contains the model definition for the


AutoCAD DWG file opened in Inventor.

Assembly displays and provides access to the


assembly in the drawing view.
Auxiliary View indicates auxiliary view placed on a sheet
Shortcut different than the parent view. Use the
shortcut and go to the auxiliary view sheet.
Auxiliary View indicates a view projected from an edge or a
line in a base view.

Border Folder contains border formats.

Border provides access to format and insert a sheet


border.

Sheet Border provides access to delete the current sheet


border.
Break Out indicates material was removed from an
existing view to expose obscured parts or
features.
Crop View displays view cropped from another view.
Detail View indicates detail view placed on a sheet
Shortcut different than the parent view. Use the
shortcut and go to the detail view sheet.

Detail View indicates a detail of a specified portion of a


base view. The view is created without an
alignment to the base view, but can be
attached to the base view.
AutoCAD Drawing indicates the drawing is an AutoCAD DWG
file. View, plot and measure the file
contents in Inventor.
Drawing displays drawing file.
Draft View displays a view that contains one or more
associated sketches. The draft view does not
contain a representation of a 3D model.
Drawing contains resources that are used to add and
Resources set up new drawing sheets.
User-defined groups symbols for better browser
Symbols Folder organization.
Field Text provides access to drawing property fields.

General Table displays and provides access to the


associated general table.
Hole Table displays and provides access to the
associated hole table.
Sketch Symbol displays the associated non-static sketch
symbol on the drawing sheet.
Overlay View uses a positional representation to show an
assembly in different positions in a single
view.
Parts List displays and provides access to the
associated parts list.

Part displays and provides access to the part in


the drawing view.

Projected View indicates projected view placed on a sheet


Shortcut different than the parent view. Use the
shortcut and go to the projected view sheet.
Projected View indicates a first-angle or third-angle
projection of a base view, depending on the
drafting standard.
Revision Table displays and provides access to the
associated revision table.
Section View indicates section view placed on a sheet
Shortcut different than the parent view. Use the
shortcut and go to the section view sheet.
Section View indicates a full, half, offset, partial, or
aligned section view from a specified base
view.
Sheet Format contains sheet formats.
Folder
Sheet displays and provides access to edit the
associated sheet.
Sheet Sketch displays and provides access to the
associated sheet sketch.
Sketched Symbol contains sketch symbols.
Folder

Sketch Symbol provides access to associated sketch symbol


Template definition.
Slice indicates a zero-depth section or "slice"
from an existing view.
Static Sketched displays the associated static sketched
Symbol symbol on the drawing sheet.
Title Block Folder contains title block formats.

Title Block provides access to edit the associated title


block.
Shortcut to Base indicates the views were created as
View dependent views on a different sheet. Use
the shortcut and go to the parent view
sheet.

Independent indicates the first placed view in a new


View drawing or a view independent of existing
drawing views.

Drawing Attached indicates a detail view pinned to another


" view.
Updates Deferred indicates the drawing file is in a deferred
state.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Presentation

Presentation denotes top node of a presentation file.

Part displays a part.


Sequence displays tweaks and associated components.

Task contains one or more sequences.

Tweak Rotation displays rotational tweaks and associated


components.

Tweak displays translational tweaks and associated


Translation components.
Explosion contains presentation features for the active
view.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

State

Adaptive Error indicates a cross-part projection failure.

Adaptive Warning indicates a minor problem with the adaptive


relationship.

Analysis Invisible indicates that the analysis visibility is off.


Active indicates that the associated item is active.
Examples include active analysis, active
design view, and active positional
representation.

Contact Set indicates component is included in the


contact set.
Contact Set Error indicates a serious problem with the contact
set.

Contact Set indicates a minor problem with the contact


Warning set.

Adaptive indicates an adaptive part or feature.

Excluded indicates associated component has been set


to exclude.
Healthy indicates no errors are present relative to
the associated browser entry.

Unresolved File indicates that a file link is unresolved.


Update Required indicates associated entry in the browser is
outdated.

Warning indicates a minor problem. Hover over the


icon for additional information.
Error indicates a serious problem. Hover over the
icon for additional information.
Flexible indicates a flexible assembly or sketch
block.

Automatic Solve indicates a design accelerator component is


in automatic update mode.
Positional indicates the positional variation is unable to
Variation Sick resolve.
Manual Mode indicates a design accelerator component is
Updated in manual update mode and is up-to-date.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Substitute

Substitute Part displays part designated as a substitute.


Manual update of part required to reflect
changes made to external references.

Substitute Sheet displays sheet metal part designated as a


Metal Part substitute. Manual update of part required
to reflect changes made to external
references.

Substitute displays surface part designated as a


Surface Part substitute. Manual update of part required
to reflect changes made to external
references.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Analysis

Cross Section indicates a cross section analysis has been


Analysis performed. Activate the analysis to view the
results.

Curvature indicates a curvature analysis has been


Analysis performed. Activate the analysis to view the
results.
Draft Analysis indicates a draft analysis has been
performed. Activate the analysis to view the
results.
Surface Analysis indicates a Gaussian curvature analysis has
been performed. Activate the analysis to
view the results.

Zebra Analysis indicates a surface continuity analysis has


been performed. Activate the analysis to
view the results.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Notebook

Notebook View displays a view associated with a note in the


engineer's notebook.
Engineer's indicates presence of an engineer's
Notebook notebook associated with the part.

Note contains comments and views in the


engineer's notebook.

Comment displays a comment associated with a note


in the engineer's notebook.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference >

Application

OLE Folder contains files linked or embedded in an


Inventor model or drawing.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Basic 3D Workflow

Topics in this section

3D modeling concepts
DWG geometry workflow
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow >

3D modeling concepts
Concept Procedure

3D Animation

You can develop, play, and record animations of exploded views to show the
order and path of tweaks in a complex assembly. Use it to show a detailed
presentation of the prototype or the finished product being designed.

Show Me how to animate a presentation view


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow >

DWG geometry workflow

Using DWG Geometry Workflow

When starting a design using existing DWG geometry, the workflow is as follows:

1. Create a part.

2. Create a drawing of the part.

3. Put parts together into an assembly.

4. Create an assembly drawing.

To create a part using DWG geometry, first import your DWG geometry into an
Autodesk Inventor part sketch. The following tutorials each start with the same
DWG file to create part features. The final tutorial creates a part within an
assembly, and then shows how to place the previously created parts into position
in the assembly.

1. Create a part.

2. Create a drawing of the part.

What is the workflow for using DWG geometry?

Using DWG Tutorial 1 - Create a panel for an electrical box

Using DWG Tutorial 2 - Create a door for an electrical box

Using DWG Tutorial 3 - Create a box and assemble with the panel and
door
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Transition from 2D

Topics in this section

Basic foundations
Use your AutoCAD geometry
AutoCAD terms
More concepts
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

Basic foundations

Topics in this section

2D to 3D Comparison
Keystroke Reference
Autodesk Inventor file types
Dimension Commands
Geometry Creation Commands
Geometry Editing Commands
Insert commands
View Commands
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

2D to 3D Comparison

Geometry driven vs. dimension driven design

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


You create geometry and then You sketch a part and then
place dimensions. When you control the exact size and shape
change existing geometry, by changing the dimension
associated dimensions update. values. To change the length or
height, you change the dimension
values. You manage change
within that sketch by modifying
the dimension values rather than
modifying the geometry.

UCS icon vs. 3D indicator

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


The UCS icon helps you visualize A 3D indicator represents the X,
the orientation of the drawing Y, and Z axes. The red arrow
plane. It provides a movable indicates the X direction; green
coordinate system for coordinate indicates Y; and blue indicates Z.
entry, planes of operation, and However, you do not need to rely
viewing. Most AutoCAD geometric on the 3D Indicator much, and
editing commands are dependent you do not need to define snap
on the location and orientation of and grid settings or origin points.
the UCS. Objects are drawn on You do not need to use
the XY plane of the current UCS. coordinates when you draw.

Constraints

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


You do not use constraints or When you have components to
create relationships between assemble, you place constraints
primitives-based models. or "rules" on those components
Changing one primitive has no to restrict their movement.
impact on another primitive. Autodesk Inventor has six
impact on another primitive. Autodesk Inventor has six
different 3D assembly constraints
that determine how components
in your assembly fit together and
how they move: Mate, Angle,
Tangent, Insert, Rotation, and
Rotation-translation.

File types

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


You work with one file type: You work with a minimum of four
DWG. This DWG file contains file types. Multiple file types are
paper space, model space, 2D, advantageous because you can
and 3D. You cannot separate work separately on a part, an
your model from your drawing, assembly, or in a drawing file.
or work separately in 3D. All Multiple users can work on the
components of your work exist in same design at the same time.
the same file. Any changes associate and
update in all other files.

Dimensions

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


To dimension in AutoCAD, you You can place dimensions on
add measurement annotations to layers when used with drawings.
a drawing. You place these There are four basic dimension
dimensions on a layer. Basic types that are used differently as
dimensions in AutoCAD include you design: model dimensions,
linear, radial, angular, ordinate, reference dimensions, sketch
and arc length. You can also dimensions, and drawing
create dimensions that are dimensions.
associative, nonassociative, or
exploded.

Views

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


For each drawing, create each You can automatically generate
individual view of your model. It all the projected views for a
can be tedious if you have more model, including section,
than one view. auxiliary, and broken views.

Boolean operations

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


You have specific commands to You place the parts in an
create Boolean operations assembly, and then derive the
between different solids (union, assembly into a single part, while
subtract, intersect). applying the Boolean operation of
your choice.

Reuse of data and external files

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


To avoid file bloat and reuse You typically set up a project file
recurring data like library with a library path and place
elements or standard parts, you existing part files and standard
typically use blocks. Write them files in an assembly. Autodesk
out to a file (WBLOCK), and Inventor assemblies, by design,
reuse them as external store little data into the assembly
references (XREFS). file. Most of the data is stored in
the external part files.

Scale and mirror

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


There are specific scale and The scale and mirror commands
mirror commands that work on work on 2D geometry. To scale
both 2D and 3D geometry. or mirror a single 3D part, you
derive the part. You can also
mirror individual features or the
entire 3D part without using the
Derive command.

Selection and grips

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


You can window select both You can window select 2D
2D/3D geometry and use grips to geometry and select vertices and
stretch, move, rotate, mirror, segments to move and stretch
and scale. geometry. To select 3D geometry
and scale. geometry. To select 3D geometry
you use the "Component
selection" command. Because
Autodesk Inventor has a model
browser, alternatively, you can
select parts in the browser. For
operations like rotate, use the
dedicated command.

Styles and layers

2D AutoCAD 3D Autodesk Inventor


You have access to layers, text Text styles, dimension styles,
styles, and dimension styles and layers are available in the
throughout the product. drawing environment. Color and
light styles are available in parts,
assemblies, and presentations.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Keystroke Reference

Note The following applies only when default multi-character Command Aliases
are loaded. See Customize - Keyboard tab for information on how to enable or
disable default multi-character Command Aliases.

Autodesk Inventor has many predefined shortcut keys and command aliases. You
can also define your own custom shortcut keys and command aliases. A command
alias is an alphanumeric character or character sequence that can be used to
start a command. A shortcut can be defined using any of the following keys or
key combinations:

A punctuation key (including ` - = [ ] \ ; ' , . /), or one of the following


keys: Home, End, Page Up, Page Down, Up Arrow, Down Arrow.

A combination of the Shift key along with a numeric key (0-9),


punctuation key, or one of the following keys: Home, End, Page Up,
Page Down, Up Arrow, Down Arrow.

Any combination of Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys along with an alphanumeric
character.

Other keys, including function can have reserved shortcuts assigned to them, but
these keys are not user-definable.

Using the defined key, combination of keys, or character sequence, you can start
a command like an AutoCAD command alias. The following table represents a
subset of the more shortcut keys and command aliases which are predefined in
Autodesk Inventor 2010. You can see all predefined shortcut keys and command
aliases by selecting Tools tab Options panel Customize and clicking the
Keyboard tab.

Warning: The following table does not apply if other definitions are imported, or
the Autodesk Inventor 2010 definitions are edited.

Note Some shortcut keys and command aliases are only active in specific
environments.

Key Name Function Category


F1 Help Help for the Global
active
command or
dialog box.
F2 Pan Pans the Global
graphics
window.
F3 Zoom Zooms in or Global
out in the
graphics
window.
F4 Rotate Rotates Global
objects in the
graphics
window.
F5 Previous View Returns to Global
the previous
view.
F6 Isometric Display the Global
View isometric
view of the
model.
F7 Slice Graphics Partially slice Sketch
away the
model to
reveal the
sketch plane.
F8 Show All Display all Sketch
Constraints constraints.
F9 Hide All Hide All Sketch
Constraints Constraints.
Esc Quit Quits a Global
command.
Delete Delete Deletes Global
selected
objects.
Alt + drag In Assembly
mouse assemblies,
applies a
mate
constraint. In
a sketch,
moves spline
shape points.
Ctrl + Y Redo Activates Global
Redo
(revokes the
last Undo).
Ctrl + Z Undo In the active Global
Line
command,
removes the
last sketched
segment.
Shift + right Activates the Global
mouse click Select
command
menu.
Shift + Automatically Global
Rotate rotates model
in graphics
window. Click
to quit.
B Balloon Activates the Drawing
Balloon
command.
BDA Baseline Activates the Drawing
Dimension Baseline
Set Dimension
Set
command.
C Center point To draw a Sketch
circle circle.
C Constraint Activates the Assembly
Constraint
command.
CH Chamfer Create a Part /Assembly
chamfer
CP Circular Creates 2D Sketch
Pattern circular
pattern of
sketch
geometry.
D General Activates the Sketch / Drawing
Dimension General
Dimension General
Dimension
command.
D Face Draft Creates a Part
face draft /
taper.
E Extrude Activates the Part
Extrude
command.
F Fillet Creates a Part /Assembly
fillet.
FC Feature Activates the Drawing
Control Feature
Frame Control
Frame
command.
H Hole Activates the Part /Assembly
Hole
command.
L Line Activates the Sketch
Line
command
LE Leader Text Creates a Drawing
leader text
LO Loft Creates a loft Part
feature.
M Move Activates the Assembly
Component Move
Component
command.
MI Mirror Creates a Part /Assembly
mirror
feature.
N Create Activates the Assembly
Component Create
Component
command.
ODS Ordinate Activates the Sketch
Dimension Ordinate
Set Dimension
Set Dimension
Set
command.
P Place Activates the Assembly
Component Place
Component
command.
Q Create iMate Activates the Assembly
Create iMate
command.
R Revolve Activates the Part /Assembly
Revolve
command.
RO Rotate Activates the Assembly
Component Rotate
Component
command.
RP Rectangular Creates Part /2D Sketch
Pattern rectangular
pattern of
feature or
sketch
geometry.
S 2D Sketch Activates the 2D
2D Sketch Sketch/Part/Assembly
command.
S3 3D Sketch Activates the Part
3D Sketch
command.
SW Sweep Creates a Part /Assembly
sweep
feature.
T Text Activates the Sketch/Drawing
Text
command.
T Tweak Activates the Presentation
Components Tweak
Components
command.
TR Trim Activates the Sketch
Trim
command.
] Work Plane Creates a Global
work plane.
/ Work Axis Creates a Global
work axis.
. Work Point Creates a Global
work point.
; Grounded Creates a Global
Work Point grounded
work point.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Autodesk Inventor file types

Unlike AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop, which maintain one file with multiple
types of data, Autodesk Inventor maintains data in multiple associated files.

3D part model data is contained in a file with the extension .ipt.

3D assembly model data is contained in a file with the extension .iam.

2D drawing data is contained in a file with the extension .idw, .dwg.

Autodesk Inventor also maintains:

Presentation files (.ipn), that contain definitions for exploded assemblies


and specialized assembly views.

iFeature files (.ide) that contain iFeatures definitions

Related files are associated to each other. When you change a file, its dependent
files are updated. For example, when you change an assembly, drawing views and
presentations of that assembly update automatically.

You can translate the following file types (See Access files from other CAD
systems):

.prt, .asm, .g, .neu (Pro/ENGINEER)

.x_t, .x_b (Parasolid)

.prt, .sldprt, .asm, .sldasm (SolidWorks)

.prt (UGS NX)

.dwg (AutoCAD)

.dxf

.iges

.sat

.step

Note You can translate or open an AutoCAD DWG file. You can only open an
Autodesk Inventor DWG file (.dwg).

Note on opening DWG files


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Dimension Commands

Many AutoCAD commands are equivalent to commands in Autodesk Inventor.


Autodesk Inventor has additional commands that have no equivalent in AutoCAD.
In AutoCAD, you create 2D geometries to the required dimensions. In Autodesk
Inventor, the dimensions drive the geometry parametrically.

Several commands in Autodesk Inventor combine the functionality of multiple


single commands in AutoCAD. The General Dimension command creates a linear
dimension when you select one or two elements, a diameter dimension when you
select a circle, and a radius dimension when you select an arc. This command
replaces several single-purpose AutoCAD commands.

This table shows AutoCAD Dimension commands and the corresponding Autodesk
Inventor Dimension commands in 2D Sketch environment.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Linear Dimension General Dimension

Aligned Dimension General Dimension

Radius Dimension General Dimension

Diameter Dimension General Dimension

Angular Dimension General Dimension

Edit Dimension Double-click the


dimension

In addition, some AutoCAD Dimension commands have corresponding Autodesk


Inventor commands that can only be used when dimensioning in a drawing file
(IDW or DWG).

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Baseline Dimension Baseline Dimension


Continue Dimension General Dimension

Ordinate Dimension Ordinate Dimension

Quick Dimension Baseline Dimension Set

Ordinate Dimension Set

Quick Leader Leader Text

Tolerance Dimension Feature Control Frame

Center Mark Center Mark

Note on opening DWG files


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Geometry Creation Commands

In AutoCAD, you usually create 2D geometry to the precise size required. While
creating sketches for part features in Autodesk Inventor, you often use 2D Sketch
commands to create geometry quickly (with no regard to size). You then control
the precise size and position by adding dimensional and geometric constraints.

This table compares AutoCAD Drawing commands to the corresponding Autodesk


Inventor Sketch commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Line Line

Polyline Line

Polygon Polygon

Rectangle Two point rectangle

Arc Three point arc

Circle Center point circle

Spline Spline

Ellipse Ellipse

Point Point, Center Point

In addition, some AutoCAD Drawing commands have corresponding Autodesk


Inventor commands that can only be used when drawing a 2D sketch in a drawing
file (IDW or DWG).
AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Hatch Fill, Hatch Sketch Region

Text Text
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Geometry Editing Commands

Note on opening DWG files

You edit the 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor using the 2D editing commands to
update their 3D parts. You can also find a group of 3D editing commands to
modify 3D parts.

This table compares AutoCAD Editing commands to their corresponding Autodesk


Inventor 2D Editing commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Erase Delete key

Copy Ctrl+C

Mirror Mirror

Offset Offset

Array Circular pattern

Rectangular pattern

Move Move

Rotate Rotate

Trim Trim

Extend Extend
Chamfer Chamfer

Fillet Fillet

Edit spline Select a fit point and drag

Note Use the Move and Rotate commands in Autodesk Inventor to copy at the
same time.

In addition, some AutoCAD Editing commands have corresponding Autodesk


Inventor commands that can only be used when modifying a 2D sketch in a
drawing file (IDW).

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Edit Hatch Right-click and select


Modify Hatch

Edit Text Right-click and select Edit


text
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

Insert commands

The following file types can be imported into an open Autodesk Inventor file using
the appropriate Insert command:

1. 2D DWG and DXF files can be used in Autodesk Inventor sketches to


create features:

On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD


Note By default, geometry imported using the Insert AutoCAD File
command has the endpoint constrained. Disable this option as required.

2. 3D DWG and DXF files can be used in Autodesk Inventor 3D sketches


to create features:

In part (.ipt) files: On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert


panel ACAD.
Note By default, geometry imported using the Insert AutoCAD File
command has the endpoint constrained. Enabling this option slows
down performance.

3. From a Part file, click Manage tab Insert panel Import to import
SAT and IGES files into Autodesk Inventor files.

4. Image files can be imported into Autodesk Inventor files by clicking


Sketch tab Insert panel Image.

5. OLE Objects can be imported into Autodesk Inventor files by clicking


Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object.

This table compares AutoCAD Insert commands to the corresponding Autodesk


Inventor Insert commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Attach Image Ribbon: Sketch tab


Insert panel Image

Import Ribbon: Manage tab


Insert panel Import
(.iges and .sat)
OLE Object Ribbon: Manage tab
Insert panel Insert
Object
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations >

View Commands

The mouse scroll direction for real-time zoom in AutoCAD is opposite to Autodesk
Inventor by default.

To reverse the mouse scroll direction to be the same as in Autodesk Inventor


when using real-time zoom in AutoCAD, set the system variable Zoomwheel to
the value 1 (default value: 0).

This table compares AutoCAD View commands to their corresponding Autodesk


Inventor View commands.

AutoCAD Autodesk Inventor

Pan Real-time Pan

Zoom Real-time Zoom

Zoom Window Zoom Window

Zoom All Zoom All

Zoom Previous F5 key

Free Orbit Free Orbit

Continuous Orbit Shift + Free orbit


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

Use your AutoCAD geometry


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

File Open Options


When you select a .dwg file that does not contain Autodesk Inventor data in the
Open dialog box, you can:

Open the file directly in Autodesk Inventor

Import the file

Access: In the Open dialog box, select the .dwg file that does
not contain Autodesk Inventor data, and then click Options.

Note Once a .dwg file contains Autodesk Inventor data, you can no longer import
the file into Autodesk Inventor. The file can only be opened as an Autodesk
Inventor drawing (.dwg).

Drawing Settings
Open Opens the file with full visual fidelity. All
Autodesk Inventor data creation commands are
available.
Import Imports and translates AutoCAD data into
Autodesk Inventor.

Use the Application Options to specify a default value:

Click Tools tab Options panel Application Options and select the
Drawing Tab.

The Non-Autodesk Inventor DWG options control the default value for
the File Open Options dialog box. Select Open or Import.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

AutoCAD terms

Here is a list of common terms and command names used in AutoCAD with links
to the Help topic in Inventor.

AutoCAD term Inventor term Help topic link


Array (rectangular Pattern (sketch) Pattern (sketch)
and polar) Pattern (feature) Pattern (feature)
Pattern Pattern (component)
(component)
Background Scene styles Scene styles
Block Sketch block Sketch blocks
Break Split Split
DesignCenter Content Center Content Center Environment
Dimension General Dimension Parametric dimensions
Drawing dimensions Dimensions in drawings
Distance Measure Measure
Erase Delete Delete a sketch
eTransmit Pack and Go Package files
Fields iProperties iProperties
Helix Coil Coil features
Layout Sheet Add or edit a sheet
LightList Lighting styles Lighting styles
Materials Color styles Color styles
Mleader Leader Add a note with a leader
Object snap Constraints Plan constraints
Options Application options Application options
Document settings Document settings
Orbit Free orbit Free orbit
Ortho mode Constraints Plan constraints
Page setup Edit sheet Edit sheet
Plan View face View face
Plot Print Print models and drawings
Publish Multi-sheet plot Plot multiple drawing sheets
Slice Split Split faces, trim and split
solids
Style Text style Text styles
Tolerance Feature Control Feature control frame
Frame
Viewports Drawing views Drawing views
Visual style Display mode Change the display mode
Workspace Environment Environments
Zoom object Zoom selected Zoom selected
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D >

More concepts
Concept Procedure

Promote drawing dimensions


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Where is my Command Line?

Autodesk Inventor does not have a specific area of the user interface that is an
exact parallel to the command line in AutoCAD. Autodesk Inventor does provide a
means of accessing product functionality through keyboard shortcuts and
command aliases.

Like most Microsoft Windows-based products, Autodesk Inventor provides


keyboard access to menus and command functions. These shortcuts are indicated
on menus with underlined or with a letter within brackets while a command
tooltip is displayed

User-defined command aliases provide a command line-like ability without an


area of the interface being dedicated to command entry. Type a command alias
at any time the command is valid. Autodesk Inventor provides a list of possible
commands that match the letters you type (until the command is unique or until
you select from the list). A set of predefined command aliases is delivered with
Autodesk Inventor and you can extend them with aliases more suited to your
particular workflow needs.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What is the Difference Between


Drawing and Modeling?

Modeling three-dimensional solid features often begins with creating a two-


dimensional sketch that defines a portion of the shape of your part. Sketching
involves the creation of lines, arcs, circles, and dimensions. They are familiar
steps to anyone who has created a drawing in a CAD product. Autodesk Inventor's
sketch commands look and feel like the two-dimensional geometry commands you
used previously. Autodesk Inventor sketch geometry captures relationship
information as it is being created. The key difference is that these relationships
(or constraints) make the inevitable editing process much easier and more
predictable when they are applied correctly.

In the 2D design world, it is possible to create geometry in any sequence because


you are responsible for tracking the meaning of the geometry. The 3D modeling
sequence resembles the creation of the physical part and the creation of one
feature usually depends on a previous feature. This feature hierarchy allows the
computer to track the meaning of the geometry. For example, when creating a
2D drawing, first create a circle that represents a hole followed by a rectangle
that represents the stock in which the hole is placed. This sequence does not
work while modeling in 3D because to place the hole, you must first have a model
into which you plan to place the hole.

Assembly designs are often started using a technique called top-down design (or
skeletal modeling). You can begin the solid modeling process using sketches that
represent some (or all) of the parts in your assembly. Individual part models are
then created using geometry from a single sketch in the context of the assembly
model. Assembly models are also frequently created using a bottom-up approach
in which previously created part models are placed together to represent the final
assembly.

When the addition of features (or components) to your model is complete, it is


time to create the traditional three view drawing. Views of your model are
arranged on your drawing sheet. Because you have a solid representation of your
model the system knows which edges to display as solid or dotted in each of your
drawing views. Dimensions in your drawing can be manually applied. You can also
import the dimensions you placed on your model sketches and use them in the
appropriate drawing view. Because the drawing uses placed views of your model
any changes that you make to your models are automatically reflected in your
updated drawings.

Other tools allow you to take advantage of the power of your computer while
assisting you with the functional aspects of your design. These tools allow you to
verify the engineering integrity of: bolted connections, shafts, gear train designs,
bearing life, springs, and structural loads all using three-dimensional models and
design parameters unique to your design.

Both the drawing and modeling approaches to design result in a familiar


engineering drawing. In the 2D approach, the drawing captures the physical
information needed to create the part. In the solid modeling approach, the
drawing is one of several uses for the created model.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What are constraints?

The dictionary defines a constraint as being a restricted or confined state within


prescribed bounds. Autodesk Inventor uses constraints in two primary ways:

To control geometry within sketches.

To establish relationships between components placed within assembly


models.

The idea that geometry within Autodesk Inventor behaves differently depending
on the constraints that were applied is one that often hinders new users
transitioning from a 2D drawing application.

Within Autodesk Inventor's 2D sketch environment constraints are inferred


between lines, arcs and other geometry while the geometry is being created.
Constraints can also be manually applied to alter the relationships between
geometry after the sketch geometry exists. These geometric constraints allow the
subsequent editing of the sketch with predictable results. For example, dragging
the endpoint of a line that is constrained to be perpendicular to another line does
not change the perpendicularity.

Within Autodesk Inventor's assembly environment, features of one component can


have relationships to features on other components. These relationships
determine the position (and sometimes the size) of each component. For
example, mating the bottom of a box to the top of a table ensures that the
bottom face of the box remains in contact with the plane representing the top of
the table.

Show Me an introduction to constraints


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What happens to AutoCAD layers in


Autodesk Inventor?

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) imported into Autodesk Inventor

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg)


opened in Autodesk Inventor
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

How do fonts and text work in


Autodesk Inventor?

Autodesk Inventor uses the same Microsoft Windows and TrueType fonts used by
most Windows-based programs. When you translate 2D data from a DWG file,
you can map the fonts in the DWG file to the fonts used by Autodesk Inventor.

Note If you do not require AutoCAD objects translated into Autodesk Inventor
objects, you can directly open any AutoCAD DWG (.dwg) file in Autodesk
Inventor, and then view, plot, and measure the file contents. Objects display
exactly as they do in AutoCAD. In addition, all the AutoCAD data is selectable for
Copy/Paste so you can open an AutoCAD DWG file in Autodesk Inventor, and then
copy and paste AutoCAD entities into an Autodesk Inventor sketch.

Mapping fonts

Text styles
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What happens to AutoCAD blocks in


Autodesk Inventor?

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) imported into Autodesk Inventor

AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg)


opened in Autodesk Inventor
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Decide which file type to use for


translating DWG data

In Autodesk Inventor, data is stored in multiple files with different file types.
When you translate data from AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop, choose the
destination file type based on the type of data you are translating and how you
use it.

To produce a manufacturing drawing without an associated 3D or model


file, translate the AutoCAD data to an Autodesk Inventor drawing file
(.idw). You can create a drawing file or add the data to a sketch in the
active drawing.

To use 2D data to build a part model, translate the AutoCAD file to an


Autodesk Inventor part model (.ipt). You can create a part file or add
the data to a sketch in the active part.

When you translate AutoCAD 3D solids, they become ShapeManager


solid bodies in an Autodesk Inventor model file. When there are multiple
solids, the translator creates an Autodesk Inventor part file (.ipt) for
each body and an assembly file (.iam) with references to each part.

To use AutoCAD title blocks, borders, or blocks to develop templates in


Autodesk Inventor, use the import settings to place the translated data
in a new drawing file (.idw).

Note on opening DWG files


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

How do Autodesk Inventor dimensions


work?
Concept Procedure

Promote drawing dimensions

When you import AutoCAD data into a drawing, dimensions are placed on the
drawing sheet as drawing dimensions. The geometry is placed on a sketch
associated to a draft view. You can promote the dimensions to the sketch and
use them to control the size of the geometry parametrically.

1. Click Open.

2. Select an AutoCAD file and click Open.

3. Click Options and select Next.

4. In the Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box, select Next.

5. In the Import Destination dialog box, select Promote Dimensions to


Sketch.

You can also promote the dimensions to sketch dimensions after importing an
AutoCAD file.

1. Select the dimensions to promote.

2. Right-click and select Promote to Sketch from the menu.

After a dimension is promoted, it behaves the same way as any sketch dimension.
You can edit it or change its format and display.

Note on opening DWG files


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What happens to Mechanical Desktop


materials?

When you translate 3D data in a Mechanical Desktop file to Autodesk Inventor


parts and assemblies, the material data for the translated parts is added to the
part files.

In Autodesk Inventor, material data is defined by the material format assigned to


the part. Usually, the template used to create parts contains multiple materials
formats and you select the material when creating a part.

You can specify a template to use when translating a Mechanical Desktop part.

If the part template you use contains a material format with the same
name as the Mechanical Desktop material, the Autodesk Inventor
material format is applied to the translated part.

If the part template does not contain a matching material format, the
translator adds a format to the translated part and uses the material
data from the Mechanical Desktop file to define the new material format.

After the file is translated, the material format can be edited and used in the
same way as a format created in Autodesk Inventor.

To change the definition of a material in Autodesk Inventor, use the


settings in the Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles
Editor dialog box.

To view the material assignment and other physical properties of the

part, click iProperties and select the Physical Properties tab.


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Numeric units in translated DWG data

Note on opening DWG files

Since AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor have different options for numeric formats,
some attributes are converted when dimensions are translated.

Unit styles Autodesk Inventor provides a decimal and a


fractional unit style. Scientific, decimal,
engineering, and Windows Desktop styles are
mapped to Autodesk Inventor decimal style.
Fraction and architectural are mapped to
Autodesk Inventor fractional style.
Rounding The greatest level of rounding precision in
precision Autodesk Inventor is 1/128. All AutoCAD data
with greater precision is converted to 1/128, and
a warning message is displayed.
Decimal If the precision of translated dimensions is
precision greater than available in Autodesk Inventor, the
dimensions are converted to the maximum
allowed precision, and a warning message is
displayed.
Zero Autodesk Inventor has a single setting for leading
suppression and trailing zeros in linear and angular
dimensions. If settings in the translated
dimensions are different, Autodesk Inventor uses
the setting for linear dimensions.
Decimal If translated dimensions use a space as the
separator decimal separator, the space is changed to a
decimal point.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

Open/Save DWG Data vs.


Import/Export

The following options are available when you are working with DWG files:

You can directly open a DWG file, and the AutoCAD data remains
AutoCAD data in Autodesk Inventor.

You can save a file as an Autodesk Inventor drawing (.dwg) and the
AutoCAD data is saved as AutoCAD data.

You can import a .dwg file. The AutoCAD data is translated into
Autodesk Inventor data.

You can export a .dwg file. The Autodesk Inventor data is translated into
AutoCAD data.

Open/Save as Use the Open command to open AutoCAD (.dwg)


data directly in Autodesk Inventor. When you
open an AutoCAD DWG (.dwg) file in Autodesk
Inventor, AutoCAD data remains as AutoCAD
data. You can then view, plot, and measure the
file contents. Objects display exactly as they do
in AutoCAD. In addition, all the AutoCAD data is
selectable for copy and paste. You can open an
AutoCAD DWG file in Autodesk Inventor, and
then copy and paste AutoCAD entities into any
Autodesk Inventor sketch.
You can save an Autodesk Inventor drawings
natively in DWG format without translation.
Autodesk Inventor drawing data remains
associative to the model. When opening the file
in AutoCAD the Autodesk Inventor drawing data
looks just like it does in Autodesk Inventor. You
can view, plot, measure and minimally edit the
Autodesk Inventor drawing data in AutoCAD.
Portions of the Autodesk Inventor data are
reusable in AutoCAD as blocks.
Open AutoCAD DWG files directly to view, plot,
or measure native AutoCAD data in Autodesk
or measure native AutoCAD data in Autodesk
Inventor or when you want to translate
(copy/paste) AutoCAD data selectively into an
Autodesk Inventor sketch.
Use Autodesk Inventor's native DWG format if
you must have Autodesk Inventor drawing files
that can be viewed, plotted, or measured in
AutoCAD and remain associative to the Autodesk
Inventor model data.
Import/Export When you import an AutoCAD DWG file into
Autodesk Inventor the AutoCAD data is translated
into an Autodesk Inventor part or drawing file,
based on your import settings. The original
AutoCAD file is left intact and unchanged.
When you export an Autodesk Inventor file into
AutoCAD DWG, the Autodesk Inventor data is
translated into AutoCAD objects in a new DWG
file. Translated AutoCAD data is not associative
back to the Autodesk Inventor model, but the
AutoCAD data is fully editable in AutoCAD.
Use import or export if you need fully editable
data in AutoCAD or Autodesk Inventor.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

How does Autodesk Inventor handle


model space and paper space?

To import an existing DWG file that contains information separated by AutoCAD in


both model and paper space, first determine how you plan to use that data in
Autodesk Inventor. There are options so you can directly open existing DWG files
within Autodesk Inventor and you can select geometry for import to use within an
Autodesk Inventor sketch.

AutoCAD Drawing (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawing (.dwg) files

Model space displays data exactly as it displays in AutoCAD. Model space is a


read-only environment in Autodesk Inventor and is accessed in the browser. You
can change the background color and perform all viewing functions, including
rotate. You can select objects in model space for use with copy/paste and the
measuring commands.

Paper space layouts are displayed as sheets in Autodesk Inventor. AutoCAD data
can be viewed, plotted, and measured, and is selectable for delete and
copy/paste. All Autodesk Inventor drawing commands are available in
sheets/layouts. You can place views and create annotations on a layout created in
AutoCAD and the Autodesk Inventor data coexists with the AutoCAD data.

While Autodesk Inventor drawing data and AutoCAD data can coexist in the same
file, some data is shared between both applications. Blocks, layers, and
sheets/layouts are editable by both AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor. Dimension
and text styles, while not equal, are synchronized such that supported changes
made in one application are duplicated in the other application.

For more information, see Working directly with DWG in Autodesk Inventor

Autodesk Inventor Part, (.ipt), Assembly (.iam) and Drawing (.idw) files

Autodesk Inventor requires separate file types for models and drawings.

Parts are .ipt files.

Assemblies are .iam files.

Drawings are .idw or .dwg files.

Exploded assembly views are saved as .ipn files and later used in a
drawing view in an IDW or DWG file.
Autodesk Inventor models are created full-scale. When creating a drawing of an
Autodesk Inventor part or assembly model, drawing views are created using a
scale factor appropriate to the drawing sheet size. It is like the AutoCAD
workflow, which uses model space to draw and paper space (layouts) to annotate
and plot.
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts >

What about all my AutoLISP routines?

Since it was first introduced in 1986, AutoLISP has been a mainstay for users
working with AutoCAD. Autodesk Inventor utilizes Microsoft Visual Basic for
Applications (VBA) as its extensibility language. Because of the syntactical
differences between LISP and BASIC, and the database schemas and application
programming interface (API) differences between AutoCAD and Autodesk
Inventor, there is no reliable means of automatically converting AutoLISP to VBA
is practical.

Many AutoLISP routines are used to automate the creation and editing of
commonly used geometries. Autodesk Inventor provides built-in functionality for
automating the creation of features, parts, and assemblies that are used
repeatedly. While not intended to replace AutoLISP, consider the capabilities of
iFeatures, iParts, and iAssemblies in cases where they apply.

Like the AutoCAD User Community, Autodesk Inventor users have been actively
extending their productivity by creating and sharing VBA add-in applications. It is
possible that user-created solutions exist that can replace your regularly used
AutoLISP routines.

On-line Resource: Autodesk Inventor Customization message board


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Transition from SolidWorks

Topics in this section

Transition from SolidWorks


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from SolidWorks >

Transition from SolidWorks

Welcome to Inventor. Here is a checklist of common terms used in SolidWorks


with links to the Help topic in Inventor.

SolidWorks term Inventor term Help topic link


Parts
Library features iParts iPart Fundamentals
iAssemblies iAssemblies
Library features iFeatures iFeature fundamentals
Surface Sculpt Shape description
Knit trim
AutoLimits Autolimits AutoLimits
Sensors
Equations Parameters Parameters in models
Properties iProperties iProperties
Physical properties
Assemblies
Light-weight Level of Detail Level of Detail representations
assemblies representations
Speedpack
assemblies
Assembly Assembly Assembly constraints
constraints constraints overview
Design Library Content Center Content Center Environment
Toolbox smart Bolted Connection Bolted Connection Component
fasteners Generator
Contact solver Contact solver Component collision and
Contact sets Contact sets contact
Animation
Animator Inventor Studio Render and animate overview
PhotoWorks
PhotoView 36
Note To display the following Help topics, you must have Analysis or Routed
Systems.
Analysis
Dynamic Simulation Dynamic Simulation Frequently asked questions
(FAQ)
Stress Analysis Stress Analysis Stress Analysis overview
FEA FEA
Routing
Tube & Pipe Tube & Pipe Tube and pipe fundamentals
Cable & Harness Cable & Harness Fundamentals
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

About Help

Topics in this section

Online Help: The Inside Track


Find the information you need
Join the Customer Involvement Program
Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help >

Online Help: The Inside Track


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help >

Find the information you need

The Autodesk Inventor Help system is available from the Help menu, the Help
icon, or through context-sensitive links. If you are new to Inventor, use the Get
Started tab on the ribbon to learn about Inventor. Key features of the Help are:

Two Help home pages. Choose the one that fits for you. The default is
for new or experienced Inventor users. The other is for users
transitioning from AutoCAD or are new to using 3D software.

There is on-demand access from the context menu (right-click), F1


function key, menus, dialog boxes, browsers, and the menu bar.

Navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures, references, and


concepts.

Show Me animations demonstrate how to complete a task or how to


understand a concept. Access related animations from within a Help
topic or access all the animations through the Visual Syllabus and the
Help home page.

The Help menu on the main application menu bar has many resources
to help new users learn Inventor and experienced learners to continue
learning.

What are ways to gain access to Help?

How is Help organized?

How do I get around in the Help system?

What options does Help offer?

How can I learn how to use Autodesk Inventor?

How can I use the AutoCAD-specific Help?


Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help >

Join the Customer Involvement


Program
Concept Procedure

To turn the CIP on or off

1. On the InfoCenter toolbar, to the right of the Help button, click the
drop-down arrow.

2. Click Customer Involvement Program.

3. In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, select a level of


participation.

4. Click OK.
Autodesk Inventor >

Work Environment

Topics in this section

Work environment in Autodesk Inventor


Styles and Style Libraries
Customize Autodesk Inventor
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment >

Work environment in Autodesk


Inventor

Topics in this section

Application Options settings


Measurement units
Components
Selection sets of components
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Application Options settings


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Line Weight Settings


Sets the line weight display in drawings.

Access: Choose Options. Then open the Drawing tab of the


Application Options dialog box, and click Settings.

Display true Shows line weights on screen as they would appear


line weights on paper. For example, regardless of
magnification, a line 0.5 inch thick is the same as
the height of 0.5-inch text.
Display line Shows line weights according to values you enter.
weights by The line weight is independent from the zoom
range magnification. Values range from smallest (left) to
(millimeter) largest (right).
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Measurement units
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Document Settings - Units tab


Sets the default units system and dimension precision for the active model file or
template.

Note To change the default units system applied when you create new files,
change the default units in the templates that you use to create files.

Access: Click Tools tab Options panel Document Settings


Units tab.

Units

Modeling Dimension Display

Default Parameter Input Display

Examples
Defined Display as value (in Display as
Parameter edit box) expression (in edit
box)
LENG = 1 mm + 2 1 mm + 2 mm LENG = 1 mm + 2
mm mm
LENG = 3 mm 3 mm LENG = 3 mm
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Components

Parts and subassemblies are created in part files or created in place in assembly
files. The features of components originate as sketches that can be fully or
partially dimensioned. Feature volume is specified using feature-creation
commands and supplying key values. Features can be resized by changing
dimension values or redefined by specifying different angles or termination
methods or relationships to other features.

When you edit an Autodesk Inventor component in an assembly, changes are


made to all occurrences of the component in its source file and in other
assemblies. To make a custom version of a component in only one assembly, save
the component in a part file with a new name.

In an assembly, components are positioned relative to one another with assembly


constraints. To fit components together easily, you can include work features
while creating components. For example, place a work axis on a cylinder center
and a hole center to align the components along their center axes as they will be
aligned when manufactured.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor >

Selection sets of components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Select filters
Specifies the elements that can be selected when using the Select command filter
sets in drawings.

Access: On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow on the Select
command and then click Edit Select Filters.

Filter Set Specifies the Custom, Detail, or Layout, filter set to


change. Click the arrow and select the filter set from
the list.
Filters Lists the filters available for the selected filter type.
Selected filters can be selected in the drawing. Click
to add a filter or clear the check mark to omit the
filter from the set.
Select All selects the entire list and makes them
available in the drawing.
Select None clears the check mark from all filter
types.
Invert Selection toggles between selected and
unselected filters.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment >

Styles and Style Libraries

Topics in this section

Style Libraries
Transition legacy projects to a style library
Modify styles
Work with styles
Textures on parts
Styles in sheet metal parts
Styles in drawings
Dimension styles in drawings
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Style Libraries
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Style Management Wizard


The Style Management Wizard is a tool for administrators to assist in batch-style
management for Autodesk Inventor files. Using the Style Management Wizard,
you can:

Harvest styles from Autodesk Inventor files and place them in a target
style library.

Purge styles from Autodesk Inventor files. Purging removes unused style
information and can be beneficial in large assemblies by reducing
required memory.

Use the Style Management Wizard when transitioning to using a style library with
your design project.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


Tools Style Management Wizard.

All files must migrate to the latest version of Autodesk Inventor. Files that
are not migrated are skipped during batch processing, including assemblies
that are migrated but contain components that are not migrated.
Welcome page Describes the Harvest Styles and Purge Styles
processes.
Projects to Lists all defined projects by Name and Project Location.
Manage page The active project is indicated by a check mark. Its
settings for Style Library and path are summarized
below the window. Double-click to select a project and
make it active. The Style Management Wizard uses the
active project to resolve all file paths during processing.
Files to Process Selects files to process in a detailed view.
Add Specific Files button Browses to the folder that
contains the files to process. Selected files are listed by
file name, file type, and path.
Add All Files in Active Project button Lists all files by
file name, type, and path. Clear the check box to
exclude a file from processing.
Alternate methods of adding files to the list:
Drag and drop files from Microsoft Windows
Explorer. Drop them in the list to add them.
Get all files referenced by a specific file by
right-clicking the file in the process list, and
right-clicking the file in the process list, and
then selecting Get Referenced Files. Adds all
files that the selected file is dependent on to
the list.
Get all drawings or presentations that use
a specific file by right-clicking a file in the
process list. Select Drawings and
Presentations, and then Get All. Adds to the
process list all drawings and presentations in
the project search paths that use the specific
file.
Select Chooses a harvest or purge operation.
Management Harvest Styles into Target Style Library specifies the
Options page target style library.
Use Source Project Style Library
Automatically selects the style library specified
in the project. Clear the check box of files you
want to exclude from processing.
Create a New Style Library Opens the New
Style Library dialog box. Specify to copy an
existing style library or create an empty library.
Browse to the folder where the library will be
stored, and if copying, the source style library
you are copying.
Select an Existing Style Library Lists the
Default Style Library and any project that uses
a style library. Use the Browse button to browse
to a specific library.
Purge All Unused Styles from Files automatically
deletes unused styles from selected documents. Styles
not saved to a styles library are permanently lost.
Begin Batch Starts batch processing, using previously selected
Processing options.
Press Pause to halt the processing temporarily or Cancel
to stop.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Transition legacy projects to a style


library
Concept Procedure

Transition to Style Libraries

By default, all pre-R9 projects migrated to Autodesk Inventor 9 or newer are set
to not use a Style Library. It insures that active projects can continue to progress
without requiring users to take Style Libraries into consideration. Most of the new
styles functionality is available without using a library.

Note While using a style library on new projects is simple, transitioning to style
libraries in the middle of a project requires careful consideration.

Use the following general procedure to create a Style Library and template set for
existing projects.

Step 1 - Collect Existing Styles

Step 2 - Optimize Styles from Legacy Versions of Autodesk Inventor

Step 3 - Create the New Style Library and Template Set

Step 4 - Set Up and Deploy the Style Library


Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Modify styles
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Update styles
Updates styles in the current document, and optionally, in referenced files (child
documents), to match the styles in the style library.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Update

Click a column heading to sort contents. All columns resort to correspond with
the new order.
Document Name Shows file name in which the style is used.
Style Name Lists styles in the current document.
Type Identifies the style type.
Changed Indicates if a style was changed in the document or
library. If the style does not match the library, it is
marked Not in Library.
Update? Switches individual styles to update. If Yes, the style
in the document is updated to match the version in
the style library. If No, the current document style
definition remains in effect.

Click the Update Styles in all Child Documents check box to update styles in
referenced files. Child document file names are listed in the document name
column. Clear the check box to update styles in the parent document only. Not
available in part documents.

Click Yes to All to update all document styles to the library version or No to All
to preserve the changed styles in the current document.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Work with styles


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Style and Standard Editor - Sheet Metal Unfold


Lists the sheet metal unfolding rules in the active document or global style library
(depending on the filter setting of Local or All Styles). Specifies unfolding method
(linear or bend table) as well as units, backup KFactor value and bend table
tolerances.

Access: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor

In the browser pane, click Sheet Metal Unfold, and then click
the sheet metal unfold style name to display the selections and
values used while unfolding in the right portion of the dialog.

Click the expand/collapse “+” to the left of the Sheet Metal Unfold entry in
the left-hand portion of the Style and Standard Editor dialog box to display the
list of existing rules. Select an existing sheet metal unfold rule to display its
option settings.

Back - return to the previously edited style. You are prompted to save the
previous edits.

New - create new styles. Select the Add to Standard check box to add to the
available styles list in the active standard style.

Save - save changes to an existing style in the current document.

Reset - return style values to the saved values.

Location Filter - show Local Styles or All Styles (from the library) in the
browser.

Unfold Dropdown selection specifies one of three unfold method


Method options. The option selected will determine the options,
attributes and controls that are displayed as described in
the following sections:

Linear
Bend Table

Custom Equation

Import - use to import a material style exported from another document.

Done - after saving changes, click to dismiss the Styles and Standard Editor
dialog.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Textures on parts
Concept Procedure

Assign custom textures to styles in shared environments

You can store custom texture .bmp files in


the Styles library. In a shared
environment, it is recommended that the
CAD administrator:

Create one Autodesk Inventor project file which allows styles to be


edited.

Create a second project file which provides a read-only Styles library.

Distribute the read-only Styles library project file to the users.

Note You can also store custom bump maps and reflection files in the surfaces
library in the Autodesk Inventor Studio environment. Refer to: Working with
custom bump maps and reflection files in a shared environment.

Example

Note The CAD administrator performs these tasks.

Step 1: Create a project file specifically for editing and defining styles.

1. Specify the location of the styles library on a shared network folder.


For example: [shared network folder]:\Inventor\Styles\.
Next, create a subfolder named Textures.

2. In the Project Editor, under Frequently Used Subfolders, add an entry


named Textures that points to [shared network
folder]:\Inventor\Styles\. It displays after editing the project editor
pane as: Textures - Workspace\Textures.

3. Copy the .bmp images to this folder.


Note All .bmp images in this folder display in the Choose Texture
dialog box, accessed from the Styles Editor.
4. Set the Folder Options, Styles Library path to .\.

5. Set Use Styles Library = Yes.

6. Save the project file.

Step 2: Assign a custom texture to a color style.

1. Open a new or existing .ipt part file.

2. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel


Styles Editor.

3. Click Color to display the current color styles.

4. Select the color style you want to assign a custom texture to. For this
example select Blue.

5. Click Choose to assign a custom texture to the Blue color style.

6. Select the Project Library option and select the textures folder.

7. Select a texture.
Note: Refer to steps 2 -3 in Step 1.

Note If you relocate the styles library folder, its subfolders and the
texture files come with it.

8. Right-click the edited color style (Blue) and select Save to Styles
Library. Repeat steps 5 - 9 to assign custom textures to other color
styles.
Step 3: Configure the read-only styles library project file for users.

1. Open the Project Editor and switch to the project file where the users
are going to work. Set the Folder Option Styles Library path to the
styles library location defined by the administrator. In the previous
example, the path specified is:[shared network
folder]:\Inventor\Styles\.

2. Under Libraries, add an entry named Styles that points to the same
folder as defined previously.
Note Enter the path in both places to provide access to the custom
textures.

3. Set the Use Styles Library = Read Only.

4. Create a Frequently Used Subfolder named Textures and set it to (for


example) [shared network folder] :Inventor\Styles\Textures. It displays
as Textures: Styles\Textures after you complete the edit step.)

5. Save and distribute the configured read-only project file to users.


Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Styles in sheet metal parts


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Style and Standard Editor - Sheet Metal Unfold


Lists the sheet metal unfolding rules in the active document or global style library
(depending on the filter setting of Local or All Styles). Specifies unfolding method
(linear or bend table) as well as units, backup KFactor value and bend table
tolerances.

Access: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor

In the browser pane, click Sheet Metal Unfold, and then click
the sheet metal unfold style name to display the selections and
values used while unfolding in the right portion of the dialog.

Click the expand/collapse “+” to the left of the Sheet Metal Unfold entry in
the left-hand portion of the Style and Standard Editor dialog box to display the
list of existing rules. Select an existing sheet metal unfold rule to display its
option settings.

Back - return to the previously edited style. You are prompted to save the
previous edits.

New - create new styles. Select the Add to Standard check box to add to the
available styles list in the active standard style.

Save - save changes to an existing style in the current document.

Reset - return style values to the saved values.

Location Filter - show Local Styles or All Styles (from the library) in the
browser.

Unfold Dropdown selection specifies one of three unfold method


Method options. The option selected will determine the options,
attributes and controls that are displayed as described in
the following sections:

Linear
Bend Table

Custom Equation

Import - use to import a material style exported from another document.

Done - after saving changes, click to dismiss the Styles and Standard Editor
dialog.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Styles in drawings
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Load Line Type (LIN file)

Line Type Displays the location of the .lin file. Click the
Definition File browse button to locate and load a .lin file.
Available Line Displays the available line types associated with
Types the selected line type. Select the line type to add
or SHIFT-select to load multiple line types, and
then click OK.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries >

Dimension styles in drawings


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Precision and Tolerance


Sets the precision and tolerance attributes for hole, chamfer, or bend notes.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles


Editor. In the Styles and Standards Editor, click to expand the
Dimension style in the browser. In the Dimension Style window,
click the Notes and Leaders tab, and then click Precision and
Tolerance. Click the More button to expand the dialog box.
To override precision and tolerance parameters for an existing
hole or chamfer note, right-click the note and then select Edit
Hole Note, Edit Chamfer Note, or Edit Bend Note. In the dialog
box, click Precision and Tolerance. Click More to expand the
dialog box.

Options depend on which note type is selected on the Units tab of the Dimension
style dialog box.

Hole notes

Chamfer notes

Bend notes
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment >

Customize Autodesk Inventor

Topics in this section

Customize work environments in Autodesk Inventor


Custom shortcut keys
Custom command aliases
Dynamic input and command alias behavior
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Customize work environments in


Autodesk Inventor
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Document Settings - Sheet tab


Sets the default labels for sheets and sets the colors for elements on sheets in a
drawing or template.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Document Settings, and


then click the Sheet tab in the dialog box.

Default Sets the default label assigned to new sheets in the drawing
Sheet browser. As a new sheet is added, the label is used with an
Label incremental number (for example, Sheet1, Sheet 2, Sheet3).
Click in the box and enter the label.
Colors Sets the display colors for elements of the sheet. Click a color
button to open the Color dialog box and select the color for the
associated element.
Sheet Sets the background color for the sheet. The
color of views, symbols, and other elements
does not change, so set a background color
that provides good contrast.
Sheet Sets the outline color for the sheet.
Outline
Highlight Sets the color of highlighted elements (when
the cursor passes over them).
Selection Sets the color of selected elements.
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Custom shortcut keys


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Customize - Keyboard tab


Add and modify custom command aliases and shortcuts.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Customize, and then click
the Keyboard tab.

Keyboard

Buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Custom command aliases


Concept Procedure

Create custom command aliases

Autodesk Inventor has many predefined command aliases, which you can use to
start commands from the keyboard. In addition to the predefined aliases, you can
assign new custom aliases or change the existing definitions.

Note Autodesk Inventor ships with a set of default multi-character command


aliases, which are not loaded by default. See Customize - Keyboard tab for
information on how to enable or disable default multi-character command aliases.

1. Select Tools tab Options panel Customize, and then click the
Keyboard tab.

2. In the Categories list, click the command category that you want.

3. In the filter list, select All, Assigned, or Unassigned, to see a list of


associated commands and aliases in the command box.
All
All commands are displayed in the command box.
Assigned
Only commands with assigned shortcuts or aliases are displayed in the
command box.
Unassigned
Only commands without assigned shortcuts or aliases are displayed in
the command box.

4. In the command box, click in the Keys column next to the associated
command. Enter the shortcut, using any of these methods:

Press any single letter or number key (A-Z, 0-9).

Press any combination of alphanumeric keys.

5. To discard the new alias, click Reject or press the Delete or


Backspace key.
Note To discard an existing alias, click in the Keys column next to the
associated command and press the Delete or Backspace key.

6. To assign the alias, click Accept or press Enter.

7. Continue to assign aliases or click Close to close the dialog box.

Tips for creating and using custom shortcut keys and command alias
character sequences
Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor >

Dynamic input and command alias


behavior
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference


Execute, view, and customize command aliases and shortcuts.

Access:

Keys

List of assigned keys in use as command aliases and custom shortcuts, in the
active environment. Click an alias or shortcut in the list to execute the associated
command.

Command Name

List of command names associated with assigned aliases and shortcuts

Buttons
Autodesk Inventor >

Parts

Topics in this section

2D sketches
3D sketches
Dimensions
Constraints
Work geometry and work features
Part modeling overview
Part features
Plastic Features
iFeatures and iParts
Part faces and bodies
Solid modeling
Part Analysis
Construction Environment and Importing Data
Sheet Metal Parts
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

2D sketches

Topics in this section

Sketch environment
Sketch coordinate system
Path sketches
Profile sketches
Projected geometry
Projected loops
Attach sketches to new planes (Redefine)
Slice graphics to reveal sketch planes
Plan and create sketches
Sketch blocks
Work with sketches
Linetype of sketch geometry
Sketch properties
Splines
Sketch points
Use text in part sketches
Images in sketches
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch environment

All sketch geometry is created and edited in the sketch environment. All
operations on sketch geometry, such as dimensioning and constraining, take place
when the sketch environment is active.

Show Me about the difference between sketched and placed features

What is the sketch environment?

What is the significance of the Finish Sketch command?

Why are empty sketch icons placed in the browser?

How many ways can I make a sketch?


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch coordinate system


Concept Procedure

Set the sketch grid

You can control the spacing and number of grid lines or turn off the sketch grid.

The sketch grid is aligned with the sketch plane for the coordinate system.
Moving or rotating the coordinate system origin reorients the sketch grid.

To set the spacing and number of grid lines

To display or hide the sketch grid

Tip When a sketch command like Line is active, right-click to turn Snap to Grid
on and off. Clear the check mark to sketch without grid snap or reselect to snap
to the specified grid settings.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Path sketches
Concept Procedure

Measure 2D open profiles

Use Measure distance to measure multiple segments


and add their lengths together by following a series
of repeated actions.

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Measure panel Distance in the


Sketch mode.

2. Select one line segment, click the drop-down menu in the Measure
distance dialog box, and then select Add to Accumulate.

3. Click the drop-down menu in the Measure distance dialog box again,
and select Restart.

4. Select the next line segment, click the drop-down menu on Measure
distance dialog box, and then select Add to Accumulate.

5. Click the drop-down menu on the Measure distance dialog box again,
and select Restart. Select the next line segment to measure, click the
drop-down menu again, and then select Add to Accumulate. Continue
this selection method for each line segment you want included in the
total.

6. When you are done making your selection and want to view the total
length of the selected line segments, click the drop-down menu on the
Measure distance dialog box, and select Display Accumulate.
Note Restart clears the current selection set so you can add to the
measured lengths.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Profile sketches
Concept Procedure

Create a profile sketch

Use any closed 2D sketch (including model edges) as


a profile for a feature. Profile sketches are required
to create Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Loft, and Coil
features.

1. Sketch one or more loops.

2. On the Model tab, click a sketched feature command (Extrude,


Revolve, Sweep, or Loft).

3. Select one or more loops.


To remove a profile from the selection set, hold down Ctrl and click a
profile.

A profile may be a single loop, multiple loops, intersecting loops, or islands. You
can sketch on a planar face and select one or more loops as the profile. All loops
selected in a single operation are one profile.

Note To resize the profile sketch or redefine values in the feature, select the
feature in the browser. Right-click and choose Edit Sketch or Edit Feature from
the menu. When finished with changes, click Update.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Projected geometry
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Projected geometry

Creates reference geometry by projecting model


geometry (edges and vertices), loops, work features,
or sketch geometry from another sketch onto the
active sketch plane. Reference geometry can be used
to constrain other sketch geometry or used directly
in a profile or path sketch.

In an assembly, project edges of a selected component cut by an assembly


section onto the sketch plane, when the edges would intersect the sketch plane.
The projected geometry is not associative and do not update if the parent
geometry moves or resizes.

As reference geometry, projected edges, loops, and vertices update when the
originating geometry changes. You can right-click on the reference geometry and
select Break Link to change the reference geometry to normal. When the
geometry is changed to normal, it no longer updates with the parent geometry
and can be edited independently.

Project geometry

Project cut edges

Project flat pattern


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Projected loops
Concept Procedure

Project loops onto the sketch plane

The Project Geometry command selects edges and loops or all loops on a face
and projects them onto a sketch plane. When there is more than one loop
selection possible, the Select Other tool cycles through and highlights each.

A projected loop places a Projected Loop entry in the browser under the Sketch
symbol.

1. Create a sketch on or offset from the geometry you want to project,


such as a part face.

2. On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry.

3. In the graphics window, click the loop you want to project. When the
Select Other tool displays, cycle through geometry until the loop
highlights, and then select it.
Note When the geometry is a closed spline, circle, or ellipse, a face
may be highlighted because there are several possible selections.
Continue to cycle through selections until the geometry you need is
highlighted.

A projected loop entry is nested below the sketch in the browser.

Note When creating a part in an assembly, you can project loops from an existing
part to the sketch of the new part. You can select edges, loops, or a face. The
projected geometry is associative to the parent part and a Reference symbol is
nested beneath the sketch symbol in the browser.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Attach sketches to new planes


(Redefine)
Concept Procedure

Attach a sketch to a different plane (Redefine)

Use Redefine in a part or an assembly file to move


an existing sketch to a different planar face or work
plane than the one on which it originated, and then
use constraints and dimensions to position it and
modify its size as needed.

1. In the browser, select the sketch you want to attach to a face or plane.

2. Right-click and select Redefine.

3. Click the face or plane on which to attach the sketch.

Show Me how to move sketch geometry to a different face

If the sketch is constrained or dimensioned to the plane on which it originated,


the constrained geometry is included when the sketch is moved to a different
plane. You can delete extraneous geometry as needed.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Slice graphics to reveal sketch planes


Concept Procedure

Slice graphics

The plane you want to sketch on is often obscured


by geometry or hidden inside a part model. For an
active sketch, you can temporarily slice away the
portion of the model facing you to reveal the sketch
plane.

1. Rotate the model so that the portion you want to slice away faces you.

2. Click Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch and select a


planar face or work plane on which to sketch. To reactivate an existing
sketch, double-click a sketch icon in the browser.

3. Right-click and select Slice Graphics or press F7 (the shortcut key for
Slice Graphics). The model is sliced at the sketch plane. Its boundaries
are shown in wireframe.

4. Use sketch commands on the Sketch tab to create geometry on the


sketch plane.

5. To restore the sliced graphics, right-click and select Slice Graphics or


click Finish Sketch to end the sketch.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Plan and create sketches


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rectangles

Creates rectangles defined by diagonal corners or


three points.

Access: On the Sketch tab, Draw panel, click the down arrow below the
Rectangle command, then click the command for the Rectangle
type.

Two Point rectangle A rectangle created by clicking two points


(diagonal corners) to set length and width. Two Point rectangles
are aligned with the sketch coordinate system.

Three Point rectangle A rectangle whose length and width is


created by specifying three points. First and second points set
the length and direction of the first side. The third point sets
the length of the adjacent side. A three-point rectangle can
have any alignment.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch blocks
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Block properties
Modifies the sketch block Insert Point, name or description. Available when editing
a sketch block.

Access: The dialog is accessed when editing a sketch block.


1. Select a sketch block, right-click and choose Edit
Block.
2. Right-click and select Block Properties.

Note Geometry cannot be selected and you must right-click off


geometry to see the Block Properties option.

Insert Click Select to modify the sketch block insert point.


Point
Select Visibility to display the insert point.
Block Input or modify the sketch block name.
Name
Description Input or modify the sketch block description.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Work with sketches


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Paste Options
Pastes copied AutoCAD data from the clipboard to an Autodesk Inventor 2D
sketch. Specifies preferences for units, endpoint constraints, geometric
constraints, and blocks.

Access: On the ribbon, click Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D


Sketch. Right-click in the sketch, and select Paste Options.
Paste Options is available only if AutoCAD data is on the
clipboard.

Import File Specifies if the copied data uses original units or


Units specified units.
Detected Units uses the units specified in the AutoCAD
file.
Specify Units changes the scale using new units. Click
the arrow to select from the list.
Constrain Select the check box to apply endpoint constraints
End Points automatically or clear the check box to constrain
endpoints manually.
Apply Select the check box to fully constrain the sketch
geometric automatically or clear the check box to constrain the
constraints sketch manually.
AutoCAD Select to paste AutoCAD block as an Inventor sketch
Blocks to block. If not selected, AutoCAD block is pasted as
Inventor primitive geometry.
Blocks
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Linetype of sketch geometry


Concept Procedure

Change the linetypes of sketch geometry

Use the Construction command to change the


linetype of sketch geometry. Click the icon before or
after you create geometry.

Change linetype before creating sketch geometry

Change linetype after creating sketch geometry


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch properties
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Geometry Properties
The Geometry Properties dialog box displays or changes the line color, line type,
line type scale, and line weight of selected sketch geometry.

Access: Right-click selected geometry in the graphics area and select


Properties from the context menu.

Line Displays the line color of the selected sketch geometry and
Color provides a pull-down list of available color selections so that
you can change the setting. The default line color is the
color scheme set in the Applications Options dialog box,
Colors tab.
The Select option from the pull-down list opens the Color
dialog box , enabling you to choose another basic color or
create a custom color to add to the selection list.
Line Displays the line type of the selected geometry and
Type provides a pull-down list of available line type selections so
that you can change the setting. The default line type is
Continuous.
The Other option at the bottom of the pull-down list opens
the Select Line Type dialog box, enabling you to add other
line types to the selection list.
Note To load an AutoCAD .lin file, click Load at the bottom
of the Select Line Type dialog box. For more information,
see Load Line Type (LIN file).
Scale When the check box is selected, enables you to view or
change the line type scale. The smaller the scale, the more
repetitions of the pattern are generated per unit. For
example, with a setting of .05, two repetitions of the
pattern in the line type definition are displayed for each
unit. Short line segments that cannot display one full line
type pattern are displayed as continuous. You can use a
smaller line type scale for lines that are too short to display
even one dash sequence.
The default scale is 1.00.
Line Displays the line weight of the selected geometry and
Weight provides a pull-down list of available line thicknesses. The
default line weight is 0.010 in or 0.25 mm, whichever unit
is set in the Document Settings dialog box, Units tab.
The line weight value represents the actual thickness of the
line on paper. To specify how line weights display on the
screen, see Document settings - Sketch tab.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Splines
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Curvature Settings

Provides a visual analysis of the curvature and overall smoothness. The curvature
comb plot shows curvature with a series of connected spines radiating outward
from the curve. The relative length of the curve is equal to the curvature of the
curve at the point where the spine originates. Longer spines indicate areas of
higher curvature, and shorter spines indicate lower curvature.

Access: Select one or more sketched curves (spline, circle, or ellipse) in


the graphics window that have curvature displayed, right-click
and select Setup Curvature Display from the context menu.

Definition

Sets appearance of analysis results along each curve and edge of the selected
geometry.

Comb Density Specifies the spacing between spines.

Comb Scale Specifies the scale (length) of the spines.


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch points
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Import Points: File Open Options


Options to connect imported points can be set. Choose to import points without
connections, import points connected with lines, or import points connected with a
spline.

For 3D sketches in which the points are connected by lines, tangent corner bends
can be created automatically if Auto-bend with 3D line creation is selected on the
Tools tab Options panel Application Options Sketch tab.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Insert panel Points . In the Open


dialog box, click Options.

Select the appropriate connectivity option and click OK. Click Cancel to exit
without saving the change.

Create Import points only.


points
Create Import points and connect them with lines.
lines
Create Import points and connect them with a spline.
spline
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Use text in part sketches


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Geometry-Text
Use Geometry-Text to create and align text to sketch geometry.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Geometry Text

Geometry

Text Orientation and Format

Font attributes

Zoom buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Images in sketches
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Image properties
Rotates or mirrors artwork added to a sketch and sets transparency mask.

Access: Right-click an image, and then select Properties.

Orientation Rotates image left or right or mirrors image vertically or


horizontally.
Transparency Select Use Mask check box to make the image
transparent. Transparency color is the color of the lower
right pixel of the image. Clear the check box to make
the image opaque.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

3D sketches

Topics in this section

3D sketch environment
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 3D sketches >

3D sketch environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Silhouette Curve

Creates an associative 3D curve along the outer boundary of a body as defined by


the direction vector. Visualize a beam of light cast on the object along the
direction vector. The silhouette curve is generated where the light drops off and
the shadow begins.

A primary use of the silhouette curve command is to determine a natural parting


line.

Access: Ribbon: 3D Sketch tab Draw panel


Silhouette Curve
Body Selects the solid body to receive the curve
geometry.
Direction Selects the work plane, planar face, edge, or axis
to define the vector direction.

Note To break the associativity, expand the 3d Sketch in the browser. Select the
Silhouette Curve nested under the sketch, and select Break Link from the context
menu.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Dimensions

Topics in this section

Parametric dimensions
Part dimension tolerances and properties
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Dimensions >

Parametric dimensions
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Dimension properties - Document settings tab


Changes settings that originate on the Units tab and Default Tolerances tab of
the Document Settings dialog box. Settings affect all dimensions in the current
document.

Access: In the browser, right-click a feature and select Edit Sketch or


Show Dimensions. Right-click a dimension, select Dimension
Properties, and click the Document Settings tab.
Or, right-click in a sketch and select Dimension Display.

Modeling Dimension Display

Linear Dimension Display Precision

Angular Dimension Display Precision

Use Standard Tolerancing Values

Export Standard Tolerance Values


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Dimensions >

Part dimension tolerances and


properties
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Dimension properties - Dimension settings tab


Overrides an individual dimension setting or tolerance type and immediately
updates the values on the screen.

Access: In the browser, right-click a feature and select Edit Sketch or


Show Dimensions. Right-click a dimension, select Dimension
Properties, and click the Dimension Settings tab.

Settings

Tolerance

Evaluated size
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Constraints

Topics in this section

Introducing constraints
Plan constraints
Constrain sketches
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Introducing constraints
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Plan constraints
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Constraint Options
Selects constraints and reference geometry available for inference.

Access: In a sketch when no command is active, select Constraint


Options from the right-click context menu.

Selects the constraints to be inferred. Selects (scopes) the geometry to which


the constraints are inferred. The scoped geometry is shaded differently after
the dialog box is closed, unless all geometry is selected.
Selection for Constraint Inference
Select All Places a check mark in each active check box.
Clear All Removes all check marks. No constraints are inferred.

Horizontal. The horizontal constraint is inferred.

Vertical. The vertical constraint is inferred.

Parallel. The parallel constraint is inferred to scoped


geometry.

Perpendicular. The perpendicular constraint is inferred to


scoped geometry..

Intersection. The coincident constraint is inferred at the


intersection of scoped curves.

Midpoint. The coincident constraint is inferred at the midpoint


of scoped lines.

On Curve. The coincident constraint is inferred on scoped


curves.
Tangent. The tangent constraint is inferred to scoped
geometry.

Coincident. The coincident constraint is inferred to scoped


points.
Note The status of the Constraint Inference command overrides the selections
in the Constraint Options dialog box. If Constraint Inference is not selected,
all check boxes in the Options dialog box are unavailable.
Scope for Constraint Inference
All Infer constraints to all active sketch geometry.
Geometry
Select Select the sketch geometry to which constraints are inferred.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Constrain sketches
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Tangent constraint

The tangent constraint causes two curves to be


tangent to one another, even if they do not physically
share a point (in a 2D sketch). Tangency is
commonly used to constrain an arc to a line. A
tangent constraint is required to specify how to end a
spline that is tangent to other geometry.
In a 3D sketch, a tangent constraint can be applied
to a 3D spline that shares an endpoint with other
geometry in the 3D sketch, including a model edge.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Constrain panel Tangent


Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Work geometry and work features

Topics in this section

Work feature fundamentals


Work planes
Work axes
Work points
3D Move/Rotate command
Adaptive work features
Reference geometry
Reference planes
User Coordinate System (UCS)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work feature fundamentals


Concept Procedure

Set visibility of work features

Parts and assembly files contain a default set of work features (planes, axes, and
the origin center point) which can be displayed or hidden. In 3D sketch, part and
assembly files, you can define work plane, work axes and points.

When a part is used in an assembly, its visible work features are visible in the
assembly. To work in an uncluttered view, turn off all or some of the work
features.

To set visibility using the context menu

To set work feature visibility in the browser

To set visibility using the View menu


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work planes
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Work planes

In a part, a work plane is an infinite construction


plane that is parametrically attached to a feature. In
an assembly, a work plane is constrained relative to
an existing component.

Work planes can be placed at any orientation in space, offset from existing faces,
or rotated around an axis or edge. A work plane can be used as a sketch plane
and dimensioned or constrained to other features or components. In an assembly,
you can create a work plane between two planar faces on separate components.

Each work plane has its own internal coordinate system. The order in which
geometry is selected determines the origin and positive directions of the
coordinate system axes.

In a part, a work plane can be created in-line while you are using another work
feature command. The Work Plane command terminates as soon as the work
plane is created.

Note Optionally, resize a workplane. Right-click a workplane and clear the check
mark from Auto-resize, if necessary. Click a grip handle on one of the workplane
corners and drag to resize.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Work Features panel Plane

Tip To understand geometric dependencies, right-click a work feature in the


browser or the graphics window, and then select Show Inputs. For example, you
can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created,
such as a work axis and a work plane.

3-point work plane


Select: Any three points (endpoints, intersections,
midpoints, work points).

Result: Positive X axis is directed from first point


to second point. Positive Y axis is
perpendicular to the positive X axis
through the third point.
Work plane tangent to face through edge
Select: A curved face and a linear edge, in either
order.

Result: The X axis is defined by the line of


tangency to the face. The positive Y axis is
defined from the X axis to the edge.
Work plane normal to axis through point
Select: A linear edge or axis and a point, in either
order.

Result: The positive X axis is oriented from the


intersection of the plane and axis to the
point. Specify the direction of the positive
Y axis.
Work plane through two coplanar edges
Select: Two coplanar edges.
Result: The positive X axis is oriented along the
first selected edge.
Work plane offset from face
Select: A planar face. Click the edge of the face
and drag in the direction of the offset.
Enter a value in the edit box to specify the
offset distance.

Result: Creates a work plane parallel to the


selected face at the specified offset
distance.
Work plane at angle to face or plane
Select: A part face or plane and any edge or line
parallel to face.

Result: Creates a work plane angled 90 degrees


from the part face or plane. Enter the
angle in the edit box and click the check
mark to reset at the new angle.
Work plane parallel to plane through point
Select: A planar face or work plane and any point,
in either order.

Result: The work plane coordinate system is


derived from the plane selected.
Work plane tangent to curved face and parallel to
plane
plane
Select: A curved face and a planar face or work
plane, in either order.

Result: The new work plane coordinate system is


derived from the selected plane. This
method can also be used to create a work
plane tangent to a face or plane that is
normal to a plane.
Work plane tangent to a cylinder
Select: A construction line with ends coincident
with the cylinder axis and edge and the
tangent point on the cylinder edge.

Result: The new work plane is tangent to the


cylinder edge.
Work plane normal to a curve at a point on the curve
Select: A nonlinear edge or sketch curve (arc,
circle, ellipse, or spline) and a vertex, edge
midpoint, sketch point, or work point on
the curve.

Result: The new work plane is normal to the curve


and passes through the point.
Work plane bisecting two parallel planes
Select: Two parallel planar faces or work planes.

Result: The new work plane is oriented to the


coordinate system and has the same
outward normal of the first selected plane.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work axes
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Work axis
You can create a work axis on the following types of geometry:

A linear edge.

A sketch line.

A 3D sketch line.

A line and plane to create a work axis coincident with the line projected
onto the plane along the normal of the plane.

A work axis is a construction line of infinite length that


is parametrically attached to a part.
In an assembly, a work axis is constrained relative to
an existing component.

Note If appropriate, resize a work axis. Right-click a work axis and clear the
check mark from Auto-resize, if necessary. Click a grip handle on one of the work
axis ends and drag to resize.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Work Features panel Axis

In a part, a work axis can be created in-line while using another work feature
command. The Work Axis command terminates as soon as the work point is
created.

Tip To understand geometric dependencies, right-click a work feature in the


browser or the graphics window, and then select Show Inputs. For example, you
can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created,
such as a work axis and a work plane.
Work axis through a revolved face or feature
Select: A revolved face or feature.

Result: The work axis created is coincident with


the face or feature axis.
Work axis through two points
Select: Two endpoints, intersections, midpoints, or
work points.
You cannot select midpoints in an
assembly.

Result: A work axis is created through the selected


points, with its positive direction oriented
in the direction from the first point to the
second point.
Work axis along two intersecting planes
Select: Two nonparallel work planes or planar
faces.

Result: A work axis is created coincident with the


intersection of the planes.
Work axis perpendicular to a plane through a point
Select: A planar face or work plane and a point.
Result: The work axis created is perpendicular to
the selected plane, through the point.
Work axis along a linear edge
Select: A linear edge.

Result: The work axis created is collinear with the


selected linear edge.
Work axis along a sketch line
Select: A sketch line.

Result: The work axis created is collinear with the


selected sketch line.
Work axis along a 3D sketch line
Select: A 3D sketch line.

Result: The work axis created is collinear with the


selected 3D sketch line.
Work axis coincident with the line endpoint projected
onto the plane along the normal to the plane
Select: A line projected onto a plane on the
normal to the plane.
Result: The work axis created is coincident with
the line endpoint projected onto the plane.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work points
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Work points

A work point is a parametric construction point that can be placed on part


geometry, construction geometry, or in 3D space. In an assembly, a work point
cannot be created on the midpoint of a line.

Work points can be placed on holes and cuts in part faces, model surfaces,
construction surfaces, and base surfaces. When Loop Select Mode is active, you
can place a work point on any closed loop.

Access: In a 3D sketch, click Model Work Features and then


click Point or Grounded Point.
In a part file, click Model Work Features and then
click Point or Grounded Point.
In an assembly file, click Model Work Features

Point.

In a part, an ungrounded work point can be created in-line while using another
work feature command. The Point command terminates as soon as the work point
is created.

Tip To understand geometric dependencies, right-click a work feature in the


browser or the graphics window, and then select Show Inputs. For example, you
can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created,
such as a work axis and a work plane.
Work point at intersection of three planes
Select three work planes or planar faces.

Work point at the intersection of two lines


Select any combination of two lines including linear
edges, 2D or 3D sketch lines, and work axes.

Work point on a vertex


Select any endpoint of a line or edge.

Work point on a midpoint


Select a midpoint of an edge.

Work point on a 2D or 3D sketch point


Select a sketch point in either a 2D or 3D sketch.
Work point on intersection of a plane. work axis,
or line
Select a planar face or work plane and a work axis
or line.

Work point on intersection of a surface and line


Select a surface and a sketch line, straight edge, or
work axis.

Work point on intersection of a plane and curve


Select a planar face or work plane and a sketch
curve (arc, circle, ellipse, or spline).

Work point on a grounded work point


Select a grounded work point.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

3D Move/Rotate command
Concept Quick Reference

3D Move or Rotate

Interactively positions grounded work points by


dragging the triad in a planar move, axial move or
rotate, free movement, or entering values along X,
Y, or Z axes. Movement is controlled by the selected
area of the triad.

Access: On the ribbon, select Model tab Work Features panel


Grounded Point, and then click a vertex, edge midpoint, sketch

point, or work point. Click the triad to show dialog box.


In the Part browser, right-click a feature, and select Move
Feature. In the graphics window, right-click and select Triad
Move.

Select triad segment Values are relative to the selected geometry. Express
values as numeric values, parameters, or expressions.

Move along X, When a triad arrowhead is selected, drag or


Y, or Z axis enter a value in the corresponding axis area.
Rotate around When a triad axis is selected, drag or enter an
X, Y, or Z axis angle.
Unrestricted When the triad sphere is selected, drag in the
movement active view plane or enter values in X, Y, and Z
axes. After you enter coordinates in the dialog
box, you cannot drag the triad because it is not
in the active view plane.
Move in plane When a plane on the triad is selected, drag or
enter values in the selected plane.
Move triad only Select to move the triad only. The work point or
feature position is unchanged. Clear the check
mark to move the triad and the work point or
feature together.

Redefine alignment or position Activates the X, Y, and Z edit boxes. You can
enter new coordinates to redefine the triad alignment or position. The triad moves
to the newly entered coordinates.

Move the 3D triad:

Click a triad axis, and click an edge, work axis, or sketch line.

Click a triad plane, and click a face or work plane.

Click the triad sphere, and click a vertex, edge midpoint, work point, or
sketch point to reposition.

Apply places a grounded work point at the position of the triad, either by clicking
with the cursor or to apply entered coordinates. A grounded work point is placed
each time you click Apply.

Undo reverses the last placed point and moves the triad to the previous position.

Show Me how to create a grounded work point

Show Me how to redefine the alignment or position of the 3D Move/Rotate tool


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Adaptive work features


Concept Procedure

Create adaptive work features

Use adaptive work features to model relationships between geometric features


and assembly components. Use adaptive work features as construction geometry
(points, planes, and axes) to position a part created in-place in an assembly.

Convert a nonadaptive work feature to an adaptive work feature

Use geometry on another component as the origin of a work feature

Note Optionally, use these tips to create adaptive work features:

Hide work features when they are consumed by another work feature.

Click Options to access the Application Options dialog box.


Click the Part tab. Select the Auto-hide In-line Work Features option.

Create in-line work features. For example, click the Point command,
right-click, and then select Create Axis or Create Plane. Continue to
right-click and create work features until the work point is created.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Reference geometry

Reference geometry is sketch curves or points


created by projecting the model edges, vertices, or
work features of another sketch onto the active
sketch plane. Reference geometry refers to (is
associated with) previously created geometry.

You can use reference geometry in a profile or path sketch or to constrain other
sketch geometry. For example, you can use a reference edge as one segment of a
profile or as the termination point for other sketch curves.

How is reference geometry created?

What is the difference between sketched curves and reference


geometry?

What happens to reference geometry if the feature on which it depends


is edited or deleted?
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Reference planes
Concept Procedure

Display a reference plane

Each new file has default work planes that intersect


at the origin of the xyz coordinates. Display
reference planes to help you construct features with
precision.

To view reference planes, right-click in the graphics window and click Home View.

1. In the browser, click the plus sign beside Origin.

2. Select a reference plane to display, then right-click and select Visibility


from the menu.

3. Optionally, do one of the following:

To resize a reference plane, hover over a corner to show the


Resize symbol, then drag a corner.

To move a reference plane, hover over an edge to show the


Move symbol, then drag an edge.

Note Click the Sketch command, and then click a reference plane to set it as the
sketch plane.

A hidden center point exists at the intersection of the reference planes. To


position sketches relative to the part origin, click Sketch Draw and use the
Project Geometry command to project the center point onto the sketch plane.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

User Coordinate System (UCS)


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

UCS Settings
Set the UCS preferences such as UCS prefix in the browser or the UCS visibility in
the graphics window.

Settings apply to newly inserted UCS.

UCS (User Coordinate System) is a collection of work


features (three workplanes, three axes, and a center
point). But unlike Origin, there can be multiple UCS in
a document, and you can place and orient them
differently.

Access:
In a part or assembly document, click Tools Document
Settings Modeling tab in the dialog box. Click Settings in the
User Coordinate System area.

Naming prefix Sets the UCS prefix. UCS name is generated


from this prefix and a numeric index.
Default plane Select the default 2D sketch plane. Affects
behavior of 2D Sketch, and Look At commands,
when UCS triad is selected as an input.
Visibility Select the visibility of UCS objects.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part modeling overview

Topics in this section

Part modeling environment


Multi-body parts
Part browser
Part templates
Work with parts
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Part modeling environment


Concept Procedure

Rebuild all part geometry

To be certain you have incorporated edits to all geometry in a part file, use
Rebuild All. Autodesk Inventor regenerates the entire file, even if some geometry
did not require an update.

You must be working in a part file:

1. Open a part file.

2. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Update panel Rebuild All.

By contrast, the Update command regenerates only the geometry that has
significant edits held in memory. If the Defer Update option is selected (on
Assembly tab of the Application Options dialog box), you can continue working
without incorporating edits to geometry until you click Update.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Multi-body parts
Concept Procedure

Create multi-body parts

A multi-body part is a top down workflow which allows you to create and position
multiple solid bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially
useful for designing plastic parts. A top down workflow eliminates the need for
complex file relationships and projecting edges between parts. You can control
visibility, define a separate color, and calculate the mass for each body. When you
complete the design, you can export the individual solid bodies as part files
directly into an assembly.

To create a multi-body part:

1. Create a model representing the exterior shape of the finished part or,
import a finished industrial design surface set and use stitch to create a
solid model.

2. Add features, such as fillets and shell, as required to complete the


exterior of the part.
3. Use work planes, 2D sketche geometry, or surfaces to split the part
into separate bodies.

4. Use sketch based modeling commands such as Extrude and Revolve to


create new bodies in place.

5. Use Derive to insert components into the part file as bodies.

6. Use Move Bodies to accurately position the bodies in the part file.

7. Use Combine to perform a Join, Cut, or Intersect operation between


solids.

8. Add additional features such as holes, grills, lips, and bosses to each
body as required.

9. Use the Make Part or Make Component command to save the


individual solids as derived part files linked to the master part design.

Note Different bodies can share the same feature such as a fillet or a hole.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Part browser
Concept Quick Reference

Part browser
Shows and hides selected features, filters contents, manages access to feature
and sketch editing, and provides alternate access to functions in the context
menu.

Access: In a part file, click item to select, then right-click to display the
context menu.

Filters

Context menu options


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Part templates
Concept Procedure

Create part templates

1. Create a part, using an existing template.

2. Set the default units of measurement.

3. If needed, change the grid setting and the sizes of the origin work
planes to accommodate the average part size.

4. Create any work features, sketches, or geometry to include in every


new part file.

5. Define commonly used parameters or link to a spreadsheet of


parameters.

6. Set the properties for the file.

7. Save the file in the Autodesk\Autodesk Inventor [version]\Templates


folder or a subfolder of Templates. A part file automatically becomes a
template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The file standard.ipt in the Templates folder is the default part template. To
replace the default template, rename it to save the original file, and then save
the new file with the standard.ipt name.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview >

Work with parts

Use these tips to help create parts and troubleshoot design issues:

Copy one or more parts in an assembly

Replay the steps used to create a part

Create two parts from a split part

Select geometry in the browser to realign the model view

Create a thin part with a decal to span assembly components


Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part features

Topics in this section

Features and feature termination


Create features
Placed features
Adaptive features, parts, and subassemblies
Shared sketches and features
Deleted features
Mirrored features
Arrange features in patterns
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Features and feature termination


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Feature properties
Controls the adaptive status of individual properties for sketched features and
overrides the part color for specified features.

Access: Click the feature in the browser, right-click, and select


Properties.

Extrude and Revolve features

Hole features

Feature Color
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Create features
Concept Procedure

Bend a part

Create a boundary patch feature

Create a chamfer feature

Create a coil feature

Create an extruded feature

Add draft to part faces

Create a fillet feature

Create a hole feature

Modify hole dimensions

Create a loft feature

Create a revolved feature

Create ribs and webs

Create a shell feature

Create a sweep feature

Measure 2D open paths in sweeps

Thread a hole or cylindrical shaft

Edit the thread data spreadsheet

Add a new thread type or clearance hole type


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Bend features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bend Part
Use Bend Part to bend a portion of a part. After you define the tangency location
of the bend using a bend line, you can specify the side of the part to bend, the
direction of the bend, and its angle, radius, or arc length.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Bend Part

Bend Line The tangency line at which the existing part


transitions into the bend feature's deformation
area. The line about which the feature hinges or
folds.
The Bend Part feature is defined by using one of
three input combinations. Selecting one of the
available combinations from the drop-down list
alters the dialog box fields to allow appropriate
inputs.
Radius + Angle Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by
specifying a value for Angle and a value for
Radius. The Radius defines the size of the bend
curve between the two sides, and the angle
defines the position of the two sides.
Radius + Arc Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by
Length specifying a value for Arc Length and a value for
Radius. The Radius defines the size of the bend
curve between the two sides, and the Arc Length
defines the length of the curve.
Arc Length + Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by
Angle specifying a value for Arc Length and a value for
Angle. The Arc Length defines the length of the
curve, and the angle defines the position of the
two sides.
Side Flips the side of the part to bend.
Direction Flips the direction of the bend up or down.
Bend Minimum When the Bend Line intersects multiple portions
of the part body, use the Bend Minimum option
to specify which portions are to be bent.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Boundary patch features


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Boundary Patch

Creates a boundary patch feature by generating a planar or 3D surface within the


specified boundary.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Boundary Patch

Boundary Specifies the boundary of the patch. Select a


closed 2D sketch, a chain of tangent continuous
edges, or a mixture of both to specify a closed
region. Once the boundary selection represents a
closed region, you can select the next boundary.
Condition Lists the name for the selected edge and the
number of edges in the selection set. It also
specifies the edge condition to apply to each
edge of the boundary patch. Click the arrow to
select an edge condition.
Note Because continuous edges must have the
same edge condition, all selected surface edges
that are tangent or continuous with the previous
item are merged.
Contact (G0)
Tangent (G1)

Note You cannot apply tangent boundary conditions to selected sketches or edges
that have two adjacent faces.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Chamfer features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Chamfer

Adds a chamfer on one or more part edges. You


specify the corner appearance and select edges
individually or as part of a chain. All chamfers
created in a single operation are one feature.
For chamfers created in the assembly environment,
the geometry selected can be from multiple parts.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Chamfer

Method

Edges and Faces

Distance and Angle

Edge Chain and Setback


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Coil features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Coil

Creates a helix-based feature or body. Used to create coil springs and threads on
cylindrical surfaces.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Coil

Coil shape

Coil size

Coil ends
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Extruded features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extrude

Creates a feature or body by adding depth to a sketched profile. In assemblies,


extrusions are often used to cut through parts. Feature shape is controlled by
sketch shape, extrusion extent, and taper angle.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Extrude

Selection

Output

Operation

Extents

Match Shape

More tab
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Face draft features


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Face draft
Applies draft to specified faces of a feature. The draft angle is calculated from a
fixed or tangent edge, a fixed face of an existing feature, or a work plane.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Draft

Draft Type selects Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane draft.

Fixed Edge creates draft about one or multiple tangent


contiguous fixed edges per face. Result creates additional faces.

Fixed Plane selects a planar face or a workplane and


determines the pull direction. The pull direction is normal to the
selected face or plane.
Creates draft about a fixed plane. The planar part face or work
plane determines which selected faces are drafted. Depending
on the position of the fixed plane, the draft can both add and
remove material.
Note Press Ctrl and click near the edge of a selected face or
edge to remove from the selection set.
Selections set pull direction or fixed plane and faces or edges to draft.

Pull Direction or Fixed Plane is set by the draft type.


Pull direction indicates direction in which a mold is
pulled from a part. As you move the cursor in the
graphics window, a vector displays normal to a
highlighted face or along a highlighted edge. When
the vector displays, click a planar face, work plane,
edge, or axis to select.
Fixed plane specifies the planar face or work plane
from which the selected faces are drafted and sets
the pull direction perpendicular to the plane. Click Flip
Direction to reverse pull direction. Select edges
separately to angle each separately.
Flip Direction reverses the pull-direction arrow.
Faces selects the faces or edges to which draft is applied. As
you move the cursor over a face, a symbol indicates the fixed
edge for the draft and how the draft is applied. Click the top
edge to fix it and move the bottom edge with the taper. Click
the bottom edge to fix it and move the top edge with the
taper. Click again to select an edge of a selected face.
Draft Angle Sets the angle of the draft. Enter a positive or
negative angle or choose a calculation method from the list.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Fillet features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Fillet feature

Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a part,


between two face sets, or between three adjacent
face sets. For edge fillets, tangent (G1) or smooth
(G2) continuity can be applied to adjacent faces.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Fillet

Edge fillets Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a


part. You can create constant-radius and variable-radius fillets,
fillets of different sizes, and fillets of different continuity
(Tangent or Smooth G2) in a single operation. All fillets and
rounds created in a single operation become a single feature.

Constant tab

Variable tab

Setbacks

Face fillets Adds fillets or rounds between two selected face


sets, which need not share an edge.

Face

Full round fillets Adds variable-radius fillets or rounds that are


tangent to three adjacent faces. The center face set is replaced
by the variable-radius fillet. Full round fillets can be used to cap
or round exterior part features, such as ribs.
Full round

(More)

Preview provides a preview of the fillet based on the current selections.


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Hole features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Hole Dimensions
Displays and sets hole dimensions.

Access: Right-click the hole feature in the model browser and select

Show Dimensions. Double-click the dimension.

Hole Diameter Sets the value for the hole diameter. Key in the
value or click the arrow to do one of the
following:
Select a value.
Use the Measure command.
Show Dimensions.
Set tolerances in the Tolerance dialog
box.
Counterbore Sets the value for the counterbore or countersink
Diameter diameter.
Hole Depth Sets the value for the hole depth.
Counterbore Sets the value for the counterbore or spot face
Depth depth.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Loft features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Section Dimensions

Use the Section Dimensions dialog box to control the area/scale of placed and
selected sections, and the location of placed sections.

Access: On the Model tab, Create panel, click Loft. Double-click an


existing point created by the Area Loft command, or right-click
the point created by Area Loft, and select Edit from the context

menu.

Section Position Specifies the position of the placed section. After initial
section placement, the position can only be controlled
by editing the value in the dialog box.
Proportional Dimensions are relative along
Distance the length of the centerline.
Sections are placed with respect
to the length of centerline.
Absolute Distance Dimensions are placed along
the absolute distance of the
centerline. For example, if the
centerline is 16 inches, you can
place a dimension halfway (8
inches).
Driving Section Driving sections allow control of section position and
size.
Driven Section Driven sections provide feedback on section size,
without altering the area loft. Driven Sections allow
control only of position.
control only of position.
Section Size Allows 2 methods of sizing placed sections
Area Scales section to match
specified area value.
Dimensions are relative along
the length of the centerline.
Scale Factor Scales section to match
specified scale factor.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Revolved features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Revolve

Creates a feature or body by revolving one or more sketched profiles around an


axis. Except for surfaces, profiles must be closed loops.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Revolve

Shape

Output

Operation

Extents

Match Shape

Infer iMate
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Ribs and webs


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Ribs and webs

Creates ribs (closed, thin-walled support shapes) and webs (open, thin-walled
support shapes) using an open profile.

For ribs, the profile is projected to the next face. For webs, the profile is projected
a specified distance to define its depth. If appropriate, the profile can be extended
until it intersects geometry.

By selecting multiple intersecting or nonintersecting sketch geometry in a profile,


you can create a rib network.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Rib

Shape Specifies the profile geometry and sets the direction.

Profile In a single sketch, selects an open profile to define


the shape of a rib or web or selects multiple intersecting or
nonintersecting profiles to define a rib or web network.

Direction Controls the direction of the rib or web. Hover


the cursor over the profile to specify whether the rib
extends parallel or perpendicular to the sketch geometry.
Thickness Specifies the width of the rib or web.

Flip applies the thickness on either side of the profile or


extends equally on both sides of the profile.

Extents Specifies the termination for the rib or web.

To Next terminates the rib or web on the next face.

Finite sets a specific distance for the rib or web


termination. Enter a value in the box.
Options Specifies if the profile extends to a face.
Extend By default, the profile extends to intersect a face, if
profile necessary. Clear the check box to prevent the profile from
extending.
Taper Sets taper angle, or draft, for ribs and webs (normal to the sketch
plane). The taper extends equally in both directions. If taper angle is
specified, a symbol in the graphics window shows the fixed edge and direction
of taper.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Shell features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Shell

Removes material from a part interior, creating a


hollow cavity with walls of a specified thickness.
Selected faces can be removed to form a shell
opening.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Shell

Shell tab

More tab

(More)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Sweep features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sweep
Creates a feature or new solid body by sweeping one or more sketch profiles
along a selected path. If using multiple profiles, they must exist in the same
sketch. The path can be an open or closed loop, but must pierce the profile plane.

A sweep feature requires a minimum of two unconsumed sketches, a profile and a


path, on intersecting planes. An additional curve or surface can be selected as a
guide rail or guide surface to control profile scale and twist.

Note If multiple profiles in different sketches are required, use the Loft command.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Sweep

Shape

Profile Selects one or more profiles of a sketch to sweep


along the selected path. Use closed profiles to
create either solid or surface sweep features. Use
open profiles to create only surface sweep
features. Hold Ctrl to cancel the selection of
features. Hold Ctrl to cancel the selection of
profiles.
Path Selects the trajectory or path along which the
profile is swept. The path can be an open or
closed loop, but must pierce the profile plane.
Solids In a multi-body part file, selects the participating
solid bodies. Not available in a part file with only
one solid body.

Type

Specifies the type of sweep to create. In addition to the path, guide rail sweeps
require the selection of an additional curve or rail to control profile scale and
twist. Guide Surface sweeps require the additional selection of a surface to control
profile twist.

Path Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile


along a path.
Orientation

Path holds the swept profile constant to the


sweep path. All sweep sections maintain the
original profile relationship to the path.

Parallel holds the swept profile parallel to the


original profile.
Taper
Sets taper angle for sweeps normal to the sketch
plane (not available for Parallel). The taper is
shown in the solid sweep preview. Not available
for closed paths.
Positive Angle taper angle increases the section
area as the sweep moves away from the start
point.
Negative Angle taper angle decreases the
section area as the sweep moves away from the
start point.
Nested Profiles the sign (positive or negative )
of the taper angle is applied to the outer loop of
nested profiles; inner loops have the opposite
sign.
Path & Guide Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile
Rail along a path. The guide rail controls scale and
twist of the swept profile.
Guide Rail selects a guide curve or rail that
controls the scaling and twist of the swept
controls the scaling and twist of the swept
profile. The guide rail must pierce the profile
plane.
Profile Scaling specifies how the swept section
scales to meet the guide rail.
X & Y scales the profile in both the X and Y
directions as the sweep progresses.
X scales the profile in the X direction as the
sweep progresses.
None keeps the profile at a constant shape and
size as the sweep progresses. Using this option,
the rail controls only profile twist.
Path & Guide Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile
Surface along a path and guide surface. The guide
surface controls twist of the swept profile.
Guide Surface selects a surface whose normal
controls the twist of the swept profile about the
path. For best results, the path should be on or
near the guide surface.

Output

Specifies if the sweep feature is a solid or surface.


Solid Creates a solid feature from an open or closed
profile. Open profile is not available for base
features.
Surface Creates a surface feature from an open or closed
profile. Can be used as a construction surface on
which other features terminate or used as a split
tool to create a split part. Not available in the
assembly environment.

Operation

Specifies whether the sweep joins, cuts, or intersects with another feature or
creates a new solid body. Not available for base features, but required for all
other sweep features.

Join Adds the volume created by the sweep feature to another


feature or body. This option is not available in the assembly
environment.

Cut Removes the volume created by the sweep feature from another
feature or body.
Intersect Creates a new feature from the shared volume of the
sweep feature and another feature or body. Material not included in
the shared volume is deleted. Not available in the assembly
environment.

New solid Creates a new solid body. This is the default selection if
the sweep is the first solid feature in a part file. Select to create a
new body in a part file with existing solid bodies. Each body is an
independent collection of features separate from other bodies. A
body can share features with other bodies.

Optimize for Single Selection

Automatically advances to the next selector once a single selection is made. Clear
the check box when making multiple selections.

Preview

Provides a solid preview of the sweep based on the current selections. If Preview
is enabled and no preview appears in the graphics window, there is a good
chance the sweep feature was not created.

Tip To save computation time for complex sweeps, clear the Preview check box,
provide all the needed input in the dialog box, and then enable the Preview
again.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Thread features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Threads

Creates threads in holes or on shafts, studs,


or bolts. Specifies thread location, thread
length, offset, direction, type, nominal size,
class, and pitch. Thread data originates on a
spreadsheet that you can customize by adding
thread types and sizes.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Thread

Location

Specification
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features >

Thread data spreadsheet


Concept Procedure

Add a new thread type or clearance hole type

The Thread.xls Microsoft Excel file, located in the Design Data


folder, provides data for hole and thread commands. The
Application Options and/or project settings can affect the
spreadsheet file's location. Each worksheet in the spreadsheet
corresponds to a different thread type. Thread types are
designated as either Parallel Thread Types or Taper Thread
Types.
The Clearance.xls Microsoft Excel file, located in the same
folder as the Thread.xls file, manages clearance data. The
Clearance.xls file has only one format.
Microsoft Excel is not required to create threaded or clearance
holes within Autodesk Inventor. However, Excel is required to
add a new thread or clearance type.

To add a thread type:

1. Close Autodesk Inventor, and open the Thread.xls file.

2. Copy an existing worksheet of the same type (parallel or taper).

3. Delete most or all of the data rows (row 4 and below), and add data
rows as required.

4. Rename the worksheet name (thread type name) and custom thread
type name (cell B1/C1).

5. Edit cells A1 and D1.

6. Save the file.


Note Changes to the Excel file are refreshed on startup.

To add a clearance type:

We recommend that you use similar rules to add a new clearance type in the
Clearance.xls file.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Placed features

Placed features are common engineering features that do not require a sketch
when you create them with Autodesk Inventor. When you create these features,
you usually provide only the location and a few dimensions. The standard placed
features are shell, fillet, chamfer, face draft, hole, and thread.

These are some of the commands for placed features, located on the Model tab:

Fillet: Places a fillet or round on selected edges.


Chamfer: Breaks sharp edges. Removes material from an
outside edge and can add material to an inside
edge.
Hole: Places a specified hole in a part, optionally with
thread.
Thread: Creates regular and tapered external and internal
threads on cylindrical or conical faces.
Shell: Produces a hollow part with a wall thickness you
define.
Rectangular Creates a rectangular pattern of features.
Pattern:
Circular Creates a circular pattern of features.
Pattern:
Mirror Feature: Creates a mirror image across a plane.

Dialog boxes define values for placed features, such as the Hole dialog box in the
following illustration.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Adaptive features, parts, and


subassemblies
Concept Procedure

Place adaptive components in assemblies

You can use an existing part or subassembly to satisfy assembly requirements.


Underconstrained features resize when you constrain them to a fixed assembly
component. In an assembly file, start by selecting a part or subassembly whose
features are set to be adaptive.

1. Click Assemble tab Component panel Place to


choose the component to place.
2. Browse to the folder that contains the component,
select it, and then click Open.
3. The selected component is attached to the cursor.
Select the location, and then click to place an
occurrence of the component.
4. Right-click, and then select Done.
5. Right-click again, and then select Adaptive.
6. Click the Constraint command to add assembly
constraints. Position the component relative to other
fixed assembly components.

As degrees of freedom are removed, the underconstrained features of the


adaptive part or subassembly resize to satisfy assembly constraints.

Note A component cannot be both adaptive and flexible at the same time. You
can need to see the same subassembly with its components in multiple positions
in an assembly. If so, turn off adaptive status and then turn on flexible status .
Right-click the adaptive subassembly in the assembly browser and clear the
check mark beside Adaptive. The Flexible option can now be selected.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Shared sketches and features


Concept Procedure

Control surface and work feature consumption

For parts, surface features and work features are automatically consumed by
default to communicate feature dependencies. Because automatic consumption
can result in unwanted deep nesting of browser nodes, you can change the
consumption behavior for all features or for individual features.

To change the default consumption behavior for all features, select the

Options to access the Application Options dialog box, Part tab


and clear the Auto-Consume Work Features & Surface Features check
box. This technique is helpful if you create several work planes, each
offset from the previous work plane (such as creating sketches for lofted
features).

To override automatic consumption on a per-feature basis, right-click


the feature in the browser, and then select Consume Inputs from the
context menu.

Note The end-of-part marker cannot be rolled back between consumed features
without sharing, such as between an extruded feature and its consumed sketch. If
you do not want work features and surface features to be consumed, clear the
check mark.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Deleted features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Delete feature
Deletes one or more selected features from the graphics window or the browser.
If applicable, you can also delete consumed sketches and work or surface
features, dependent 2D and 3D sketches, sketched features, or dependent work
features.

The following features are automatically deleted:

Dependent placed features (those features without sketches, such as


chamfers and fillets)

In-line work features when you delete a work feature

Nested work features when you delete a 3D sketch

Colors on the dialog box correspond to the highlight color of the selected
geometry in the graphics window.

Access: Right-click and select Delete. In the Additionally Delete box,


select one or more check boxes to delete geometry with the
feature.

Additionally Delete

Note If you do not delete the dependent sketches and features, the retained
sketches and features enter the sick state. An alert symbol is placed next to the
affected sketch and feature entries in the browser. Use Redefine to re-associate
the sketch to another planer face or work plane in the assembly.

consumed sketches and features

dependent sketches and features

dependent work features

Note Grounded work planes are automatically created when you retain a
dependent sketch. You can constrain the work planes in the part environment or
use the Reattach Sketch command to move the sketches onto other work planes.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Mirrored features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Mirrored features

Any work plane or planar face can serve as the plane of symmetry to mirror
selected features. A mirrored feature is a reverse copy of the selected feature. In
an assembly, only sketched features can be mirrored.

For parts, use the Mirror the Entire Solid option to mirror a body including
features which cannot be mirrored individually. The pattern of the body can also
include work features and surface features.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Pattern panel Mirror

Mirror individual features

Features Selects solid features, work features, and surface


features to mirror. If selected features have
dependent features, they are automatically
selected.
Note Certain exceptions exist: in assemblies, only
sketched features can be mirrored, assembly
work features cannot be mirrored, single sheet
metal flange and contour flange features defined
using multiple edges cannot be mirrored.
Features that operate on the entire body (all
fillets, all rounds, shell) cannot be mirrored.
Features based on the results of an intersect
operation cannot be mirrored.
Mirror Plane Selects a work plane or planar face across which
selected features are mirrored.
Solid In a multi-body part, selects the solid body to
receive the mirror. Not available in a single body
part file.

Mirror the entire solid

Include In a part, selects one or more work or surface


Work\Surface features to mirror.
Features
Mirror Plane Selects a work plane or planar face across which
selected work features, surface features, and the
solid are mirrored.
Not available in an assembly. Use Mirror
Component on the Assemble tab.
Remove Removes the original body. Only the mirrored
Original occurrence remains in the part file. You can use
this option to model a left-hand and right-hand
version of a part.

(More)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features >

Arrange features in patterns


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rectangular pattern

Duplicates one or more features or bodies and arranges the resulting occurrences
by a specific count and spacing in a rectangular pattern or along a linear path in
one or both directions. Rows and columns can be lines, arc, splines, or trimmed
ellipses.

All occurrences of a feature in a pattern are one feature, but individual


occurrences are listed under the pattern feature icon in the browser. All
occurrences of a new body in a pattern are individual bodies. The bodies are listed
under the pattern feature icon in the browser. You can suppress or restore all
occurrences or individual occurrences.

In an assembly, only sketched assembly features can be patterned, including their


dependent fillets and chamfers. Weld features cannot be patterned.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Pattern panel Rectangular

Pattern individual features Use this option to pattern


individual solid features, work features, and surface features.
Assembly work features cannot be patterned.
Features selects one or more solid features, work features,
and surface features to include in the pattern. Selecting
multiple features for duplication in a pattern increases
calculation time.
Finish features such as fillets and chamfers can be included in a
pattern only if their parent feature is also selected.

Solid is available if the part file contains more than one solid
body. Selects the solid body to receive the pattern.

Pattern a solid Use this option to pattern a solid body,


including features that you cannot pattern individually. The
pattern can also include work features and surface features.
Not available in an assembly.

Include Work/Surface Features selects one or more work or


surface features to pattern.

Solid If there are multiple solid bodies in the file, the Solid
selection arrow is available. Select the body to include in the
pattern. Only one body can be selected.

Join Attaches the pattern to the selected solid body. Use this
option to pattern the solid as a single unified body.

Create new bodies Creates a pattern consisting of multiple


individual solid bodies.

Direction 1

Direction 2

(More)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Plastic Features

A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. You create and position multiple solid
bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially useful for
designing plastic parts. A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file
relationships and projecting edges between parts. You can control visibility, define
a separate color, and calculate the mass for each body. When you complete the
design, you can export the individual bodies as part files directly into an
assembly.

The plastic part commands in Inventor are rules-based tools designed to create
complex plastic part features automatically.

Note The plastic part commands are not exclusively for plastic parts. For
example, the Rule Fillet command can create fillets on any type of feature based
on specified design rules.

Topics in this section


Boss features
Lip features
Rest features
Grill features
Snap fit features
Rule-based fillet features
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Boss features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Boss - Ribs tab


Stiffening ribs are optional. If the Stiffening Ribs check mark is on, all controls
to input the Ribs parameters become active.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Boss , and click
the Ribs tab.

Number of stiffening ribs indicates the number of ribs surrounding each


Boss.

Rib thickness

Rib draft

Shoulder length
Shoulder top offset

Shoulder radius

Shoulder flare angle

Rib Fillet options

Rib fillet radius on the edges of the rib.


Rib blend radius at the intersection between the
ribs and the boss.

Start angle is the first rib inclination angle with respect


to the sketch X axis (when Placement is On Sketch).
When Placement is On Point, the rib start angle is
determined by a projected line on a plane that is normal
to the Boss direction.

Start Direction the selector is active when the


Placement is On Point. Use this selector to define the
reference direction of the first rib.

Flip is active when the Placement is On Point. Use to


reverse the direction of the first rib reference axis.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Lip features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Lip
Creates a Lip or Groove feature on the thin wall of a part.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Lip

Lip/Groove toggle. Determines the type of feature to be


either Lip or Groove.

Shape

Lip

Groove
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Rest features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rest
Creates a Rest feature using a closed sketch. The Rest feature creates a thin-
walled face that cuts across a thin-walled target body. The face is then joined to
the body by walls of the same thickness.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Rest

Shape tab

More tab
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Grill features
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Grill
Creates a Grill feature using the various patterns included in one or more 2D
sketches.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Grill

Boundary

Island

Ribs

Spars

Draft
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Snap fit features


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Snap fit
Creates a Snap fit feature using points of 2D sketches or 3D work points and
direction elements.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Snap Fit

Style specification

Cantilever Snap Fit


Hook style

Cantilever Snap Fit


Loop style

Shape tab

Beam tab (Cantilever Snap Hook style)

Hook tab (Cantilever Snap Hook style)

Clip tab (Cantilever Snap Loop style)

Catch tab (Cantilever Snap Loop style)


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features >

Rule-based fillet features


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rule-based fillet

Creates constant radius fillets to the


edges matched by rules. The rules have a
source selection of entities (features and
faces). Identify edges based on interaction
statements. For example, “all the edges
that a given feature generates when
intersecting with the body” so such edges
are discovered at feature build/update
time.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Rule Fillet

The user interface is organized as a table, each row contains one rule and the
related source selection set.

Source

Selection indicator

Selection list

Radius

Rule

Convexity options
(More)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

iFeatures and iParts

Topics in this section

iFeature environment
iFeature fundamentals
Sketches in iFeatures
Advanced iFeature placement
Add Placement Help to iFeatures
iPart Fundamentals
iParts in Assemblies
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iFeature environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extract iFeature - Threads tab


The Extract iFeature command converts an iFeature to a table-driven iFeature.
Multiple versions are maintained in an embedded spreadsheet.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Extract iFeature

For iFeatures that contain thread features or threaded holes, use the Threads tab
to specify the thread type in the table. Add the thread variables to the table that
you want to vary, and then set the specifications for each row. The specifications
correspond exactly to options in the Threads.xls spreadsheet and the Thread
feature dialog box.

Threads definition tree

Selected thread variables

iFeature table
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iFeature fundamentals
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Edit iFeatures

Edits parameter names, size, and instructions for placement of iFeatures. If the
selected feature has geometrically dependent features, they can be also edited.

Note Feature parameters can also be edited when the feature is placed.

Environment:
Part

Access: Ribbon: iFeature tab iFeature panel Edit iFeature

Selected Features

Size Parameters

Position Geometry
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

Sketches in iFeatures

An iFeature is a sketch or one or more features that


can be saved and reused in other designs.

Create an iFeature from a sketch, and then use the sketch points to position
geometry or use the sketch as a layout when creating other features.

You can position an iFeature when placing it in a part file by selecting any
sketched line or point.

How are iFeature sketches used to specify point position?

How are iFeature sketches used as layouts?


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

Advanced iFeature placement


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Insert iFeatures
Places an iFeature in a part file on a work plane or a planar face. When you place
the iFeature, you can modify its orientation, position, and size, as needed.

Table-driven iFeatures are identified by a table icon in the left pane of the dialog
box. You can select from listed key parameters to specify a specific instance of
the iFeature.

Environment:
Part

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Insert panel Insert iFeature

Select

Position

Size

Precise position
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

Add Placement Help to iFeatures


Concept Procedure

Embed or link a document in an iFeature

You can link or embed a document in an iFeature to assist you in placing the
iFeature in a part The linked or embedded document, such as a Word document,
HTML file, or spreadsheet, is shown in the browser as an icon, nested under the
3rd Party icon. You select the document in the browser and designate it as
Placement Help.

If a document is associated with an iFeature, an Information button appears in


the Insert iFeature dialog box when you place the iFeature.

To add a document as placement help

To add a Web page as placement help

To use placement help when inserting an iFeature


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iPart Fundamentals
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Specify Range
Specifies a range of values for selected cells or columns when using the iPart
Author. When the iPart is placed, you can enter values within that range.

Environment:
Part

Access Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Create iPart


In the table, right-click a column, and then select Custom
Parameter Column. Right-click again, and then select Specify
Range for Column.

Sets minimum, default, and maximum values for a Custom Parameter column.
Minimum Click the arrow to select the limit (less than or equal,
or no lower bound). If less than or equal, enter a
value to represent the bottom end of the range. This
value must be less than the default or maximum.
Default Shows the current value of the parameter. This value
must be greater than the minimum and less than the
maximum.
Maximum Click the arrow to select the limit (less than or equal,
or no upper bound). If less than or equal, enter a
value to represent the top end of the range. This
value must be greater than the default or minimum.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts >

iParts in Assemblies
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

iPart and iAssembly Placement


Places a standard or custom iPart member or an iAssembly member in an
assembly.

Parts published from a Standard iPart Factory have predefined values.


Standard iParts cannot be modified.

Parts published from a Custom iPart Factory contain at least one


Custom Parameter. Custom iParts have designated parameters or
properties that have values specified at placement time. You can modify
a custom iPart by adding features.

iAssembly members can be parts, iParts, or assemblies.

Environment:
Parts and Assemblies

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Place


Browse to the folder where the iPart or iAssembly is located
and click Open.
In the dialog box, click the Table tab and select the version.
For Custom iParts, enter designated values. Click in the
graphics window to place the member. Click to continue to
place instances and then right-click and select Done.

Keys tab

Tree tab

Table tab
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part faces and bodies

Topics in this section

Split faces, trim and split solids


Body properties
Combine solid bodies
Move Bodies
Replace part faces
Delete Face
Thicken faces and create offset surfaces
Finishes and decals on part faces
Shape description
Construction surfaces
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Split faces, trim and split solids


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Split face or part

Splits part faces, trims the entire part and removes one of the resulting sides, or
splits a solid into two bodies. Split Face allows faces on both sides of the split to
have draft applied. Also allows selection of 3D curves to split faces.

Note The Trim Solid and Split Solid options are disabled upon selection of 3D
curve as a split tool.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Split

Method

Select

Faces

Remove
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Body properties
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Surface body properties


Name: Displays the names of the selected bodies.

Body Color Style: Select the dropdown list to assign a unique color to the
selected bodies.

Strip Overrides: Select the check box to remove color overrides from individual
faces contained in the selection. Clear the check box to leave individual color
overrides intact.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Combine solid bodies


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Combine solid bodies

Joins one or more solid bodies by combining their volume. A join adds the volume
of the toolbodies to the base. A cut removes the volume of the toolbodies from
the base. Intersect modifies the base solid from the shared volume of the
selected bodies.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Combine

Select

Operation
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Move Bodies
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Moving bodies
Spatially moves solid bodies any direction in a multi-body part file. The bodies
may be imported derived components, or part bodies created using normal
modeling commands.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Move Bodies

Move type Selects Free Drag, Move along


ray, or Rotate function.

Bodies Selects the individual part bodies to


move.
Free Drag Enter the precise X, Y, or Z offset value.
Activate a value entry box and then select
the move preview to free drag the selection.
Move along ray Enter the linear offset value. Activate the
value entry box and then select the move
preview to free drag the selection.

Direction
Specifies the edge or axis to define the linear
move direction.

Reverses the positive drag direction.


Rotate Enter the precise rotational value. Activate
the value entry box and then select the
rotational preview to free drag the selection.

Rotate Axis Specifies the rotational edge or axis.


Reverses the positive rotation direction.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Replace part faces


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Replace faces
Replaces one or more part faces with a different face. The part must completely
intersect the new face.
Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Replace Face

Existing Faces Selects a single face, set of adjacent faces, or set


of nonadjacent faces to replace.
New Faces Selects a surface, a quilt, or one or more work
planes to replace existing faces. The part extends
to intersect the new faces. If necessary, the new
face is trimmed to match the part face.
Automatic Face Automatically selects all faces that are
Chain continuously tangent to the selected face. Clear
the check box to select individual faces.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Delete Face
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Delete face or lump


Deletes a part face, lump, or void and automatically converts the part to a
surface. The operation replaces the part icon with a surface icon and adds a
Delete Face feature icon in the browser hierarchy.
Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Delete Face

Faces Selects one or more faces to delete, depending


on selection of individual face or lump.
Select Specifies that one or more individual faces are to
individual face be deleted.
Select lump Specifies all faces of the lump are to be deleted.
Heal When individual faces are deleted, attempts to
heal gaps by extending adjacent faces until they
intersect. Not available for a lump.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Thicken faces and create offset


surfaces
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Thicken faces and offset surfaces


Adds or removes thickness to faces of a part or a quilt, creates an offset surface
from a part face or surface, or creates a new solid.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Thicken/Offset

Thicken/Offset tab

More tab
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Finishes and decals on part faces


Concept Procedure

Emboss a part face

Change a face color

Use decals on part faces


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces >

Finishes on part faces


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Face color

Specifies the color of selected part faces. Overrides


the part color and, if applicable, the feature color for
selected faces.

Access: Click one or more faces in the graphics window, right-click, and
then select Properties.

Face Color Style Sets color for the selected face. Click the down
arrow to list available colors.
Changed face color overrides only the base color
of features with an applied texture.
In an assembly with multiple instances of a part,
all instances update with a changed face color.
In a feature pattern, the face color is applied only
to the selected instance, not all instances of the
feature.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces >

Creating and using decals


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Decal
Creates a decal feature by applying an image to a part face to represent
manufacturing requirements such as labels, brand name art, logos, and warranty
seals. The decal may be applied in a recessed area to provide clearance for
another component in an assembly or to prevent damage in packaging.

Images can be bitmaps, Word documents, or Excel spreadsheets.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Decal


Image Selects an image in .bmp, .doc, or .xls format. In
.doc and .xls files, the printable area is selected
and retains its native formatting. Image may be
resized but retains its aspect ratio.
Use dimensions and constraints to position the
image on the sketch.
Face Selects a face on which to apply the decal.
Wrap to Face Specifies if the image is wrapped on one or more
curved faces. Clear the check box to project the
image onto one or more faces without wrapping.
Chain Faces Applies the decal to adjacent faces, such as over
an edge.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Shape description
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extend surface
Makes surfaces larger in one or more directions by specifying a distance or a
termination plane.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Extend

Edges selects and highlights each face edge of a


single surface or quilt for extension.
Note If the boundary of a selected face has additional
edges on update, those edges are not automatically
added to the extend feature.
Edge Chain Automatically extends a selected edge to include all
edges that are tangent continuous to the selected
edge. Edge chaining stops when an edge that is not
tangent continuous to the selected edge is detected.
Extents Determines the method for ending the extension and
sets its depth. Click the arrow to select an extent
method from the list.
Distance default method. Extends edges at a
specified distance. Enter a value or drag the direction
arrow to extend the surface dynamically.
To selects an ending face (of a solid or surface body)
or work plane on which to terminate the extension.

Optionally, once the termination face is selected,


clear the check box to terminate to the entire body
rather than just the selected face.

(More)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies >

Construction surfaces
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Stitch surfaces (Part environment)


Stitches surfaces together to form a quilt or solid. Surface edges must be
adjacent to stitch successfully. The stitch command has a tolerance control that
provides an upper limit and helps Autodesk Inventor determine the proper edges
to be used for stitching.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Stitch

Selects parametric surfaces to stitch together into a quilt or solid body. Also
used to analyze whether surfaces are suitable for stitching. Creates a stitch
feature that can be edited later.
Stitch tab Surfaces. Selects individual or all surfaces to stitch together
into a quilt or analyze. Surfaces are highlighted in the graphics
window as they are selected.

Maximum Tolerance. Select or enter a value for the


maximum allowable tolerance between free edges.

Find Remaining Free Edges. Displays the free edges that


remain after stitching and the maximum gap between them.
Select a row item and right-click on it to display the
context menu.
Select Find in Window, to zoom in on the edge.
Select Set as Tolerance, to quickly change the
maximum tolerance used in stitching.
Free edge pairs display the value of the maximum
gap between them.
Free edge pairs which partially exceed the maximum
tolerance, display the minimum gap in Red (meaning
that the gap is within tolerance but not fixed).
Free edges without pairs display no gap value.
Maintain as surface. If not selected, a stitched surface with a
valid closed volume is solidified. If selected, the stitched
surface remains a surface.
surface remains a surface.
Analyze Analyzes selected surfaces and marks surface edges with
tab condition to indicate suitability for stitching into a quilt.
Identifies surfaces that have gaps or tolerance errors.

Show Edge Conditions. When checked, this option identifies


surface edges by color to show results of analysis.
Black edges are stitched to an adjacent surface.
Red edges are free edges on a surface, and are not
stitched to an adjacent surface.

Show Near Tangent. When checked, this option shows near


tangent conditions.
Magenta edges have some discontinuity to the
adjacent surface (are nearly tangent). These edges
can cause failures in subsequent design operations
such as creating a shell.
Note This option has an impact on performance.

Maintain Select to maintain closed volume as surfaces. If not selected, a


as surface closed volume that results from the stitch operation becomes a
solid.
Apply Stitches selected surfaces into a quilt.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Solid modeling

Topics in this section

Solid modeling environment


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Solid modeling >

Solid modeling environment


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extend or contract body

In the solids environment, extends or contracts a base solid along an axis.


The base solid is resized perpendicular to a selected plane. Extending or
contracting a base solid does not add a new feature.

Access: Right-click the component in the browser, and select Edit Solid
to activate the solids environment. Then click Edit Base Solid

tab Modify panel Extend/Contract Body.

Plane

Extend or Contract

Distance
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Part Analysis

Topics in this section

Analyses
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part Analysis >

Analyses
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Cross Section Analysis


Provides basic or detailed information about the interior of solid parts, and
analyzes whether the part exceeds the maximum wall thickness or is less than
the minimum wall thickness. A corresponding set of cross section graphics is
displayed in the graphics window.

Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab Analysis panel Section

Sets or modifies the name of the analysis. The first saved


analysis is named CrossSection1 by default.

Simple provides a cutaway view of the part at a single


section plane, similar to Slice Graphics in 2D sketches.

Advanced provides more detailed information about any


number of section planes, including wall thickness analysis
and area physical property calculations.

Simple

Advanced

Note If the referenced section plane or planes are moved in a future


computation, the analysis updates immediately if it is visible. If it is not visible,
the update occurs the next time the analysis is visible and active.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Construction Environment and


Importing Data

Topics in this section

Overview of the Construction Environment


Import and use IGES data
Import and use STEP data
Quality Check of translated data
Data groups in the construction environment
Surfaces in the construction environment
Boundary patches in the construction environment
Trim boundaries
Stitched surfaces
Copy and Move geometry
Colors on Parts and Surfaces
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Overview of the Construction


Environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Construction environment browser


Use the construction environment browser to display information on imported
data in Autodesk Inventor.

Note To increase system performance in the Part modeling environment, turn off
the construction environment folder to prevent the data from being loaded into
memory.

Access: When surfaces and solids are copied to the construction


environment, the construction environment browser is displayed
in the model browser.

Construction You can check the quality of the data. Using


folder commands on the Construction tab, you can edit and
repair surfaces or solids (non-parametrically) for use
in part modeling.
Group Depending on the import option, generates either a
group for each layer or each group. If the IGES or
STEP data does not have a layer or group attribute,
the data is placed in the default group.
Note If the imported model does not include a
specific data type, an associated subgroup is not
created.
Composites are copied to a Group of the same
name.
Faces and base surfaces are copied to a new Group.
Surfaces Displays the number of surface entities.
Solids Displays the number of solid entities.
Wires Displays the number of wireframe entities.
Diagnostics Displays the number of surfaces or solids found by
the quality check command.
Note By default, Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the
inserted part) to browser file nodes, whereas other CAD systems may apply the
part number property. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor, its
name may differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP
file. To avoid confusion, use Rename Browser Nodes to specify the browser node
naming scheme.

See Assembly Tools for more information about Rename Browser Nodes.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Import and use IGES data


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Import STEP or IGES Options


Specifies the import criteria for imported STEP or IGES files. Specifies the data
types to import and how data are grouped in Autodesk Inventor. A translation
report is generated that includes information on the imported data and its quality,
as well as a list of the parts and assemblies that were created in Autodesk
Inventor.

Access: To translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file, select


Open.
To import into an Autodesk Inventor part file, select Manage
tab Insert panel Import. This workflow is not available for
STEP files.
To place into an Autodesk Inventor assembly, select Assemble
tab Component panel Place.
1. Set the Files of type to IGES or STEP.
2. Select the IGES or STEP file.
3. Click Options.
Note If you choose to translate a file using the Import
command, some import options are not available. Unavailable
options are grayed out.

Save Save Components during Load. Select the check box to


Options save the assembly and part files in Autodesk Inventor
format during the import process. Choose where to save the
components from the drop down menu. If you choose to
Select Save Locations, the Component Destination
Folder and Place Top-level Assembly in Separate
Folder become available. This setting is not available when
the Import command is used.

Component Destination Folder. Sets the location for the


part and assembly files created from the import operation.
If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder is defined in
the Edit Projects panel.
Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder. Select to
save the top-level assembly file to a location different than
the part files. If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder
is defined in the Edit Projects panel.

Note Specify file destinations that are included in the active


project or add the paths to the project to assure that
referenced files resolve when you open a file.
Entity Types Solids. Select to import solid bodies and water tight
to Import stitched shells as individual solid bodies.

Surfaces. Select to import surface bodies. Water tight


stitched shells are imported as solid bodies.

Wires. Select to import wires.

Points. Select to import points.


Data Import Assembly as Single Part. Select to import the
Organization assembly as a single part. Choose from:
Single Composite Feature to import the
assembly as a single composite feature in the part
environment.
Multiple Solid Part to import the assembly as
individual solid bodies in the part environment.

This setting is not available when the Import command is


used.

Create Surfaces As. Select the surface types to create


during the import. Choose from:
Individual Surface Bodies to import each
surface as a single surface body in the part
environment.
Single Composite Feature to import the surfaces
as a single composite in the part environment.
Multiple Composite Features to import the
surfaces as multiple composites in the part
environment. Composites are created for each
level, layer, or group, as defined by the Create
From selection.
Single Construction Group to import the
surfaces as a single group in the construction
environment.
Multiple Construction Groups to import the
surfaces as multiple groups in the construction
environment. Construction groups are created for
each level, layer, or group, as defined by the
Create From selection.

Create From. Specify Levels (Layers) or Groups from which


to create Multiple Composite Features or Multiple
Construction Groups. Available when the Create Surface As
selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple
Construction Groups.

Add Prefix to Group Names. Select to add a prefix to the


source file group names. For example, if the source file has
a group Surfaces1 and you define INV_ as the prefix to add,
the translated group becomes INV_Surfaces1. Available
when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite
Features or Multiple Construction Groups.

Group Name to Place Data. Select a Group Name under


which to place the imported data. The group name is shown
in the browser.

Import Multiple Solid Parts as Assembly. Select to


separate a multi-solid part into individual solid bodies. Each
body is an individual part in an assembly.
Units Import Units. Converts the imported geometry and
parameter values to the selected units.
Post Check Parts during Load. Select to perform a quality
Processes check of the imported data. If a bad data is found, the
composite is marked with in the browser and the
remaining bodies are not checked.
Note This option may significantly increase the amount of
time required to translate a file.

Auto Stitch and Promote. When selected, Autodesk


Inventor attempts to stitch surfaces into a quilt or solid. If
the surfaces are stitched into a single quilt or body, the
resulting quilt or body is promoted to the Part environment.
Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction
Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction
environment.

Enable Advanced Healing. If selected, slight alterations in


the surface geometry are allowed to stitch the surfaces.

Note By default, Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the
inserted part) to browser file nodes. Other CAD systems might apply the part
number property. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor, its name
might differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. To
avoid confusion, use the Rename Browser Nodes command to specify the browser
node naming scheme.

See Assembly Tools for more information about the Rename Browser Nodes
command.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Import and use STEP data


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Import STEP or IGES Options


Specifies the import criteria for imported STEP or IGES files. Specifies the data
types to import and how data are grouped in Autodesk Inventor. A translation
report is generated that includes information on the imported data and its quality,
as well as a list of the parts and assemblies that were created in Autodesk
Inventor.

Access: To translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file, select


Open.
To import into an Autodesk Inventor part file, select Manage
tab Insert panel Import. This workflow is not available for
STEP files.
To place into an Autodesk Inventor assembly, select Assemble
tab Component panel Place.
1. Set the Files of type to IGES or STEP.
2. Select the IGES or STEP file.
3. Click Options.
Note If you choose to translate a file using the Import
command, some import options are not available. Unavailable
options are grayed out.

Save Save Components during Load. Select the check box to


Options save the assembly and part files in Autodesk Inventor
format during the import process. Choose where to save the
components from the drop down menu. If you choose to
Select Save Locations, the Component Destination
Folder and Place Top-level Assembly in Separate
Folder become available. This setting is not available when
the Import command is used.

Component Destination Folder. Sets the location for the


part and assembly files created from the import operation.
If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder is defined in
the Edit Projects panel.
Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder. Select to
save the top-level assembly file to a location different than
the part files. If Save in Workspace is selected, this folder
is defined in the Edit Projects panel.

Note Specify file destinations that are included in the active


project or add the paths to the project to assure that
referenced files resolve when you open a file.
Entity Types Solids. Select to import solid bodies and water tight
to Import stitched shells as individual solid bodies.

Surfaces. Select to import surface bodies. Water tight


stitched shells are imported as solid bodies.

Wires. Select to import wires.

Points. Select to import points.


Data Import Assembly as Single Part. Select to import the
Organization assembly as a single part. Choose from:
Single Composite Feature to import the
assembly as a single composite feature in the part
environment.
Multiple Solid Part to import the assembly as
individual solid bodies in the part environment.

This setting is not available when the Import command is


used.

Create Surfaces As. Select the surface types to create


during the import. Choose from:
Individual Surface Bodies to import each
surface as a single surface body in the part
environment.
Single Composite Feature to import the surfaces
as a single composite in the part environment.
Multiple Composite Features to import the
surfaces as multiple composites in the part
environment. Composites are created for each
level, layer, or group, as defined by the Create
From selection.
Single Construction Group to import the
surfaces as a single group in the construction
environment.
Multiple Construction Groups to import the
surfaces as multiple groups in the construction
environment. Construction groups are created for
each level, layer, or group, as defined by the
Create From selection.

Create From. Specify Levels (Layers) or Groups from which


to create Multiple Composite Features or Multiple
Construction Groups. Available when the Create Surface As
selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple
Construction Groups.

Add Prefix to Group Names. Select to add a prefix to the


source file group names. For example, if the source file has
a group Surfaces1 and you define INV_ as the prefix to add,
the translated group becomes INV_Surfaces1. Available
when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite
Features or Multiple Construction Groups.

Group Name to Place Data. Select a Group Name under


which to place the imported data. The group name is shown
in the browser.

Import Multiple Solid Parts as Assembly. Select to


separate a multi-solid part into individual solid bodies. Each
body is an individual part in an assembly.
Units Import Units. Converts the imported geometry and
parameter values to the selected units.
Post Check Parts during Load. Select to perform a quality
Processes check of the imported data. If a bad data is found, the
composite is marked with in the browser and the
remaining bodies are not checked.
Note This option may significantly increase the amount of
time required to translate a file.

Auto Stitch and Promote. When selected, Autodesk


Inventor attempts to stitch surfaces into a quilt or solid. If
the surfaces are stitched into a single quilt or body, the
resulting quilt or body is promoted to the Part environment.
Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction
Otherwise, the surfaces remain in the Construction
environment.

Enable Advanced Healing. If selected, slight alterations in


the surface geometry are allowed to stitch the surfaces.

Note By default, Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the
inserted part) to browser file nodes. Other CAD systems might apply the part
number property. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor, its name
might differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. To
avoid confusion, use the Rename Browser Nodes command to specify the browser
node naming scheme.

See Assembly Tools for more information about the Rename Browser Nodes
command.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Quality Check of translated data


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Quality Check
Analyzes translated data and provides diagnostic information. Reports errors
found and suggests repairs. Analyzes data types separately or all at once.
Analysis can be stopped and restarted without repeating examination of already
analyzed data. Right-click a body, surface, or wireframe with an error to locate it
in the graphics window.

Access: In the part browser, double-click the Construction folder to


enter the construction environment. To start, do one of the
following, and then click Examine:
On the ribbon, click Construction tab Manage panel
Quality Check. Select data in the graphics window.
Note "Data" refers to solids and surfaces.
Right-click the construction folder, and select Quality
Check. All data in the construction folder is checked.
Right-click a group node in the browser, and select
Quality Check. Only data in the group node is
checked.
In the graphics window, click and drag a window to
select solids or surfaces. Right-click and select Quality
Check. Selected solids or surfaces are checked.
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Select All
on the context menu.

Known Issues categorizes analyzed data into groups in browser hierarchies:


Topology, Geometry, and Modeling Uncertainty. Wireframes are not checked.
Within each group, error issues are grouped, and bodies with errors are nested in
the groups. Right-click on a body, and select Find in Browser.

Topology Analysis lists bodies or surfaces with topology errors and groups them
by error type.

Topology errors

Geometry Analysis lists bodies or surfaces with geometry errors and groups
them by error type.
Geometry errors

Modeling Uncertainty lists bodies or surfaces with errors, but the system cannot
determine the exact error type.

Problem Diagnosis/Description provides detailed information about a selected


body listed in the Known Issues pane.

Help message summarizes the error or state of the data. Suggests how to repair
the problem data.

Click for more help describes the data error in more detail.

Refit Face selects and repairs problem faces by attempting to refit them, using a
maximum allowable tolerance between faces. Enabled only when the system
detects geometry and modeling uncertainty issues.

Examine starts analysis on the selected data.


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Data groups in the construction


environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Group Properties

Access: In the Construction browser, right-click a node under the


Construction folder, and select Properties.

Sets properties for data in the Construction folder.


Color Accept the default or click the arrow to select a different
Style color style.
Strip For nodes such as groups or subgroups, select the check
overrides box to remove color overrides from individual entities
contained in the node, such as bodies and faces. Clear
the check box to leave individual color overrides intact.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Surfaces in the construction


environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Reverse Normal
Reverse the normal direction of a face or lump in the construction environment.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Reverse Normal

Select individual face


Specifies an individual face to be reversed.

Select lump
Specifies all faces of a lump to be reversed.

Note A temporary arrow is displayed in the graphics screen, showing the current
normal direction. For a closed shell (solid), a green arrow indicates what the
system determines as the proper direction. A red arrow indicates what the system
determines as a backward direction.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Boundary patches in the construction


environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Boundary Patch

Creates a boundary patch feature by generating a planar or 3D surface within the


specified boundary.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Boundary Patch

Boundary Specifies the boundary of the patch. Select a chain of


tangent continuous edges to specify a closed region. Once
the boundary selection represents a closed region, you can
select the next boundary.
Condition Lists the name for the selected edge and the number of
edges in the selection set. It also specifies the edge
condition to apply to each edge of the boundary patch. Click
the arrow to select an edge condition.
Note Because continuous edges must have the same edge
condition, all selected surface edges that are tangent or
continuous with the previous item are merged.
Free Condition (G0)
Tangent (G1)

Note You cannot apply tangent boundary conditions to selected edges that have
two adjacent faces.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Trim boundaries
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extract Loop
Extracts one or more loops by untrimming a surface, leaving the wires intact, and
attempting to repair poor quality trimming curves. When extracted, loops are
changed to wires.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Extract Loop

Loop Select single or multiple loops in the graphics window. The


number of loops selected is displayed.
Delete Select the check box to delete wires after extracting a loop.
Wires It is unselected by default.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Stitched surfaces
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Unstitch
Unstitch selected faces from a body. The unstitched faces are then placed in
folders in the browser, according to data type.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Unstitch

Select

Selects one or more faces to unstitch from a single surface or solid.


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Copy and Move geometry


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Promote wires
Promotes construction environment wire data and moves it to 3D sketches.

Access: In the construction environment under the Construction folder,


select a Wire subgroup node from the browser, then right-click
and select Promote Wires.

Promote Promotes and moves construction environment wire data


Wires to 3D sketches.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data >

Colors on Parts and Surfaces


Concept Procedure

Change color of solids, surfaces, or wires

To enhance the appearance and visibility of solids, surfaces, and wires, you can
change their color. This can be useful in making a feature or body more visible for
communicating design intent.

Change colors in the construction environment

Change colors on parametric surfaces


Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Sheet Metal Parts

Sheet metal design is an extension of the part modeling environment. Unique


template files allow the creation of sheet metal parts with predefined attributes
including: material, bend relief, bend radius, corner relief, gap values, punch
representations and unfolding rules. Sheet metal-specific commands streamline
working on both the folded and unfolded model. Flat patterns rich with
manufacturing information can be created and documented on drawings
containing tables of holes, punches and bends. Flat patterns can be exported to
industry standard formats for CNC manufacturing.

Sheet metal fasteners are available through the Bolted Connection Component
Generator or through Content Center when sheet metal parts are used within
assembly models.

Topics in this section

Templates for sheet metal parts


Sheet Metal Defaults
Sheet Metal Fasteners
Sheet Metal Features
Sheet Metal Flat Patterns
Bend Tables for sheet metal materials
Custom Unfold Equations
Export part and sheet metal faces, flat patterns
Sheet Metal Tips
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Templates for sheet metal parts


Concept Procedure

Create templates for sheet metal parts

Like parts, assemblies, and drawings, all new sheet metal files are created by
Autodesk Inventor using a template. When you use a sheet metal template to
create a part, the Sheet Metal Rule defined in the template is automatically
applied to the new sheet metal part. If you use a part template and then convert
the model to sheet metal, the Material Style defined in the part will override the
Material Style defined in the Sheet Metal Rule of the sheet metal template.

You can create your own sheet metal templates with settings defined as Sheet
Metal rules and add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor

1. Create a sheet metal part, using an existing template.

2. On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal
Defaults.

3. Optionally override the Material Style, Thickness, or Unfolding Rule as


needed.

4. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate


the average sheet metal size.

5. Set any iProperties for the template file that you want to be inherited
by any files created from the template.

6. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a


subfolder of Templates. A sheet metal file automatically becomes a
template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The file sheet metal.ipt in the Templates folder is the default sheet metal
template. To replace the default template, remove sheet metal.ipt and replace it
with a template that has the same name.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Defaults


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet Metal Default


The Sheet Metal Default dialog box specifies material style, thickness, and rules
for the active sheet metal part. The active sheet metal style defines: Unfold,
Bend, and Corner Relief options and alternative flat pattern representations for
punches. While each of these options can be modified (to differ from the active
style) when creating or editing a sheet metal feature, the Style and Standard
Editor must be used to edit shared styles.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults

Sheet Metal Rule - drop-down listing of all sheet metal rules. List contains all
sheet metal rules within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and
Standard Editor is set to Local. List contains all sheet metal rules within the
style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to All
Styles. Sheet metal rules contain the selections and values which are used to
define Material Style, Thickness, Bend, Corner, and Flat Pattern options.

Edit Sheet Metal Rule - Provides access to the Sheet


Metal Rule edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor
and allows the selections and values which are used to
define Material Style, Thickness, Bend, Corner and Flat
Pattern options.

Use Thickness from Rule - check box which enables/disables the Thickness
value field.

Thickness - Value field which reflects the thickness. When the Use Thickness
from Rule check box is checked the field is inactive and reports the thickness
specified in the selected Sheet Metal Rule. When the Use Thickness from Rule
check box is not checked, the field is active and allows a thickness value to be
manually input. Fly-out provides ability to obtain thickness value through
Measure, Show Dimensions, List Parameters or by selecting from a list of
recently entered values.

Note If the active part is a sheet metal iPart factory and the iPart table was
created with Thickness as a column in the table the Use Thickness from Rule
check box is disabled on this dialog box.

Material Style - Drop-down listing of all material styles. List contains all materials
within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to
Local. List contains all materials within the style library if the filter setting in the
Style and Standard Editor is set to All Styles.

Edit Material Style - Provides access to the Material edit


panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the
material properties to be edited.

Unfolding Rule - drop-down listing of all sheet metal unfolding rules. List
contains all unfolding rules within the local file if the filter setting in the Style
and Standard Editor is set to Local. List drop-down contains all unfolding rules
within the style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is
set to All Styles. Sheet metal unfolding rules define: linear unfolding method vs.
bend table-driven bends, KFactor values, and bend table tolerance options within
the sheet metal style.

Edit Unfolding Rule - Provides access to the Unfold Rule


edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the
selections and values which are used to define: linear
unfolding method vs. bend table-driven bends, KFactor
values and bend table tolerance options to edit.

OK - Click to accept all style changes made and dismiss the dialog box.

Cancel - Click to close the dialog box and ignore any changes that were made
while the dialog box was open.

Apply - Click to apply any style changes that were made while keeping the dialog
box open for further changes.

Note Any changes that are made to a style from the style library must be saved
to the style library if they are to be available to other users of that style.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Fasteners


Concept Procedure

Use Sheet Metal Fasteners in Assemblies

From within an assembly which contains sheet metal


components, you can add sheet metal fasteners using
one of two methods:

Use sheet metal fasteners in a bolted connection

Place sheet metal fasteners from content center

Note If you do not see a PEM category in your list of component categories in
Content Center, you may need to configure your Project file by adding the
Inventor PEM library. Additional information on setting up and using the Content
Center can be found here.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Features


Concept Procedure

Add bends to sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal contour flanges

Bend Edit

Reset All Bends

Corner Edit

Reset All Corners

Create Contour Roll as Base Feature

Create Contour Roll

Mirror and Pattern a Contour Roll

Add Unfold features to a Contour Roll

Add corner chamfers to sheet metal faces

Add corner rounds to sheet metal faces

Add corner seams between sheet metal faces

Rip Corner Seams on Converted Part Edges

Create cuts in sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal flanges

Create symmetrical flanges

Bend Edit

Reset All Bends

Corner Edit

Reset All Corners


Fold sheet metal faces

Hem sheet metal faces

Create Lofted Flange for Die Formed Output

Create Lofted Flange for Press Brake Output

Bend Zone Edit

Bend Edit

Punch shapes into sheet metal faces

Create sheet metal Punch tools

Create a single point Rip

Create a point to point Rip

Create a face extents Rip

Unfold Sheet Metal Features

Unfold Rolled Sheet Metal Features

Unfold Sketch with Sheet Metal Feature

Refold Sheet Metal Features

Refold Rolled Sheet Metal Features

Refold Sketch with Sheet Metal Feature


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Bends
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bend Extension

Determines how bends extend material between edges


of participating faces.

Access:
Located on the Shape tab of the: Face, Bend, and Contour
Flange sheet metal feature dialog boxes.

Extend Bend Extends material along the faces on the side of


Aligned to Side the edges connected by the bend instead of
Faces perpendicularly to the bend axis. Useful when
side edges of face are not perpendicular. In the
following images, the same bend is created using
each option. The first image shows the bend
extension aligned to the side face. Note the area
of the flat pattern on either side of the bend
zone.
Extend Bend Extends material perpendicularly to the side face.
Perpendicular This option is the default when the dialog box is
to Side Faces initialized. The image following image shows the
same bend as in the previous illustration created
using the bend extension perpendicular to the
side face. Note the area of the flat pattern on
either side of the bend zone and compare with
the same area on the flat pattern shown
previously.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Contour Flanges
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Corner Edit

Use the Corner Seam Edit glyph to select a single


corner to edit from among a group of corners that are
being created as part of a multi-edge flange or contour
flange feature (during the feature preview) or following
selecting Edit Corners from the context menu of a
previously created flange or contour flange feature.

Access: Click the Corner Seam Edit glyph in the graphics window
over the corner you wish to modify.

Overlap

Relief
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Contour Roll
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal contour roll

Creates a rolled sheet metal feature from an open profile.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Contour Roll

Shape

Used to select profile geometry.

Used to select rotation axis. Note -


Rotation axis geometry must be contained
within the sketch containing the profile
geometry.

Flip Side - Click to offset the material


thickness to the other side of the selected
profile.
Flip Side - Click to offset the material
thickness to the other side of the selected
profile.

Both Sides - Click to offset the material


thickness equally to both sides of the
selected profile.

Rolled Angle

Rolled Angle Data entry field. Allows the value of the


angular sweep of the rolled section to be
input. Defaults to 90 degrees. Note -
angle value may not equal 360 degrees
for multi-segment profiles. A Rolled Angle
value of 360 degrees can be used for
profiles with a single, straight line.

When active, click to sweep the Contour


Roll in the direction opposite of the
previewed direction.

When active, click to sweep the Contour


Roll in the direction opposite of the
previewed direction.

Click to sweep the Contour Roll equally


both clockwise and counter-clockwise from
the selected profile.

Unfolding Unrolling

Unroll Method Drop-down selection list allowing the


selection of the method used to unroll the
selection of the method used to unroll the
Contour Roll feature. These methods all
derive a Developed Length by
multiplying the Rolled Angle by a
Neutral Radius. They differ by the type
of input provided:
1. Centroid Cylinder - The default
method: an axis parallel to the
revolute axis is passed through
the evaluated Centroid location
providing input to define a
neutral cylindrical surface.
2. Custom Cylinder - Allows
selection of a sketched line
which defines the surface of
the cylindrical neutral surface.
3. Developed Length - Allows
entry of an explicit value which
drives the developed length of
the flattened rolled segment.
4. Neutral Radius - Allows a
parametrically determined
value for the neutral radius
(when multi-segment profiles
are considered).
5. KFactor - Method used for
single-segment linear profiles.
Unfold Rule Drop-down selection list allowing the
selection of an Unfold Rule that differs
from the Unfold Rule specified in the
active Sheet Metal Rule.
Neutral Radius Informational display. Displays the value
of the neutral radius used when deriving a
developed length using a rolled angle.
Unrolled Length Informational display. Displays the length
value of the unrolled Contour Roll feature.

Bend Radius Data entry field. Allows input of the value


of the bend radius. Defaults to the system
parameter: BendRadius.
Note This data entry field is disabled when
a single, linear profile is selected.
Help Click to open the Help page.
Preview Click the check box to enable or disable
the preview display of the Contour Roll
before creation.
OK Click OK to accept the input, create the
Contour Roll and dismiss the dialog box.
Cancel Click Cancel to reject any input and
dismiss the dialog box.
Apply Click Apply to accept the input, create the
Contour Roll. The dialog box remains
displayed allowing additional Contour Roll
creation.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Corner Chamfers
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal corner chamfers

Adds a chamfer on one or more sheet metal corners.


You specify the corner appearance and select corners
individually. All chamfers created in a single operation
are one feature.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Corner Chamfer

Method

Corners and Edges

Distance and Angle


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Corner Rounds
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Corner round feature

Adds fillets or rounds to one or more corners of a


sheet metal part. You can create fillets or rounds of
different sizes in a single operation. All fillets and
rounds created in a single operation are one feature.

Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Corner Round

Corner Defines a set of sheet metal corners for fillets or


rounds. Click to add a new set.
Radius Specifies the radius for a selected set of corners.
Click to change a radius, and then enter a new
value.
Select Changes the method for adding or removing
Mode corners from a corner set.
Corner selects or removes single corners.
Feature selects or removes all corners of a
feature, except the corners that result from
intersections between the feature and other
sheet metal faces.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Corner Seams
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal corner options


Overrides default parameters that define how corners are relieved when a folded
model is unfolded. Change these parameters for individual features using the
Corner Options tab. The Default settings are specified in the Sheet Metal Styles
dialog box.

Access:
Click the Corner tab on the Contour Flange, Flange, or Corner
Seam dialog box.
Note Not all options described are available or valid for each
feature that shares this tab.

Use this option to define the Default corner relief when two bends intersect.

Round A corner relief shape defined in the


flat by a circular cut out centered on the
intersection of the bend lines.

Square A corner relief shape defined in the


flat by a square cut out centered on the
intersection of the bend lines.
Tear A corner relief shape defined in the flat
by extending the flange edges to their
intersection. Characterized by no relief which
allows material failure (tearing) across the
bend zone in the folded model.

Trim to Bend A corner relief shape defined


in the flat by a polygonal cut out bounded by
the bending zone lines.

Linear Weld A corner relief shape defined in


the flat by a V-shaped cut out defined from
the intersection of the inner bend zone lines
to the outer bend zone intersection of the
line with the flange edges. Characterized by
minimum relief allowing a subsequent weld
operation to close the corner.
Arc Weld A corner relief shape defined in
the flat by curves tangent to the flange
edges along the outside edge of the bend
zone which converge to a flat gap equal to
the Miter Gap value. Characterized in the
folded model by a gap between the flanges
that is equidistant along the length of the
relief suitable for subsequent arc welding.

Use this option to define the Default corner relief to display in the flat pattern
when three bends intersect.
Note The folded model does not display the selected relief option.

No Replacement As indicated, no
replacement of the "as modeled" geometry is
made in the flat pattern.

Intersection A corner relief shape defined in


the flat by extending and intersecting the
flange edges.

Full Round A corner relief shape defined in


the flat by extending the flange edges to their
intersection and then placing a fillet tangent to
the bend zone tangency lines. Radius are likely
larger than what is produced using the Round
with Radius option.
with Radius option.

Round with Radius A corner relief shape


defined in the flat by extending the flange
edges to their intersection, and then placing a
tangent fillet of the size specified. Radius likely
smaller than what is produced by the Full
Round option.

Relief Size - Allows you to input a value to change the size of the Corner Relief
of the selected feature from the default which is defined in the Sheet Metal Style
using the named parameter: CornerReliefSize.

Apply Auto-Mitering - Enables automatic material extension between adjacent


flange edges during creation or edit of at least two flange edges during a single
operation where bend angle is greater than 90 degrees. Available on Flange and
Contour Flange dialog box (not available on Corner tab of Corner Seam dialog
box)

Enabled - A contour flange loop


applied with the auto-miter
option enabled.

Disabled - A contour flange loop


applied with the auto-miter
option disabled.

Miter Gap - Allows you to input a value to change the size of an automatically
applied gap between flanges when the Auto-Miter option is enabled. When
enabled, the value displayed defaults to the system named parameter: GapSize
which is defined in the Sheet Metal Style.

2 Bend/3 Bend Corner - Indicates which type of corner relief applies to the
selected geometry. These radio buttons are active when a choice must be made
between the type of corner being specified. They are inactive and serve as an
indicator of the type of corner selected at all other times.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Cuts
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal cut

Removes material from a sheet metal face. The shape


of the cut feature is controlled by the sketched profile.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Cut

Shape

Profile Selects a profile to remove material. If there are


multiple profiles and none are selected, click Profile, and
then click one or more profiles. The material to remove is
previewed in the graphics window.

Single profile Automatically selects profile and previews


the cut.

Multiple profiles Position the cursor over the profile and


click to select. To cancel the selection, press Ctrl and click
the profile.
Cut Across Bend - Check to remove material by wrapping the profile across
faces and one or more sheet metal bends. If there are multiple profiles and
none are selected, click Profile and then click one or more profiles. The
material to remove is previewed in the graphics window.

Extents
Extent Type drop-down select field - Allows the selection of the type of
extent:
Distance Default method. Establishes the depth and
direction of the cut. The cut is perpendicular to the
sketch plane.
To Next Cut terminates on the next plane or face.
Selects the direction for the cut.
To Selects an ending face or plane on which to
terminate the cut. You can terminate the cut on the
selected face, or on a face that extends beyond the
termination plane. In an assembly, the face or plane can
be on another part.
From - To Selects beginning and ending faces or planes
on which to terminate the extrusion. In an assembly,
the faces or planes can be on other parts.
All Extrudes the profile through all features and sketches
in the specified direction. Select the direction of the cut
or extrude the cut equally in both directions.
Thickness value field - Allows the thickness of the cut to be specified:

Thickness - Default cut depth is equal to the


Thickness parameter of the sheet metal material and
results in a through cut. When the Cut Across Bend
option is selected the cut is applied to the faces and
bends located under the sketch while the part is in a
flattened state. The cut depth is through the material.

Thickness/"n" - A partial depth cut can be specified by


using the Thickness parameter in an equation. May be
specified as an absolute depth value. Thickness/2
results in a cut that was half the depth of the material
thickness. When the Cut Across Bend option is selected
the cut is applied to the faces and bends located under
the sketch while the part is in a flattened state. The cut
depth is equal to the value specified by the equation.
Measure - Uses the distance defined by two points or an edge for the
thickness of the cut.
Show Dimensions - Displays the dimensions for a selected feature. Uses the
distance determined by a selected dimension as the thickness for the cut.
List Parameters - Displays a list of defined parameters in the file which can
be selected as the thickness for the cut.

Offset

Flips the direction of the cut from the default setting. Useful
when the cut sketch is created on a reference plane.
Results in no material removal when the sketch is created
on a sheet metal face.

The default direction selected. Removes material from the


plane of the selected sketch towards the material thickness
of the part.

Defines the cut sketch as being the mid-plane of the cut


thickness. Can be useful when the cut sketch is created on
an appropriately positioned reference plane.

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a bend using the


parameters and options specified and close the dialog
box.

Cancel Click Cancel to discard any edits made to parameters


or options and close the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Faces
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal unfold options


The default Sheet Metal Unfold rule is set for the part in the Sheet Metal Rule.
The Sheet Metal Unfold rule can be changed for an entire part using Sheet Metal
Defaults on Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults. The Unfold
rule can be overridden for the feature being created by changing the style
selection on this dialog box tab.

Access:
While creating a Sheet Metal feature, click the Unfold Options
tab on the feature creation dialog box.

Unfold Rule - Drop-down selection field that allows the selection of any
previously defined Unfold rule.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Feature Patterns

Sheet metal features behave much the same as solid features in patterns. For
example:

You can create rectangular, circular, and mirror patterns.

Secondary (child) features, such as corner rounds, corner chamfers,


corner seams, and bends, can be patterned only when the parent
feature is included.

For faster computation, use Identical termination instead of Adjust to


Model where possible.

You can suppress one or more individual occurrences of a feature in a


pattern to flow around an irregular shape, for example, but not the
original base feature.

Some special considerations for sheet metal features in patterns include:

Fold features usually extend along an entire edge and may not be good
candidates for patterns.

A sheet metal cut (without the cut across bend option) is like an
extruded cut. You can get different results using the Identical compared
to Adjust to Model termination method.

Cut across bend features pattern results differ depending on the bend
geometry and termination method. Compare results when using Identical
and Adjust to Model methods.

Patterns of multi-edge flanges are not supported.

Only Identical termination method is available for:

Face features, with or without associated bends

Flanges

Contour flanges

Hems

When you are not certain of the results, experiment with termination methods
and the number of pattern instances to determine the best approach.
Show Me how to create a circular pattern of sheet metal features

Show Me how to create an incremental circular pattern


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Flanges
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Corner Edit

Use the Corner Seam Edit glyph to select a single


corner to edit from among a group of corners that are
being created as part of a multi-edge flange or contour
flange feature (during the feature preview) or following
selecting Edit Corners from the context menu of a
previously created flange or contour flange feature.

Access: Click the Corner Seam Edit glyph in the graphics window
over the corner you wish to modify.

Overlap

Relief
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Folds
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal fold

Bends an existing sheet metal face by folding it along


a sketched line that terminates at face edges.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Fold

Shape

Unfold Options

Bend

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a fold using the


parameters and options specified and dismiss the
dialog box.

Cancel Click Cancel to discard any edits made to parameters


or options and close the dialog box.

Apply Click Apply to create a fold using the parameters and


options specified and keep the dialog box displayed
allowing additional contour folds to be created.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Hems
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal hem

Creates a folded hem along sheet metal edges to


strengthen the part, or eliminate sharp edges. You can
create single, double, rolled, and teardrop hems.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Hem

Shape

Unfold Options

Bend

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a hem using the


parameters and options specified and dismiss the
dialog box.

Cancel Click Cancel to disregard any edits made to


parameters or options and dismiss the dialog box.

Apply Click Apply to create a hem using the parameters and


options specified and keep the dialog box displayed
allowing additional hems to be created.

(More)
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Lofted Flange
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal bend edit

Allows editing of the bend radius and unfold rule for individual bends within a
selected bend zone of a lofted flange.

Access:

Select Edit Bends from the context menu of the Bend child-
feature of a Lofted Flange. Within the graphics window, select
the Bend Zone Edit glyph then select an individual Bend Edit
glyph on a specific bend within the bend zone.

Check Box Enables the editing of the Bend Radius field.


Bend Radius Allows input of a value to modify the bend radius of
the selected bend.
Check Box Enables the editing of the Unfold Rule.
Unfold Rule Allows the selection of an alternative Unfold Rule for
the selected bend.
Help Button Click “?” to open this page of the on-line help.
OK Click to apply the modified facet control type and
value to the selected bend zone and close the dialog
box.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Punch Tools
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal punch tool placement reference

Punches a 3D shape into a sheet metal face. At least


one hole center must exist on the selected sheet metal
face. The iFeature designed to be used with the Punch
tool must be a 3D solid based on a sketch with a
single hole center.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Punch Tool


Then, select a punch in the Punch Tool Directory and click Open
for the Punch Tool dialog box.

Preview

Geometry

Size

Finish - Creates the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature on the face of the part.

Cancel - Discards all input and closes the Punch Tool dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Rip
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rip definition reference


Dialog box displayed during the creation and edit of Rip features.

Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Rip

Rip Type Drop-down selection list containing the


following selections:
Single Point - Allows the
definition of a Rip feature
through the selection of a face
to e rip and a single sketched
point along an edge of the face.
Point to Point - Allows the
definition of a Rip feature
through the selection of a face
to rip and two sketched points
along edges of the face.
Face Extents - Allows the
definition of a Rip feature by
selection of a model face to
remove.
Gap Value Value entry field. Allows the input of a
gap value. Defaults to value of system
parameter: GapSize.
Note Value entry field available for Single
Point and Point to Point rip types.

Shape

Rip Face - Selection tool used to choose


the model face to which the Rip feature is
applied.

Sketch Point - This selection tool is


labeled Sketch Point when the Rip Type is
labeled Sketch Point when the Rip Type is
Single Point. It is used to choose the
sketch point that definse the location of
the rip.
Start Point - This selection tool is labeled
Start Point when the Rip Type is Point to
Point. It is used to choose the sketch
point that defines the location of the first
point of the rip
Note This selection tool is not visible
when the Rip Type chosen is Face Extents.

End Point - Selection tool used to choose


the end point of the Rip feature when the
Rip Type chosen is Point to Point.
Note This selection tool is not visible
when Rip Type chosen is Single Point or
Face Extents.

Gap Offset Direction (available for Single Point and Point to Point rip types)

Flip Side - When active during the


graphic preview, offsets the Rip gap to
the opposite side of the selected point.

Flip Side - When active during the


graphic preview, offsets the Rip gap to
the opposite side of the selected point.

Both Sides - Offsets the Rip gap to both


sides of the selected point.

Help Opens this page.


OK Accepts the input, create the Rip feature
and dismiss the dialog box.
Cancel Discards any input and closes the dialog
box.
Apply Accepts the input and creates the Rip
feature. The dialog box remains displayed
allowing additional Rip feature creation.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features >

Unfold/Refold Feature Pair


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal unfold/refold reference

The dialog box displayed during either the Unfold and Refold workflow differs only
in the labeling of the functions as either Unfold or Refold. This reference covers
both dialog boxes. The dialog box contains three selection sections, a contextual
illustration, and a set of buttons along the bottom.

Access:

On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel


Unfold
or click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Refold

Unfold or Refold Reference (A)

Use this selection tool to choose the face or reference plane


that to use to define the reference to which bends or rolls are
unfolded or refolded. This reference is labeled A in the
illustration to the right on the dialog box. When entering the
workflow, this tool is active by default.

Unfold or Refold Geometry (B)

Use this selection tool to select individual bend or roll features


to unfold or refold. Geometry that can be selected using this
tool is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog
box. This tool is disabled until a reference is selected.

Use this selection tool to select all bend or roll features to


unfold or refold. Geometry that can be selected using this tool
is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.
is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.
This tool is disabled until a reference is selected.

Sketches (C)

Use this selection tool to select unconsumed sketches to unfold


or refold. Sketch geometry that can be selected using this tool
is labeled C in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.
This tool is disabled until unfold or refold geometry is selected.
Parent is visible - When sketches are unfolded, a copy of the
sketch is created and displayed on the flattened face. The
original sketch (or parent) remains in the folded position. Check
this option to see both the original (folded position) sketch as
well as the unfolded copy of the sketch.

Dialog Image Panel


The Unfold or Refold dialog box displays an image that changes
depending on the available geometry.

Unfold - Flat faces Unfold - No flat faces Refold - Flat faces Refold - No flat faces
present present

Unfold - Contour roll Refold - Contour roll

Enable/disable feature preview - Enable or disable


the preview of the fold or unfold result.

OK Create (or modify) an Unfold or Refold using the


selections specified and dismiss the dialog box.

Cancel Discard any edits made to parameters or options and


dismiss the dialog box.
Apply Create (or modify) an Unfold or Refold using the
selections specified and leave the dialog box displayed
for further interaction.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Flat Patterns


Concept Procedure

Create flat patterns in sheet metal

Export flat patterns

Reorient flat patterns in sheet metal

Switch between folded and flat pattern environments

Review flat pattern extents

Update flat pattern extent

Directed Reorder

Sequential Reorder

Individual Override

Remove all Overrides

Create Flat Pattern Cosmetic Centerline


Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns >

Create Flat Pattern


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Flat pattern extents


Informational dialog reports the length and width of the sheet metal flat pattern.
These values are later available from within the drawing environment through the
Format Text dialog box. You can select the Sheet Metal Properties category type
and subsequently select FLAT PATTERN EXTENTS LENGTH or FLAT PATTERN
EXTENTS WIDTH to obtain these values.

Access:
With the Flat Pattern browser node selected, click Extents.

Width - Displays the width of the flat pattern.

Length - Displays the length of the flat pattern.

Close - Dismisses the dialog box.

Update - Updates the values in the width and length field when a migrated file
has not had the flat pattern width and length values updated. Button is inactive
when the values are up to date.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns >

Bend Order Annotation


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bend Order Edit

Used to edit the Bend Order sequence. Allows input of sequence number override
and allows override value to be unique or duplicate.

Access: Ribbon: Flat Pattern tab Manage panel Bend Order


Annotation, and then click a displayed Bend Order glyph.

Bend Number Check Enables the Bend Number input field.


Box
Bend Number Enter numeric value to override displayed
bend order sequence value.
Unique Number Specifies that the Bend Number is unique
within the bend order sequence.
Enabled when the override is a
number that exists in the
number that exists in the
sequence. When Unique Number
is selected, the remaining
sequence numbers is
incremented.
Disabled and checked if the
override is not in the sequence.
Duplicate Number Specifies that the Bend Number is
duplicated within the bend order
sequence.
Enabled when the override is a
number that exists in the
sequence. When Duplicate
Number is selected, the
remaining sequence numbers is
unaffected.
Disabled and checked if the
override is already in the
sequence and there is more than
one bend with the same
number.
Help Open this page.
OK Accept the input, update the displayed
bend order sequence, and close the dialog
box.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns >

Cosmetic Centerline
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Flat Pattern Cosmetic Centerline

Convert flat pattern sketch line geometry to Cosmetic Centerlines that carry
manufacturing attributes including bend extent lines, bend direction, and bend
angle.

Access: Ribbon: Flat Pattern tab Create panel Cosmetic Centerline

Sketched Bend Lines

Selection tool used to select sketched


lines that are used to create cosmetic
centerlines.

Manufacturing Information

Information Choices include:


Type 1. None - No attribution is
required on the resulting
cosmetic centerlines.
2. Press Brake - The resulting
cosmetic centerlines provide
press brake attributes.
3. Crease - The resulting cosmetic
centerlines represent stiffening
creases.

Change the up/down attribute associated


with the cosmetic centerline.
Check box for Displayed when Information Type is
Bend Angle Crease. Allows a bend angle attribute to
be specified.
Bend Angle Data entry field. Allows input of a bend
angle value.
Check box for Displayed when Information Type is
Radius Crease. Allows the radius attribute to be
specified.
Radius Data entry field. Allows input of a radius
value. Defaults to the Bend Radius
specified in the active sheet metal rule.
Unfold Rule Displayed when Information Type is Press
Brake. Drop-down selection field which
allows selection of existing Unfold Rules.
Allows an Unfold Rule to be associated
with the cosmetic centerline. Defaults to
Default_KFactor.

Help Open this page.


OK Accept the input, create the cosmetic
centerlines, and close the dialog box.
Cancel Discard any input and close the dialog
box.
Apply Accept the input and create the cosmetic
centerlines, but leave the dialog box open
to allow additional cosmetic centerline
creation.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Bend Tables for sheet metal materials


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal bend table example


Note Resize the window as needed to see the entire table.

; Use an ASCII file editor to customize the values to your specific conditions. All
bend radius columns must contain values.

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

; Notations used in tables:

; ';' = remark character

; '*' = start of a new table

; '/' = special character

; U = units of tolerance; thickness; bend radius; and correction values

; m; cm; mm; micron; in; ft; or yd

; S = sheet thickness

; R = bending radii

; A = opening angle

; T1 = Tolerance (+/-) for sheet thickness S (valid for the whole file)

; T2 = tolerance for equal min and max bending radius R


; The T2 tolerance is used at the minimum and maximum

; bending radii R in the tables. For model bend radii that fall

; between two values existing in the table, the resultant

; correction value X is determined by linear interpolation

; using the appropriate x values in the table.

; T3 = tolerance for equal min and max opening angle A

; The T3 tolerance is used at the minimum and maximum

; opening angles A in the tables. For model opening angles

; that fall between two values existing in the table, the

; resultant correction value X is determined by linear

; interpolation using the appropriate X values in the table.

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

; The correction value X is applied as follows:

;L = A+ B-x

; (L = unfolded length in flat pattern)

; (A = length of side A (outside measurement of bending zone))

; (B = length of side B (outside measurement of bending zone))

;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

; Angle A expressed in degrees.

;
;-----------------------------------------------------------------------

;UNITS for tolerance; thickness; bend radius and correction values

/Ucm

;TOLERANCES valid for the whole file

/T10.000100

/T20.010000

/T30.010000

*** TABLE 1

;sheet thickness

/S0.050000

; bending
radii
/R 0.500000 1.000000 1.500000 2.000000
; opening -------------------- correction value x ------------------
angle -
/A 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
/A 5.000000 0.029508 0.026252 0.024359 0.023024
/A 10.000000 0.059349 0.053004 0.049384 0.046881
/A 15.000000 0.089863 0.080765 0.075755 0.072419
/A 20.000000 0.121398 0.110057 0.104168 0.100510
/A 25.000000 0.154319 0.141429 0.135353 0.132067
/A 30.000000 0.189014 0.175462 0.170086 0.168059
/A 35.000000 0.225899 0.212779 0.209200 0.209526
/A 40.000000 0.265428 0.254063 0.253600 0.257602
/A 45.000000 0.308101 0.300062 0.304289 0.313537
/A 50.000000 0.354475 0.351613 0.362380 0.378726
/A 55.000000 0.405180 0.409660 0.429132 0.454742
/A 60.000000 0.460932 0.475279 0.505980 0.543377
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Custom Unfold Equations


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet metal custom unfold equation bounding conditions edit dialog box
Allows edit of the bounding condition associated with a specific custom unfold
equation.

Access:
When the Unfold Method selected on the Style and Standard
dialog box is Custom Equation, double-click a Bounding
Condition cell on the dialog box.

Top Row

Lower Drop-down selection that includes the equality


Equality operators: less than, less than or equal, equal.
Operator
Range Type Drop-down selection that includes range variables
to define: angle, thickness, radius.
Upper Drop-down selection that includes the equality
Equality operators: less than, less than or equal, equal.
Operator

Bottom Row

Lower Limit Value entry field to define the lower bounding


limit.
Range Indicates range type and equalities. Edit using
Equality drop-down selections in top row.
Upper Limit Value entry field to define the upper bounding
limit.

Help Open this page.


OK Accept the bounding condition and close the
dialog box.
Cancel Discard any edits to the bounding condition and
close the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Export part and sheet metal faces, flat


patterns

With a single model face (or flat pattern) selected,


you can use Export Face As (from the context menu)
to export to several different file formats.

Use Export Face As to export all loops on a single planar face. The command is
available within the part, sheet metal, or assembly environments. The face loops
can be exported to either .dxf or .dwg file format. The loop data is processed
during the publishing routine. All geometry is moved to a location where
coordinates have positive values and the outer profile is converted into a polyline.
This option is helpful for certain types of manufacturing equipment which require
a polyline for direct consumption of .dxf and .dwg data. Export Face As is
available while working on the flat pattern of a sheet metal part to export the
entire flat pattern when the creation of a polyline is required.

In the sheet metal environment, Export Face As is available for both the flat
pattern and the folded part.

Use Save Copy As to export sheet metal flat patterns to .sat, .dxf, and .dwg file
formats. You can export the entire flat pattern by selecting Save Copy As from
the flat pattern browser node context menu while the flat pattern is displayed.
The Save Copy As command is recommended if there is no polyline requirement
for the exported flat pattern. Save Copy As produces the most complete and
accurate representation of the flat pattern. For example, the loops on all faces
are exported; all data are classified and exported to appropriate layers;
countersunk holes show the correct inner diameter, and so on.

Click Options in the Save Copy As dialog box to customize the file version being
exported. For .dxf and .dwg file types, additional options are available to
customize post-process routines using an xml script.

There are two controlling .xml files. FlatPattern.xml is used by the Save Copy As
command when exporting from the flat pattern. FaceLoops.xml is used by the
Export As Face command. Before you export, depending on your particular
workflow requirements, you may want to set up the flat pattern export options in
the relevant .xml file. The .xml files by default are stored in the:

Windows XP: Program Files/Autodesk/Inventor(version)/Design Data/DWG-DXF


folder.

Vista: Users/Public/Documents/Autodesk/Inventor(version)/Design Data/DWG-


DXF folder.
Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts >

Sheet Metal Tips

Sheet metal parts are different from regular parts

Decide how to create sheet metal parts

Create stamped features in a sheet metal part

Use industry standard material styles

Use the Parameters command to change parameter names and values

Plan how to show features in flat patterns

Creating a flat pattern of a rolled part

Features with elliptical or spline profile geometry


Autodesk Inventor >

Assemblies

Topics in this section

Build assemblies
Bills of materials
Representations
Functional design overview
Component Generators
Calculators
Content Center
Build structural frames with Frame Generator
Weldments
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Build assemblies

Topics in this section

Fundamentals
Top-down design
Components
Constraints
Modifications
Features
Productivity Tools
Physical Properties
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Fundamentals

Topics in this section

Assembly modeling environment


Work smart in assemblies
Strategies for productivity in assemblies
Dependencies in assemblies
Templates for assemblies
Assembly browser
Adjust the browser hierarchy
Improve workflow with user-defined folders
Assembly coordinate system
Model in assembly section views
Cross-part sketches in assemblies
Resolve a file search
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly modeling environment


Concept Quick Reference

Assembly tools

Access: Windows XP:


Run Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor
[revision]\SDK\Tools\Users\AssemblyTools\setup.exe. On the
ribbon, click the Assembly Tools tab.
Vista:
Run Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Inventor
[revision]\SDK\Tools\Users\AssemblyTools\setup.exe. On the
ribbon, click the Assembly Tools tab.

Rename Browser Nodes

Add Part

Add Assembly

Save and Replace Component

Ground and Root Component

Component Derive

Place at Component Origin

Alpha Sort Components


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Work smart in assemblies


Concept Procedure

Enhance performance and capacity

Performance and capacity tips

A note on performance and capacity

File migration

Application Options tips

Projects: general best practices

Assembly selection filters and Design View representations

Autodesk Inventor 3 GB feature

Additional capacity tips


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Strategies for productivity in


assemblies

Using Autodesk Inventor, you can manipulate component size and position, see
assemblies in various views, see assemblies with components in different
positions, select components based on certain criteria, and make components
visible or invisible.

Click a link below to learn more about how and when to use these commands. In
each topic, click the Procedure tab to go to a step-by-step procedure.

Move components
Move an unconstrained component, a component and all components
constrained to it, or simulate mechanical motion by driving constraints.

Constrain components automatically


Use iMates to constrain frequently used components together in an
assembly.

Collision and contact


Detect collision when driving constraints and facilitate contact between
components.

Component selection sets


Select a group of components based on specific criteria.

Flexible assemblies
Each flexible assembly instance solves separately, so that each instance
can be in a unique position.

Adaptive components
All instances of an adaptive assembly adapt size and position relative to
constrained objects.

Derived parts and assemblies


Capture design intent using selected sketches, a part, or multiple
assembly components as the base component in a new part or
assembly.

Design View representations


Save multiple Design View representations within an assembly to
preserve different display configurations, including component visibility,
enabled state, and color overrides.

Positional representations
Capture kinematic "snapshots" of assemblies to evaluate various
assembly positions and conduct motion studies. Retrieve later for further
analysis or modification.

Level of Detail representations


Specify which components are loaded into memory. Create several
representations to load different components of the assembly for
different tasks.
Take advantage of the three system-supplied Level of Detail
representations when appropriate. Oftentimes, starting with nothing
loaded (such as All Components Suppressed) and then loading only the
components of interest is more efficient than loading the entire
assembly.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Dependencies in assemblies

The assembly browser is a hierarchical structure that shows component


relationships and dependencies. Component relationships are defined by assembly
constraints that control position and size and determine how adaptive components
change.

How does position in the browser affect component behavior?

What affects component position?

What affects component size?

How are adaptive components controlled?

Can dependencies be derived from equations?


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Templates for assemblies


Concept Procedure

Create templates for assemblies

All new assembly files are created with a template. You can create your own
templates and add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor.

1. Create an assembly, using an existing template.

2. Set the default units of measurement.

3. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate


the average assembly size.

4. Set the properties for the file.

5. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a


subfolder of Templates. An assembly file automatically becomes a
template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The file standard.iam in the Templates folder is the default assembly
template. To replace the default template, remove standard.iam and replace it
with a template that has the same name.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly browser
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Assembly browser
Graphically illustrates assembly hierarchy. Shows and hides selected components,
filters, and arranges contents, manages access to component and constraint
editing, and provides alternate access to functions from the context menu.
Controls assembly feature roll back and participation of components in each
feature.

Access: In an assembly file, click item to select, and then right-click to


display context menu.

Browser filters

Representations

Browser views

Find

Context menu options


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Adjust the browser hierarchy


Concept Procedure

Restructure assemblies

You can move one or more existing components, including component patterns,
within an assembly or from one assembly to another assembly. You must have
read and write privileges to the origin and target assembly files.

A component does not move relative to other components in the graphics window,
even when you change its position in the assembly browser. Constraints between
components that originate from the same parent assembly or subassembly are
retained.

Restructure an assembly by dragging a component

Restructure an assembly using Promote and Demote


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Improve workflow with user-defined


folders
Concept Procedure

Create and use folders

Create browser folders and use them based on your design needs. You can
choose to populate your assembly browser with folders before you have placed a
single component. Then, as you place components and create features, you move
the browser nodes into the appropriate folders. Alternatively, you can completely
design your assembly, then define your folders and move browser nodes into
them. Use these techniques, or a combination thereof, to order and simplify your
assembly browser.

You have two methods available to create your browser folders. You can create
empty folders, or pre-select browser nodes and add them to new folders.

Create new folder

Add to new folder

Select folder items

Edit folders: drag and drop behavior

Delete folder

Tips
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly coordinate system

The assembly coordinate system describes component position in an assembly


along three axes: the X axis (the horizontal reference), the Y axis (the vertical
reference), and the Z axis (the depth reference).

Where is the origin of the assembly coordinate system?

What is the location of the first placed component?

Can a part have an absolute position?


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Model in assembly section views


Concept Procedure

Create assembly section views

Create a section view to visualize portions of an


assembly within chambers or obscured by
components. While the assembly is sectioned,
use part and assembly commands to create or
modify parts in the assembly context.
To begin, open an assembly file containing one or
more components.

1. If appropriate, specify if you want to section standard parts in the

assembly. Click Options Assembly tab. Select the Section


All Parts check box.

2. Set visibility for components. Select the component in the graphics


window or the browser, then:

To hide components, right-click and clear the check mark


beside Visibility.

To show components in wireframe for context, right-click and


clear the check mark beside Enabled.

3. On the View tab, Appearance panel, click one of the Section View
commands, then select any planar or work plane to define the cutting
plane.

Creates Quarter section view.

Creates Half section view.


Creates Three-Quarter section view.

Sets assembly to no section view.


Note From Quarter section and Three-quarter section views, you
can right-click and select the opposite view.

4. Right-click and select Flip, if necessary, to display the desired view of


the section.

5. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. When


prompted to select a sketch plane, select the plane used to define the
section.

6. If desired, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Cut Edges to


project edges of a part cut by the section plane onto the sketch plane.

7. Use sketch and feature commands to create new geometry.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Cross-part sketches in assemblies


Concept Procedure

Break links from referenced sketches

When creating a part in an assembly, you can project edges, loops, and faces
from one part into the sketch of the new part feature. By default, the resulting
geometry is a cross-part sketch.

The Cross Part Geometry Projection option on the Assembly tab of the Application
Options dialog box makes the projected geometry associative to the parent part
by default. If you later want to make the associative part independent of its
parent part in the assembly, you can break the associative link.

To begin, open the assembly containing the part with the link you want to break:

1. In the browser, expand the assembly hierarchy, right-click the part you
want to make independent, and then select Edit.

2. Expand the feature containing the reference sketch. Right-click the


Reference sketch symbol , and then select Break Link. The
Reference sketch symbol is removed from the browser.
The sketch geometry changes from reference geometry to normal
geometry. You can add dimensions and constraints as needed.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Resolve a file search


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Resolve Link
Provides a method to specify the current location of a file that is not found
automatically when you open an Autodesk Inventor assembly.

Access: The Resolve Link dialog box opens if the automatic search for a
referenced file fails when the referencing file is opened. The
automatic search fails to find a file if:

Paths to referenced files are not specified in the active project.

The referenced file or a folder that contained it was renamed, moved, or


deleted, and no longer exists within any of the storage locations defined
by the active project.

The file was moved from one library to another.

The file was moved from one subfolder to another within a storage
location or a library.

The file was moved from one subfolder to another within a storage
location.

Look in Displays the active path. To change the path,


click the arrow and navigate to the desired
folder.
Locations Shows each file location and its subfolders
defined in the project. Click a file location to
make it active. The contents of the location are
listed in the main window of the dialog box. Click
a file to see a preview.
File name The name of the file that is being referenced, or
the file name selected in the main window of the
dialog box.
File of type Filters the file list of files to include only files of a
specific type. Click the arrow to display the list,
and then click to select a file type.
Open Opens the selected file.
Find Opens the Find dialog box so that you can define
searches to find files.
Skip Discontinues search for the specified file. The
assembly, drawing, or presentation opens without
the referenced file.
A skipped file is marked with a red question mark
in the assembly browser and is not shown in the
graphic window. You can select an unresolved file
and delete it or replace it.
Note You cannot create a drawing view or
assembly presentation or open a drawing or
presentation of an assembly with skipped
components.
Skip All Discontinues search for all files with unresolved
links. The assembly opens without the referenced
components.
Unresolved Reference
File Name The name of the referenced component file that
is not found.
Relative Path The subdirectory where files are being searched,
relative to each storage location defined in the
active project.
Library Name The name of the library from which the searched
component is referenced. Available only if the
missing component is referenced from a library.
File containing The name of the file that is being opened and
the reference that contains the component reference that is not
found.
Library The name of the library where the source file is
found. Available only if the source file is a library.
Cancel Ends the top level Open operation.

(More)
Search for Check to activate the search for other unresolved
other references using the information you enter in the
unresolved Substitution Rule section. Remove the check
references mark if you do not want to search for other
using the unresolved references using the information you
using the unresolved references using the information you
following rule. enter.
Substitution Use this section if you can enter path information
Rule to locate missing components.
Leading portion The portion of the existing referenced relative
of the path to replace to find the missing referenced
Referenced component.
relative Path to
replace
Replacement Enter the path to a location where the missing
Path referenced component can be found.
Replacement Enter the name of the library where the missing
Library referenced library component can be found.
Available only if the missing component is
referenced from a library.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Top-down design

Topics in this section

Top-down, bottom-up, middle-out design


Layout
Sketch blocks in layouts
Make part and make components
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Top-down, bottom-up, middle-out


design
Concept Procedure

Skeletal Modeling

Skeletal Modeling (a type of Top-down Design) is a technique that facilitates


centralized design criteria and creates components that reference those criteria.
Although many variations of this technique exist, the basic workflows are as
follows.

Note Use the common origin workflow to derive shape and position to your new
components. Use the position independent workflow to derive shape only. With
position independent components, changes to the position of sketch geometry in
your layout do not require component revisions. Also use the position independent
workflow with sketch blocks to create kinematic layouts; Make Components
translates sketch constraints to equivalent assembly constraints to achieve the
kinematic behavior.

Common origin

Position independent
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Layout
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Make layout
Creates a layout part in an assembly.

Access:

Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Make Layout

New Input name of your new part file.


Layout
Name
Template Select or browse to the part template from which the
new file is created.
New File Input or browse to the save location for the new file.
Location
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Sketch blocks in layouts

Use sketch blocks in your layout to represent components. Once a sketch block is
created, you can easily add instances of the block to your layout. For components
used in multiple locations, it provides a quick, associative method for adding them
to the design. Any changes to the block definition are propagated to all block
instances.

A powerful use of sketch blocks is the creation of flexible, nested blocks. This type
of block allows you to simulate assembly and subassembly kinematics in your
layout. You can evaluate your design and change the design before you make
components. You can also evaluate the impact of any changes in your design. If
changes to the sketch block definition are made, the block instances are updated.

Note Sketch blocks can be constrained to other sketch blocks, as well as


projected and primitive geometry. However, only sketch constraints between
blocks are translated during the Make Components workflow.

Learn more about sketch blocks.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Make part and make components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Make part
Creates a part file and derives the selected objects from the source part into the
new part.

Access:

Ribbon: Manage tab Layout panel Make Part


Ribbon: Sketch tab Layout panel Make Part

Derive Derives a single, merged body without seams


style between planar faces.

Derives a single solid body with seams between


planar faces.
Individual component colors of planar faces are
preserved.

Derives a single part that retains each component as


an individual solid body. For example, an assembly with
20 parts derives to a part with 20 solid bodies.

Derives a single composite surface feature. The


composite retains the seams between planar faces and
preserves unique part colors.

Status Includes the selected objects in the derive operation.

Some child objects are included and some excluded.

Excludes the selected objects from the derive


operation.
Part Part name. Enter the name of your new part.
information
Template. Select or browse to the part template from
which the new part is created.

New file location. Enter or browse to the location


where the new part is saved. Use to select a part that
exists, if appropriate.

Default BOM structure. Select the bill of materials


structure for the new part.
Place part Select to place the new part into an assembly. If this
in target option is selected, the Make Part process will:
assembly Create a target assembly and insert your new
part. The part is grounded at the assembly
origin.
Open the target assembly as the active
window. The new part and target assembly are
not automatically saved to disk. You save both
when the target assembly is saved.
If this option is cleared, the Make Part process will:
Create a part file.
Open the part file as the active window. The
part file is not automatically saved. Save the
new file.
Assembly Target assembly name. Enter the name of your new
information assembly.

Template. Select or browse to the assembly template


from which the new assembly is created.

New file location. Enter or browse to the location


where the new assembly is saved. Use to select an
assembly that exists, if appropriate.

Default BOM structure. Select the bill of materials


structure for the new assembly.
Show all Select to show all derivable objects regardless of their
objects Export status.
Scale Select or enter a scale factor to apply to the derived
factor objects. The default value is 1.0.
Note Selected sketch block definitions and their
instances are scaled. The scale factor is appended to the
block name to indicate the block was scaled.
Mirror Select to mirror the assembly. Specify the XY, XZ, or YZ
assembly origin work plane as the mirror plane.
Note Sketch block instances of selected block definitions
are mirrored. However, the block definitions are not
mirrored.
OK Click OK to execute Make Part and close the dialog box.
The target part and target assembly are not saved to
disk. You save both when the target assembly is closed.
Apply Click Apply to execute Make Part and keep open the
dialog box. The target part and target assembly are
saved to disk but neither are opened. The source part
window remains open and the Make Part command
remains active so you can continue to select different
objects and create more parts.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Components

Topics in this section

Assembly components
Choose the first assembly component
Place components in assemblies
Adjust visibility of components
Create parts in assemblies
iAssemblies
iAssembly auto-capture
Assembly components in patterns
Copied assembly components
Mirrored assembly components
Occurrence properties in components
Use colors to distinguish components
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Assembly components
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Place or Replace Component


Specifies one or more files to place as a component in an assembly.

Note You can open multiple files that are in sequence by holding down the SHIFT
key. You can also select multiple files that are not in sequence by holding down
the CTRL key.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel


Place
In an assembly file, right-click an assembly in
the browser and select Component Replace
Component.
Quick Launch If you have Vault installed and are placing (or
replacing) a file in the vault, click Open from
Vault located under Quick Launch for immediate
access to your vaulted files.
Look in Shows path of the active directory.
File list The main window shows a list of the subfolders
and files in the selected path. Double-click a
subfolder to show the files it contains, or click a
file to select it. You can also double-click the file
to open it.
File name Specifies the file to open, enter a file name, or
select a file from the listed files.
Files of type Filters file list to include only files of a specific
type. Click the arrow to show list, and then
highlight to select a file type.
Project File Displays the active project.
Open Places the selected file into the active assembly.
Cancel Cancels the file open operation and closes the
dialog box.
Find Opens the Find Files dialog box so you can
search for files based on file properties.
search for files based on file properties.
Options Opens an options dialog box so that you can set
the options for the selected file.
Interactively Inserts components with matching iMates in an
place with assembly. You can place multiple instances of the
iMates component. When placing members of an iPart or
iAssembly factory, iMates are matched according
to how they are specified in the factory. One
member may include iMates with no offset value,
while another can be offset a specified amount.
Automatically Inserts component and simultaneously solves all
generate iMates accepted iMate matches. Terminates command
on place after each insertion.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Choose the first assembly component


Concept Procedure

Place the first assembly component

To begin creating an assembly, choose a fundamental part or subassembly such


as a frame or base plate as the first component. When the first component is
placed in the assembly, its origin is coincident and aligned with the assembly
coordinate origin. All degrees of freedom are removed from the first component.

1. To create a file, on the Quick Access toolbar, click


New, select an assembly template, and click OK.
2. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component
panel Place to place the first component.
3. Go to the folder that contains the component, select
the component, and click Open. Alternately, if Vault
is installed and you open a file in the vault, click
Open from Vault located under Quick Launch for
immediate access to your vaulted files.
4. Click to continue placing occurrences of the
component as needed, right-click, and then select
Done.

If you must relocate the grounded component, use one of the following methods.

To restore degrees of freedom to the component

To enter precise displacement coordinates


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Place components in assemblies


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Create in-place component

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Create

New Specifies file name for the new component.


Component
Name
Template Sets the template used to create the file. Click
the button next to the Template list box to
display the Open Template dialog box.
New File Sets the location of the new file. To find the part
Location when the assembly is opened, specify its
directory by a path in the project used for the
assembly.
Default BOM Sets the default BOM structure for the
Structure component.
Note You can override the structure to be
Reference at the component instance level.
Virtual Select the check box to create a virtual
Component component.
Note A virtual component is a component that
requires no modeling of geometry and no file.
Constrain By default, a mate constraint is created between
sketch plane to the selected part face and the sketch plane. If
selected face you prefer, clear the check box to prevent the
automatic constraint. The option is not available
if the new component is the first one in the
assembly.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Adjust visibility of components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Component visibility and enabled status


Sets component visibility in graphics on or off and sets component enabled status
(selectability) on or off. Visibility status determines whether a component
occurrence appears in the graphics window. The component is still loaded into
memory. Enabled status determines whether a component occurrence can be
selected. The component appears in the graphics window according to the Enabled
layout settings in the Application Options, Display tab. By default, the component
appears semi-transparent.

Adjust the visibility or enabled status from either the context menu or the
Properties dialog box, Occurrence tab.

Access: Select the component, right-click, and select either Visibility or


Enabled.

Visible and enabled components can be selected in the


graphics window.

Invisible components are not visible for selection in the


graphics window. Select an invisible component from the
browser, and then right-click to change its status. Double-click
an invisible component in the browser to edit it, and the status
changes to visible automatically.

Visible but not enabled components cannot be selected in the


graphics window. They are displayed in background style.

Show Me

Note It is possible to turn off component visibility but have the component still be
enabled. This technique is useful for quickly removing a needed component from
view. Enabled components are loaded in an assembly file, while only the graphic
portion of not enabled components are loaded. The assembly calculates faster
because the data structure of not enabled components is not present, but its
graphics are useful for a frame of reference.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Create parts in assemblies


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Multiple components with older versions


When you save a file or first edit a component, a message warns you that
someone has edited a file while you had it open.

Access: Save or edit an assembly, drawing, or presentation file that


contains reserved components

OK Replaces changes made to the file by the other person.


More Click to show list of components, the name of the
person who changed it, and the date it changed.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

iAssemblies
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

iAssembly Author

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Create iAssembly

Author overview

iAssembly tabs
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

iAssembly auto-capture

When editing an iPart or iAssembly factory, you can use conventional modeling
commands to make edits that affect the table. This technique efficiently creates a
factory without requiring the table editor or Excel to make modifications.

Use the Edit Scope selector to switch the modeling scope between Edit Member
(the active row) and Edit Factory (all rows).

For Edit Member Scope, model edits that can be configured modify the active row
of the table. If a column for a modified item is not yet in the table, it is created,
with the new value set for the active row and the original value set for all other
rows. If the item is already configured in the table, the modification only changes
the cell in the current row. Other members are not updated with the change.

For Edit Factory Scope, edits to items that are already configured adjust all cells
in the column to match the new value. New columns are not created for
modifications to items that are not already in the table.

Note Use caution when applying a global change to all factory members. You
could inadvertently change a required value that works in the current member but
causes errors in another member.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Assembly components in patterns


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Pattern components

Duplicates one or
more components
and arranges the
resulting occurrences
in a circular or
rectangular pattern.
Rectangular and
circular patterns can
use patterned
features on a part to
set number and
spacing.

Patterns may be made associative to a part feature pattern so that changes to


the pattern add to or subtract components in the assembly pattern. Individual or
all occurrences can have visibility turned on or off.

Constraints or iMates are retained whenever possible if they are included in a


pattern.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Pattern

Component

Associative tab

Rectangular tab

Circular tab
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Copied assembly components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Copy Components: Status


The Copy command creates copies of the selected components. You can copy,
create an instance of, or exclude the components that you select in the Copy
Components: Status dialog box.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Copy

The Copy command has two dialog boxes:

Copy Components: Status, which enables you to select components


and set copy status.

Copy Components: File Name, which enables you to designate the file
name. For more information about the File Names dialog box, see the
Mirror/Copy Components: File Names reference.
You can switch between the two dialog boxes.

The Copy Components: Status dialog box contains these elements:

Components Select the components in the graphics window or the


browser to include all child components in the copy
operation. If the copy status of the parent changes, all
children are reset to the same status automatically.

Status Provides the following command buttons, enabling you


commands to change the status on multiple selected components
at the same time.

Creates a copy of the component. Each copied


component is saved in a new file, which is not
associative to the source file.

Creates an instance of the component.

Excludes the component from the copy


operation.

Status symbols Indicates the status of components selected for copy,


creation of a new instance, or exclusion. In addition to
Status symbols
creation of a new instance, or exclusion. In addition to
using the status command buttons at the top of the
dialog box, click an individual symbol to change its
status.

Indicates that a subassembly contains


components with different statuses.
Reuse Standard Restricts library components and iParts from being
Content and copied. Instances of library parts and iParts are created
Factory Parts instead and are resident in the current assembly file.
Next Opens the Copy Components: File Names dialog box.
For more information about Copy Components: File
Names, see the Mirror/Copy Components: File Names
reference.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Mirrored assembly components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Mirror/Copy Components: File Names


The Mirror Components: File Names, or Copy Components: File Names dialog box
specifies names for part and assembly files created with the Mirror or Copy
command.

Access: Mirrored Components: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component

panel Mirror
When the components to mirror are selected, click Next in the
Mirror Components dialog box to open the Mirror Components:
File Names dialog box.
Copied Components: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component

panel Copy
When the components to copy are selected, click OK in the
Copy Components dialog box to open the Copy Components:
File Names dialog box.

Name Lists all components created by the mirror (or copy)


operation. Repeated components are shown only once.
New Name Lists names of new files. Click a name to edit. Right-click in
the New Name column, and select Find to search in listed file
names, or select Replace to find and replace a string in listed
file names.
If a name exists, new file names are enumerated sequentially
until a unique name is defined.
File Specifies where the new file is saved. Source Path is the
Location default and means that the file is saved at the same location
as the original component. Right-click to change the setting
to Workspace or User Path. To specify the User Path, click
the file location, and then type the path or browse for the
desired folder.
Status Indicates if the new file name is valid. Names created
automatically have a white background, manually renamed
files have a yellow background, and name conflicts are shown
files have a yellow background, and name conflicts are shown
with a red background.
New File Indicates the new file name is valid, and does
not exist in the file location.
Reuse Indicates that the file name is already used in
Existing the file location, but is a valid name for the
selected components. Assembly components
can be reused, however the entire assembly
must be like the source assembly. Reusing
parts has no restrictions.
Name Indicates that the file name exists in the file
Conflict location (for assemblies) or that there is
another instance of the same source assembly
with the same name.
Naming Renames selected components in the Name column with a
Scheme specified Prefix or Suffix (the default suffix is _MIR for
mirrored components and _CPY for copied components) after
you click Apply. Select Increment to name numbered files
incrementally. If you previously manually changed a name, it
is overwritten. Click Revert to return to previous version of
name.
Component Specifies the destination of the mirrored or copied
Destination components.
Insert in The default option places all new components
Assembly as peer objects in the top-level assembly.
Open in Opens a new window with the new assembly
New containing all mirrored components.
Window
Return to Returns to the Mirror Components dialog box, where you can
Selection select components.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Occurrence properties in components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

iProperties - Occurrence tab


Controls characteristics for an individual occurrence of a component in an
assembly. Specifies whether the component is visible, enabled, adaptive,
grounded, or displays degrees of freedom. Sets occurrence name, color style, and
offset from parent assembly origin.

Access: In the browser, right-click a part or subassembly, select


iProperties, and then click the Occurrence tab.

Name

Properties

Current Offset from Parent Assembly Origin


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Use colors to distinguish components


Concept Procedure

Apply colors to components

All components are displayed in the As Material


color style, but you can use color to make a
complex assembly easier to interpret. For
example, instead of using the color associated
with the material specified for the component,
you can display all components created by one
vendor in one color. Display components from a
different vendor in a second color.

1. Select the component in the browser or the graphics window.

2. On the Quick Access toolbar, click the down arrow on the Color box.

3. Scroll through the color list and click to select one.

The color is applied to the component. If you create a design view representation,
the color preference is saved with that view.

Changing a component color in an assembly affects only that occurrence. It does


not change the material color in Occurrence Properties.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Constraints

Topics in this section

Introducing constraints
Assembly constraints overview
Degrees of freedom in assemblies
Assembly constraint errors and recovery
Component collision and contact
iMates
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Introducing constraints
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Assembly constraints overview


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Assembly constraints - Constraint Set tab


Constraint Set enables you to constrain two UCSs together. You can select UCS in
part or assembly file.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Position panel Constrain, and then


click the Constraint Set tab.

Selections

Selects two UCSs to constrain together.

First UCS Selects the first UCS.

Second UCS Selects the second UCS. To select different first


UCS, click First UCS, and then reselect.

Pick Part First Limits the selectable UCS to a single


component. Use when UCSs are in close proximity or partially
obscure one another. Clear the check box to restore feature
priority selection mode.

Show Preview

Select the check box to preview the constraint to apply. Constraint set UCS to
UCS results in three Mate constraints, created between the corresponding pairs of
YZ, XZ, and XY planes.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Degrees of freedom in assemblies


Concept Procedure

Restore degrees of freedom to grounded components

You can restore degrees of freedom to a grounded (base) component and


reposition it. Any components constrained to the grounded component also move.

1. Select the grounded component in the graphics window or the browser.

2. Right-click the component, and then clear the Grounded check mark.

3. Drag the component to the new location, right-click, and select


Grounded to fix the location.

Grounded components are identified by a pushpin icon in the


browser.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Assembly constraint errors and


recovery
Concept Procedure

Isolate assembly components

Use Isolate to turn off visibility of all components except the components you
selected.

You can progressively isolate components by starting at a high-level assembly,


and work down the browser tree, isolating to smaller sets of components.

1. In an assembly, click the components you want to isolate in the


graphics window or the browser.

2. Right-click, and then select Isolate. All unselected components are set
to Invisible status.

Use Undo Isolate instead of Undo to restore components to the pre-isolation


state. Undo "backs up" through the last-performed operations in reverse order,
including isolation. Right-click in the graphics window or the browser, and then
select Undo Isolate. Component visibility is turned back on to the state before
they were isolated, but unlike Undo, operations performed in the isolated state
remain intact.

Undo Isolate is available only after you isolate components.

Note Use Isolate to identify constraint errors. For example:

When the Design Doctor displays, use Isolate as a treatment to find the
constraint.

Right-click a component in the browser and select Isolate Constraint. All


components are made invisible except the two participants in the
constraint.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

Component collision and contact


Concept Procedure

Detect contact between assembly components

The contact solver isolates


selected components in a
contact set so you can
determine if the components
behave in a mechanical motion
as expected. Apply constraints
to position the components as
intended, and designate
components to include in the
contact set, and move the
components or drive constraints
to simulate the action.

Open an assembly with components you must evaluate for contact.

1. Activate the Contact Solver. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options
panel Document Settings Modeling tab.

2. In the Interactive Contact box, select:

Contact Set Only to limit participation in contact analysis to


the selected components.

All Components to analyze all components in the assembly for


contact.

Contact Solver Off to turn off solver analysis.


Surface Complexity to specify the level of performance
according to surface complexity. Not available if Contact Solve
Off is selected.
Click Apply to continue selecting options or OK to close the dialog box.
Note If you prefer, select Inspect tab Interference panel Activate
Contact Solver. This option switches the setting on the Document
Settings Modeling tab on and off.

3. In the browser, right-click one or more components and select Contact


Set to include them in the contact set.
If you prefer, right-click one or more components, and select
Properties. On the Occurrence tab, select the Contact Set option, and
then click OK.

4. Move the components or drive constraints through the intended


motion.
Correctly positioned components should complete the motion as
intended. If necessary, adjust the component positions and repeat the
analysis.

Note On the context menu, clear the check mark on Visibility or Enabled to
remove the components from analysis for contact, interference, or collision.
Reference components are analyzed regardless of visibility or enabled status.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints >

iMates
Concept Procedure

Create an iPart factory

Create iMates

Modify an iMate

Place components that have matching iMates

Control iMate visibility


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates >

Use iMates in iParts and iAssemblies


Concept Procedure

Create an iPart factory

A good candidate for an iPart factory is a basic part you use often in different
sizes, materials, or mounting configurations. When you transform a part to an
iPart factory, you define the parameters and properties that must change for each
part.

You can also create a table-driven iPart and use it to create a table-driven
iFeature if the entire part is going to be used as an iFeature. Use the Extract
iFeature command to save the iPart as an iFeature. Once the table-driven
iFeature is saved to the catalog location, use the iFeature Author to make
changes to the table.

Note There is no link between the original iPart and the iFeature. Save the part
file if you want to preserve a copy of the original iPart.
In the iPart Author table, you define individual members of the iPart factory by
specifying its values. If you prefer, you can add or edit members in an embedded
Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. For standard iParts, each table row is a member of
the iPart.

In previous versions, legacy iParts concatenated Key values to create a file name.
Now, a Member column in the iPart table generates a default file name based on
the factory name. Each member name is incremented. Optionally, click Options in
the iPart Author dialog box to set up a different naming scheme, or enter a new
name in the member cell.

You can create a standard iPart factory or a custom iPart factory.

Note Add the file locations to the active project because iPart members are
stored according to your search paths in the active project.

Set up part parameters

Create a standard iPart

Create a custom iPart

Generate new member files


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates >

iMate fundamentals
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Infer (Feature) iMates


Creates iMates on hole, revolve, and circular extruded part and assembly
features.

Note Inferred iMate definitions are placed only on closed loops.

Access: In the browser, right-click a feature, and then select Infer


iMates.

Name Enter a name to apply to all inferred iMate


definitions. If you leave the Name field blank, the
name is automatically assigned according to the
constraint type.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates >

Name and match iMates


Concept Quick Reference

Create iMate

Defines constraint pairs called iMates to


specify how parts connect when inserted
in an assembly.
iMates are identified by symbols that show
the type and state of the iMate, and can
be renamed to correspond with a
matching constraint in other parts.
Multiple iMates can be defined on a single
part.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel iMate

Assembly tab

Motion tab

Name and Match List


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Modifications

Topics in this section

Edit assemblies
Move and rotate assembly components
Replace assembly components
Delete assembly components
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Edit assemblies
Concept Procedure

Update part and assembly files

The Update command incorporates changes to parts or assembly components that


are held in memory from the current editing session. The graphics window and
browser update to show the changes. The Update command changes to indicate
whether an assembly is fully up to date.

When significant changes have been made to a part file or assembly component
(for example, editing a part in the assembly, placing a constraint, or editing a
constraint), Global Update is the default choice.

You can trigger Update automatically or set an option to defer updates while you
continue to work. When deferring updates, part positions will not change until you
use the Update command.

To defer updates:

1. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.

2. Click the Assembly tab, and then select the Defer Update check box to
defer updates until you click Update in the active file.

3. Clear the check box to update automatically.

To manually apply edits to a part file or to one or all components of the current
assembly:

1. Click the arrow beside the Update command on the Quick Access
toolbar.

2. Select the appropriate option:

Click Global Update when one or more components have


significant changes. All components, including the top-
level assembly, update.

Click Update to regenerate only the active part or


subassembly and its dependent children.

The Update command dims to show the file is fully up-to-date.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Move and rotate assembly


components
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Grip Snap Move Options Bar


Provides a set of icons that represent the possible options available to define the
behavior of the geometric entity you selected.

Access: With the Grip Snap command active,


the move option icons are displayed
when you select the geometry you
want to use as the basis of a move or
rotation.

The Back icon is always included so that you can back out of your selections
and deselect the geometry while keeping the command active.

Move option selections and results

Point as first selection, followed by:

Move Option Second Third


Result for selection set:
Selection Selection Selection

Free Drag none Repositioned so the origin is


coincident with the selected
point in space.

point Moved to a position defined


by the selected snap point.

line Moved to a position defined


by the cursor on the
selected line.
plane Moved to a position defined
by the cursor on the
selected plane.

Reference point Moved (as applied to the


Geometry point originally selected as
Displacement the origin of the selection
set) by the direction and
magnitude derived from the
2 points selected.

line Moved (as applied to the


point originally selected as
the origin of the selection
set) by the direction and
magnitude derived from the
lines definition.

Free Rotate none Rotated about its origin point


in all 3 planes. The selected
point in space defines the
termination point for the
rotation whip.

Reference point point Rotated about an axis


Geometry defined by the 2 points
Rotate selected (Cross Product) The
angle of rotation is taken
from the same 2 points (Dot
Product).

Line (linear edge, work axis, centerline, implicit ray) as first selection,
followed by:

Move Option Second Third


Result for selection set:
Selection Selection Selection

Free Drag none Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the edge
is coincident with the
selected point in space.

point Moved to a position defined


by the selected snap point.

line Based upon the pick point,


moved to a position defined
moved to a position defined
by a selected pick point on
the line. Collinearity is
established.

Move Along none Moved to a position defined


Ray by the selected point in
space along the ray of
displacement.

plane Moved to a position defined


by the intersection of the
endpoint of the line (select
other to toggle) and an
intersection plane. You can
enter an offset value.

Reference point Point Moved the magnitude of the


Geometry component derived from the
Displacement 2 points selected along the
Along Ray ray of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the


component derived from the
lines definition along the ray
of displacement.

Free Rotate none Rotated about an axis


defined by the selected line.
The selected point in space
defines the input for the
rotation angle.

point Rotated about an axis


defined by the selected line.
The selected snap point
defines the input for the
rotation angle.

Reference point Point Rotated about an axis


Geometry defined by the selected line.
Rotate The angle of rotation is
derived from selected points.
You can enter an offset
value.

line Line Rotated about an axis


defined by the selected line.
defined by the selected line.
The angle of rotation is
derived from selected lines
(must be parallel to axis of
rotation). You can enter an
offset value.

plane Plane Rotated about an axis


defined by the selected line.
The angle of rotation is
derived from the normal of
the selected planes (must
not intersect the axis of
rotation). You can enter an
offset value.

Curve (spline edge) as first selection, followed by:

Move Option Second Third


Result for selection set:
Selection Selection Selection

Free Drag none Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
curve is coincident with the
selected point in space.

point Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
curve is coincident with the
selected snap point.

line/edge Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
curve is coincident with the
selected point on the
line/edge.

plane/surface Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
curve is coincident with the
selected point on the face
or surface.

Reference point point Moved by the direction and


Geometry magnitude derived from
Displacement the 2 points selected.
line Moved by the direction and
magnitude derived from
the definition of the line.

Circle - Vector (circular edge, arc edge) as first selection, followed by:

Move
Second Third
Option Result for selection set:
Selection Selection
Selection

Free Drag none Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
edge is coincident with the
selected point in space.

point Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
edge is coincident with the
selected snap point.

line Repositioned so the cursor


pick point origin on the
edge is coincident with the
selected point on the line.

circular/arc Repositioned so the origin


edge edge is coplanar with the
selected circular/arc edge
and the respective
centerlines/vectors are
collinear. An insert is
established and flip is used
to change between inside
and outside.

analytic/NURB Repositioned so the cursor


surface pick point origin on the
edge is coincident with the
selected point on the
surface.

Move Along none Moved to a position defined


Ray by selected point in space
along the ray of
displacement.
plane Moved to a position defined
by the intersection of the
endpoint of the line (select
other to toggle) and an
intersection plane. You can
enter a value for the offset.

Reference point point Moved the magnitude of the


Geometry component derived from the
Displacement 2 points selected along the
Along Ray ray of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the


component derived from the
lines definition along the ray
of displacement.

Free Rotate none Rotated about an axis


defined by the circle-vector
centerline. A selected point
in space defines the input
for the rotation angle.

point Rotated about an axis


defined by the circle-vector
centerline. The angle of
rotation is derived from the
selected snap point.

Reference point point Rotated about an axis


Geometry defined by the circle-vector
Rotate centerline. The angle of
rotation is derived from the
selected points. You can
enter an offset value.

line line Rotated about an axis


defined by the circle-vector
centerline. The angle of
rotation is derived from the
selected lines (must be
parallel to axis of rotation).
You can enter an offset
value.

plane plane Rotated about an axis


defined by the circle-vector
centerline. The angle of
centerline. The angle of
rotation is derived from the
normal of the selected
planes (must not intersect
the axis of rotation). You
can enter an offset value.

Plane (planar face, work plane) as first selection, in Grip Snap followed
by:

Move Option Second Third


Result for selection set:
Selection Selection Selection

Free Drag none Positioned so that the cursor


pick point origin on the plane
is coincident with the
selected point in space.

point Based upon the cursor pick


point, moved to a position
defined by the selected snap
point.

line Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on
the plane is coincident with
the selected point on the
line/edge.

plane Based upon the cursor pick


point, moved to a position
defined by the selected pick
point on the plane. A
coplanar condition is
established, and you can use
flip to change between mate
and flush.

Move Planar none Repositioned (within the


restricted plane defined by
the initial selection) so that
the cursor pick point origin
on the plane is coincident
with the selected relative
point in space.
Reference point Point Moved the magnitude of the
Geometry component derived from the
Displacement 2 points selected within the
Within Plane plane of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the


component derived from the
definition of the line within
the plane of displacement.

Move Along none Moved to a position defined


Normal by the selected point in
space along the ray of
displacement.

Reference point Point Moved the magnitude of the


Geometry component derived from the
Displacement 2 points selected along the
Along Normal ray of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the


component derived from the
lines definition along the ray
of displacement.

Analytical Surface (Cylindrical, spherical, conical, toroidal face) as first


selection:

Move Option Second Third


Result for selection set:
Selection Selection Selection

Free Drag none Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on the
analytical surface is coincident
with the selected point in
space.

point Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on the
analytical surface is coincident
with the selected snap point.

line/edge Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on the
analytical surface is coincident
with the selected point on the
line or edge.
line or edge.

face/plane Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on the
analytical surface is coincident
with the selected point on the
face or plane.

cylindrical, Repositioned so that the


spherical, cursor pick point origin on the
conical & analytical surface is coincident
toroidal with the selected point on the
surfaces destination surface. A
tangency is established, and
you can use flip to change
between inside and outside.

NURB Repositioned so that the


surface cursor pick point origin on the
analytical surface is coincident
with the selected point on the
NURB surface.

Reference point point Moved the magnitude of the


Geometry component derived from the 2
Displacement points selected within the
plane of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the


component derived from the
definition of the line within the
plane of displacement.

NURB Surface (non-uniform rational B-spline surface) as first


selection:

Move Option Second Third


Result for selection set:
Selection Selection Selection

Free Drag none Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on
the surface is coincident
with the selected point in
space.

point Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on
cursor pick point origin on
the surface is coincident
with the selected snap
point.

line/edge Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on
the surface is coincident
with the selected point on
the line or edge.

plane/surface Repositioned so that the


cursor pick point origin on
the surface is coincident
with the selected point on
the face or surface.

Reference point point Moved the magnitude of the


Geometry component derived from the
Displacement 2 points selected within the
plane of displacement.

line Moved the magnitude of the


component derived from the
definition of the line within
the plane of displacement.

Move option icons and behavior descriptions

Entity
Icon Tool tip description of behavior
Selected

Point Free Drag

Move point using reference geometry

Rotate about point

Rotate about point using reference geometry


Line Free Drag

Drag Along Ray

Move along ray using reference geometry

Rotate about line

Rotate about line using reference geometry

Plane Free Drag

Drag Planar

Move planar using reference geometry

Drag along normal

Move along normal using reference geometry

Curve Free Drag

Move point using reference geometry

Circle- Free Drag


Vector
Drag along axis

Move along axis using reference geometry

Rotate about axis

Rotate about axis using reference geometry.

Analytic Free Drag


Surface

Move point using reference geometry

NURB Free Drag


Surface

Move point using reference geometry


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Replace assembly components


Concept Procedure

Replace assembly components

You can replace one assembly component with another component or replace all
occurrences of the component in the current assembly. If possible, constraints are
retained, unless the replacement part has a different shape. In that case, some
constraints may not survive and must be reapplied.

1. In the browser or the graphics window, select the


component to replace.
2. On the Assemble tab, Component panel, click the
down arrow on the Replace command, and then
choose one of the following:
Click Replace, and then click a component to
replace.
Click Replace All, and then click the
component to replace all occurrences in the
current assembly.
3. In the Open dialog box, go to the folder that
contains the component, select the component, and
then click Open.
4. A message notifies you that constraints and iMates
will be retained, if possible. Click OK to continue or
Cancel to discontinue replacing a component.
The new component or multiple occurrences are placed in the
same location as the original components. The origin of the
replacement component is coincident with the origin of the
replaced component. If some constraints were not retained,
apply assembly constraints as needed to remove degrees of
freedom.

Note When you replace a component with a member of an iAssembly or iPart, the
Open dialog box browses to the factory file of the member. You can select a
different member of the factory or create a new member using the Place iPart or
Place iAssembly dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications >

Delete assembly components


Concept Procedure

Delete assembly components

When you delete components created in place or placed directly in an open


assembly, you might need to reapply constraints or recreate features.

To delete a part created in place, double-click the top-level assembly in the


browser to activate the assembly. Select a component in the graphics window or
the browser, and then choose one of the following actions:

Press the Delete key.

Right-click and select Delete.

Press CTRL-X to cut the component from the assembly and move it to
the Clipboard. The component is deleted from the current assembly, but
can be pasted into another file.

Note To delete a component nested within a subassembly, double-click the


subassembly in the graphics window or browser to open its file. You can then
select and delete its components.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Features

Topics in this section

Assembly features
3D sweep features
Sketches in assemblies
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features >

Assembly features
Concept Procedure

Roll back the state of assembly features

To roll back the state of assembly features in the assembly, in the browser, drag
the EOF symbol up the feature tree. When rolled back, anything under the EOF
node is temporarily not included in the model. When you drag the EOF symbol
back down the tree within the list of assembly features, those features are added
back into the model.

1. Open an assembly file that contains one or more assembly features.

2. Click and drag the EOF symbol up the tree to any location within the
list of assembly features.

3. Repeat for each feature to roll back.

4. Click and drag the EOF symbol back down the tree to add features
back in.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features >

3D sweep features
Concept Procedure

Create profiles for coil springs

Follow these steps to create a coil with 12


revolutions. Begin by drawing construction
lines based on the dimensions of the coil.
Several of the basic tools in Autodesk
Inventor are used to create the 3D coil,
including:

Spline

2D and 3D sketch

Revolve

Extrude

Sweep

Circular pattern

Step 1: Create a planar spline to represent one revolution of the spring

Step 2: Create a circle to represent the diameter of the spring.

Step 3: Create construction geometry to define a path for the spring -


Part 1

Step 4: Create construction geometry to define a path for the spring -


Part 2
Step 5: Prepare for the Sweep command by creating a path for the
spring

Step 6: Prepare for the Sweep command by creating a profile for the
spring

Step 7: Sweep one revolution of the spring

Step 8: Pattern the Sweep feature to complete the spring


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features >

Sketches in assemblies

Sketches in assemblies can be created in a part file or an assembly file. Your


design purpose determines which type of sketch you create:

Create a sketch in a part file to create features that belong to a part.

Create a sketch in an assembly file to create features that affect


multiple parts, such as cuts, holes, and weldments.

The following describes the characteristics of sketches created in an assembly file.

Projected geometry

Sketches consumed by features

Constraint behavior

Shared sketches
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Productivity Tools

Topics in this section

Rename Browser Nodes


Add Part
Add Assembly
Save and Replace Component
Ground and Root Component
Component Derive
Place at Component Origin
Alpha Sort Components
Degree of Freedom Analysis
Update Substitutes
Create Substitutes
Link Levels of Detail
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Rename Browser Nodes


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rename Browser Nodes


This command provides the means to identify all component nodes within an
assembly using one of three naming schemes. This command requires no
component selection and acts upon all components within the assembly.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Rename Browser


Nodes

New Name Provides a selection list of three types of naming


schemes for component browser nodes:
Filename - Resets any component browser
node that was renamed manually to display
using the file name of the component. A
numerical sequence identification number
replaces the occurrence identification
number.
Part Number - Replaces the default or
Filename with the Part Number defined in
the component iProperties. By default the
Part Number iProperty is initially populated
with the Filename string. Therefore, this
option is most useful after you set the Part
Number property for each component.
Components that do not have a defined
Part Number attribute report <Missing
Data> as the browser node name. A
numerical sequence identification number
replaces the occurrence identification
number.
Default - Returns the component browser
node name and occurrence identification to
the default file name.
Apply Applies the selected browser node naming scheme to
all component nodes within the assembly.
Close Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Add Part
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Create Part
This command provides a streamlined version of the Inventor default command,
Create Component, to create an empty part file. You name and save a part file
you create using the Create Part dialog box.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Add Part

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last


folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder


contents:
Thumbnails
Tiles
Icons
List
Details
Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.


Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.


Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and a
selection list of previously named files.
Save as Defaults to the Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single
type: selection of IPT is available in the selection list.
Save Creates and saves the new empty part within the
assembly.
Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Add Assembly
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Create Assembly
This command provides a streamlined version of the Inventor default command
Create Component, to create an empty assembly file. You name and save the
assembly you create using the Create Assembly dialog box.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Add Assembly

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last


folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder


contents:
Thumbnails
Tiles
Icons
List
Details
Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.


Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.


Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and a
selection list of previously named files.
Save as Defaults to the Inventor assembly (IAM) file type. Single
type: selection of IAM is available in the selection list.
Save Creates and saves the new empty subassembly within
your assembly.
Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Save and Replace Component


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Create Part
This command displays the dialog box during the save portion of the Save and
replace component workflow..

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Save and Replace


Component

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the folder


of the parent assembly.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder


contents:
Thumbnails
Tiles
Icons
List
Details
Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.


Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.


Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and
provides a selection list of previously named files.
Save as Defaults to the Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single
type: selection of IPT is available in the selection list.
Save Creates, saves, and place the new copied part within
your assembly.
Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Ground and Root Component


Concept Procedure

Ground and Root Component

This command provides the means to select an existing component within an


assembly structure and in a single operation:

Move and align the origin of the selected component to the origin of the
assembly.

Reposition the selected component as the first browser node in the


assembly browser.

Ground the selected component.

1. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Ground and


Root Component.

2. Click to select the component to move and ground.

The selected component is moved and grounded within the assembly and
repositioned within the assembly browser structure.

Note If the selected component has existing assembly constraints that prevent it
from being moved to and aligned with the assembly origin, additional conflicting
constraints are applied. Your assembly displays a red Recover indication. The
component is grounded and repositioned within the assembly browser node
structure.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Component Derive
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Create Part
This command provides a streamlined Derive Component workflow. You use the
Create Part (or Create Assembly) dialog box to name and save the new part (or
assembly) file.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Component


Derive

Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last


folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor.

Go to the last folder visited.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Create and name a new folder within the current folder.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder


contents:
Thumbnails
Tiles
Icons
List
Details
Vertical Shortcut Panel

Provides a view of recently used documents.


Provides a view of files stored on the desktop.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.

Provides a view of My Network Places locations.


Filename: Provides the means to name the file you create, and a
selection list of previously named files.
Save as Defaults to Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single selection
type: of IPT is available in the selection list.
Save Creates, saves, and opens the new derived part or
assembly for edit.
Cancel Terminates the Component derive tool and closes the
dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Place at Component Origin


Concept Procedure

Place at Component Origin

Select, place, and constrain a new component aligned to and coincident with the
origin of a selected component within an existing assembly.

1. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Place at


Component Origin.

2. Click to select an existing component within your assembly.

3. In the Open dialog box, select the component to place.

4. Click Open to place the component and close the dialog box.

The component you select is placed and constrained in the assembly with its
origin aligned to and coincident with the origin of the component you initially
selected within the assembly.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Alpha Sort Components


Concept Procedure

Alpha Sort Components

This command sorts the contents of the assembly browser alphabetically.

To sort the components, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Alpha Sort
Component.

The browser components display alphabetically.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Degree of Freedom Analysis


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Degree of Freedom Analysis


This command displays a dialog box that lists the number of translational and
rotational degrees of freedom for all the occurrences in the active assembly.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Degree of


Freedom Analysis

Refresh List Updates the list of components when the active


assembly is switched to another (already open)
active assembly.
Degrees of Displays in a three-column table a list of components
Freedom and translational and rotational degrees of freedom.
Animate Provides the means to select and animate graphically
Freedom the degrees of freedom of a component.
Cancel Closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Update Substitutes
Concept Procedure

Update Substitutes

From within your active assembly:

1. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Productivity panel Update


Substitutes.
A dialog box reports how many substitutes must be updated.

2. Click OK to continue the update.

3. The informational dialog box closes, and the substitute parts update.

Note Refresh the view of your assembly to see the updated substitute parts.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Create Substitutes
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Create Substitute
This command creates a substitute part for every subassembly within the active
assembly. The Create Substitute dialog box provides a means to select the
subassemblies for which to create a substitute part, and for naming the resulting
substitute parts.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Create


Substitutes

Three- The Create Substitute dialog box displays a three-


column column table with a row for each first-level
table subassembly in the active assembly.
Assembly Name column - Each cell in this column
contains the name of a first-level subassembly within
the active assembly. Right-click and select Remove
row to remove the subassembly from the table and
prevent the Create substitutes command from
creating a substitute part for the subassembly.
Substitute Part Name column - Each cell in this
column contains a default name for the substitute
part file to be created. The default name is the name
of the subassembly and either a prefix or suffix, as
determined by the selections in the Naming Scheme
portion of the dialog box. To enter a specific file
name for the substitute part, double-click slowly in
the cell.
File Location column - The cells in this column
display one of three locations. Right-click to specify
the preferred location:
User Path - The substitute part is created
in the folder specified by a path you enter.
Workspace - The substitute part is created
in the workspace specified by the Project
file.
Source Path - The substitute part file is
created in the same location as the source
subassembly.
subassembly.
Naming Provides the means to control the default naming
Scheme scheme.
Prefix - Enables the edit field. The name of the
substitute part file is the name of the subassembly
with a prefix you enter in the Prefix field. You can
use it in addition to, or instead of, the Suffix option.
Suffix - Enabled by default, the suffix field is also
supplied with a default string: “_SUB” that adds the
suffix to the name of the subassembly to create the
file name of the substitute part file. You can edit the
suffix string to suit your design situation. You can
use it in addition to, or instead of, the Prefix option.
Apply - Applies any changes that you have made to
the naming scheme.
Revert - Undoes any changes made to the default
naming scheme using the Apply option.
Level of The name that is applied to the Level of Detail
Detail Name representation created within each of the
subassemblies.
OK Creates the substitute parts and named Level of
Detail representations, activates the newly created
Level of Detail representations in each subassembly,
and closes the Create Substitute dialog box.
Cancel Dismisses the Create Substitutes dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools >

Link Levels of Detail


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Link Levels of Detail


Provides the means to select a named Level of Detail representation from the
active assembly. The selected Level of Detail representation is activated in any
subassembly which contains one of the same name.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Link Levels of


Detail

Named Lists named Level of Detail representations within


Levels of the active assembly. Provides the means to select a
Detail single named Level of Detail representation. The
selected Level of Detail representation is activated in
any subassembly which contains one of the same
name.
Help Displays the Quick Reference topic within the online
help..
OK Applies the named Level of Detail representation to
each first-level subassembly in the active assembly
containing a named Level of Detail representation
with the same name. Closes the Link Levels of Detail
dialog box.
Cancel Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Physical Properties

Topics in this section

Center of gravity
Mass properties
Check for interference between components
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties >

Center of gravity
Concept Procedure

Select the center of gravity

The center of gravity symbol contains three selectable work planes and a
selectable work point. Select the work planes to measure distance along the
perpendicular axis. Use the work point to measure straight line distance.

1. Start the measure command.

2. Select a COG work plane and appropriate component geometry to


measure perpendicular axial distance between geometry and selected
plane.

3. Select the COG work point and appropriate component geometry to


measure straight line distance between geometry and COG work point.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties >

Mass properties
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Properties - Physical tab


Calculates physical and inertial properties for a part or assembly to demonstrate
how differences in materials, analysis tolerances, and other values affect the
model.

The measurement units are controlled by the Document Settings Units tab.

Assembly Select a component, right-click and select


access: Properties. Click the Physical tab.

Part access: iProperties. Click the Physical tab.

To access the properties of a Virtual Part, right-click on a virtual part in the


assembly browser and select Properties.

Update

Clipboard

Material and density properties

General Properties

Inertial Properties
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties >

Check for interference between


components
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Assembly interference

Analyzes selected sets of components for


interference. If interference is found, the
interfering volume is temporarily displayed. A
report describes the interfering components and
the location and volume of the centroid of the
interfering body. If no interference is found, an
appropriate message appears.

Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab Interference panel Analyze


Interference

Interference Analysis

Interference Detected
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Bills of materials

Topics in this section

Bills of materials
Manage item numbers in bills of materials
Structure of bills of materials
Bill of Materials Editor
Parts lists and BOMs in iAssemblies
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Bills of materials

A bill of materials is a table that contains information about the parts within an
assembly. The table includes quantities, names, costs, vendors, or any other
information someone building the assembly needs. Quantities on the bill of
materials are updated when a part is added or removed from the assembly.

Bill of materials information is automatically collected from iProperties in the


Properties dialog box, such as the Title and Part Number from the Project tab.
Using the Bill of Materials command in the Manage panel of the Assemble tab,
you can view and edit properties for the bill of materials. The exported file can be
used in an application such as a spreadsheet or text editor. You can also export a
bill of materials (partial or full) to an Engineer's Notebook note.

You can modify values on the bill of materials by changing the design properties
in the Properties dialog box or in the Bill of Materials dialog box.

Within a drawing, you can create a similar document called a parts list. The parts
list derives data generated by the assembly and the Properties dialog box (as
reflected by the bill of materials). The placed parts list can then be edited, with
changes to its structure and content. Data in the parts list derived from the
Properties dialog box can be edited in the property dialog box. The data can be
overridden in the Edit Parts list dialog box. You can publish parts list to the DWF
format.

The Item Column displays item numbers in the bill of materials. Every item is
automatically assigned an item number. The item number can be edited as
needed. Changes to item numbers update automatically in the parts list and
balloons.

Quantity property in the bill of materials

Virtual components

Equivalent Components

Stock Number iProperty


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Manage item numbers in bills of


materials
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Renumber

Access: In the Bill of Materials dialog box, select the Structured or Parts
Only tab. Click Renumber.

The radio buttons for selection control are set based on preselection. When two or
more rows are preselected the dialog box defaults to Selected Rows. For
preselection of none or one, the default is set to All Rows and the radio buttons
are disabled.

Start Value The smallest valid value found in the selection is


used for the start value.
Increment Any integer ranging from 1 to 10,000.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Structure of bills of materials


Concept Procedure

Structure bills of materials

The BOM Structure iProperty defines the status of the component in the bill of
material (BOM). BOM Structure has five basic options: Normal, Phantom,
Reference, Purchased, and Inseparable.

Tip You can set a default value for BOM Structure on the Design BOM tab of the
Document Settings dialog box. The BOM Structure for all components is set to
this value, until it is overridden at the component instance level.

Set BOM Structure using BOM Editor

Set BOM Structure for a component

Override the BOM Structure for an instance of component

Set BOM Structure attributes in the BOM Editor


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Bill of Materials Editor


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Find and Replace


Use the Find and Replace dialog box to find or replace a string in the BOM table..

Access: In the Bill of Materials dialog box, right-click a BOM cell or a


set of multiple BOM cells, and click Find or Replace on the
menu.

Find what Enter a string to search for.


Replace with Enter a string to replace the original string with.
Match Case Select to distinguish between lower case and
upper case letters.
Direction Select the direction of the searching process.
Find Next Click to find the next occurrence of the searched
string.
Replace Click to replace the original string with the new
string.
Replace All Click to replace the original strings in all BOM
table or in a set of selected cells.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials >

Parts lists and BOMs in iAssemblies


Concept Procedure

Manage bills of materials in iAssemblies

Multiple assemblies exist within an iAssembly. In the BOM, separate QTY and Item
QTY columns display for each member as the item count is affected individually
for members with component suppression.

The BOM view displays the active member. Click the iAssembly down-arrow to
access remaining list or display all members.

The Bill of Material editor displays quantities for members within an iAssembly.
You can only edit the quantity of the QTY column per member.

Note Item QTY refers to a column choice that displays a calculated quantity for an
item which is separate from a QTY for an item. You can edit a QTY for an item.
The Item QTY is calculated and you cannot edit it.

You can create a Parts List of selected members or a traditional single assembly
parts list. You can also create an aggregate parts list of specified members.
However, only one BOM view is provided containing the aggregate list of items
and Item numbers.

Note The Bill of Materials command is disabled within an iAssembly member.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Representations

Topics in this section

Assembly representations and configurations


View representations
Flexible assemblies
Positional representations in assemblies
Level of Detail representations
Shrinkwrap assemblies
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Assembly representations and


configurations

This topic introduces the 2 types of assembly manipulation tools; representations


and configurations, and recommends how to use them together for a variety of
workflows.

What are representations?

What are configurations?

What makes representations different from configurations?

How can you combine representations and configurations?

How is this an advantage?

How do I know which one to use?


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

View representations
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

View representations
A View representation preserves an assembly display configuration so that you
can recall it by name the next time you work on the assembly.

Access: On the Assembly browser, click to expand the Representations


folder, right-click the View node, and then click New or Edit or
click the Design View Representations icon on the browser title
bar.

Storage Location

Design View Representations


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Flexible assemblies
Concept Procedure

Create and edit flexible components

Subassemblies are often used several times in a design. Make subassemblies


flexible so that each child of the subassembly can solve uniquely from other
instances to show each in a different position.

1. Right-click a subassembly in the graphics window or the browser, and


then select Flexible. An icon denoting the flexible state marks the
subassembly in the browser.

2. Continue to select subassemblies and make flexible, as needed.

3. Click Save to preserve flexible states in the assembly file. Individual


component files are not affected.

To remove flexibility, right-click a flexible subassembly, and then clear the check
mark.

Note If a subassembly or part within a subassembly is adaptive, setting flexibility


on automatically turns adaptivity off.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Positional representations in
assemblies
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Override Objects
For assemblies that participate in a positional representation, the Override Objects
dialog box overrides suppression status or constraint value, grounding status,
offset values, and flexibility status. Used to make in-process adjustments to
positions of objects in the current positional representation. Items with overrides
are indicated by bold text in the browser, with the override value in parentheses.

You cannot override values in the master positional representation. The master
positional representation is the default state of the assembly, where all modeling
tasks are performed

Tip You can quickly override one or a few values without accessing the Override
Objects dialog box. For example, right-click a constraint in the browser and select
Modify (Override). Or, right-click a component name and select Grounded
(Override) to change the grounding state.

Access: In the browser, double-click a positional representation to make


it active. In the graphics window or browser, right-click an
object that participates in a positional representation, and then
select Override to open the Override Objects dialog box.

On each tab, objects that cannot be overridden are not available.

Positional Representation

Constraint tab

Pattern tab

Component tab
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Level of Detail representations


Concept Procedure

Edit Level of Detail representations

Once a Level of Detail representation is created and saved in a subassembly, it


can be activated in any consuming assembly.

Note Open a subassembly to edit its Level of Detail representations. A Level of


Detail representation cannot be edited-in-place in an assembly that consumes the
subassembly.

Edit Level of Detail representations

Copy Level of Detail representations

Delete Level of Detail representations

Rename Level of Detail representations

Create and activate a Level of Detail representation in a nested


subassembly
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations >

Shrinkwrap assemblies
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Shrinkwrap assemblies

The Shrinkwrap command creates a part from an existing assembly. The


shrinkwrap part is a simplified version of the source assembly that can provide a
significant reduction in file size in consuming assemblies or applications. Use the
hole and geometry removal tools to help protect intellectual property. The default
method creates a single surface composite. A surface composite is the fastest
method and creates the smallest file of the three options.

Assembly Shrinkwrap Options

Style

Single solid body merging out seams between


planar faces Select to produce a single solid body
without seams between planar faces. When you
merge seams between faces, the face assumes a
single color.

Solid body keep seams between planar faces


Select to produce a single solid body with seams
between planar faces retained.

Single composite feature This is the default


selection. Select to produce a single surface
composite feature. This selection produces the
composite feature. This selection produces the
smallest file. Colors and seams of the original
components are retained. The mass properties of the
original assembly are cached. and retained.
Preview Select to visualize the results of the current selection
settings in the dialog box. If options are changed,
reselect Preview to see the effects of the change.
Simplification
Remove geometry by visibility Select the check
box to enable the options to remove geometry based
on visibility. The check box is selected by default.
Whole parts only Parts which meet the visibility
criteria are removed. Individual faces which meet
the visibility criteria are not removed.
Parts and faces Removes any face including entire
parts which meet the visibility criteria. The default
setting is on.
Visibility percentage A value of zero removes all
parts or faces that are not visible in any view.
Increasing the slider value removes more parts and
faces.
Ignore surface features for visibility detection
Available if Remove geometry by visibility is enabled.
If enabled, surface features do not affect visibility
detection. If not enabled, surface features participate
in visibility detection and can hide geometry.
Remove parts by size Select to enable the option
to remove parts based on the size ratio. The ratio
indicates the difference between the part bounding
box and the assembly bounding box.
Hole Patching
None Does not remove any holes.
All Removes all holes that do not cross surface
boundaries. Holes do not need to be round to be
included. It is the default setting.
Range Specifies the circumference or perimeter of
the holes to include or exclude. Holes do not need to
be round to be included.
Include other
objects
Work Geometry When selected, any visible work
features in the component are exported and can be
features in the component are exported and can be
derived.
Sketches When selected, any visible and
unconsumed 2D or 3D sketch in the component are
exported and can be derived.
iMates When selected, any iMates defined in the
source assembly are exported and can be derived.
Parameters When selected, any parameters in the
source assembly are exported and can be derived.
The Parameters folder includes a subfolder that
contains folders from the Parameters dialog box. The
Parameters and Export Objects dialog boxes share
the same parameter statuses.
Break link Permanently disables any updates from the source
component.
Reduced When the check box is selected, a part is created
Memory using less memory by excluding source bodies from
Mode the cache. No source bodies appear in the browser.
Breaking or suppressing the link removes the
memory savings. Checked on by default.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Functional design overview

Topics in this section

Understand functional design


Design Accelerator
Functions, Prefixes, and Algebraic Operators
Component Authoring
Best practices and general workflows
Design Accelerator Browser
Material Database
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Understand functional design

Functional design is a knowledge content tool that represents the trend to move
from geometrical descriptions to capturing knowledge.

Designers use functional design to analyze the function of their products and the
design problems they are trying to solve, rather than spending time on the
modeling operations necessary to create 3D representations.

Functional design is not only a set of functions. It supports design by function and
adds mechanical content and intelligence. Using functional design, you can create
mechanically correct components automatically by entering simple or complex
mechanical attributes.

Functional design provides further advantages:

The design and modification process is faster.

There is a higher level of design quality and accuracy.

It provides a more intuitive design environment.

It eliminates the need for physical prototypes.

Within Autodesk Inventor, the following areas are part of Functional Design:

Design Accelerator

Frame Generator

Autodesk Inventor Studio

AutoLimits

Content Center
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Design Accelerator
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Delete
Use the Delete dialog box to delete components.

Components inserted in an assembly using Design Accelerator generators are


related to one another using assembly constraints to define their positions.

When you delete a feature using Functional Design commands it affects the whole
connection. Then, you can decide if you want to delete affected features as well.

How can components be deleted?

How are the remaining components affected?


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Functions, Prefixes, and Algebraic


Operators

Using Equations and Parameters

You can use equations wherever you can enter a numeric value. For example, you
can write equations in the Edit Dimensions dialog box, feature dialog boxes, and
the Parameters dialog box. Equations can vary in complexity, and you can use
them to calculate feature sizes, calculate assembly constraints offsets or angles,
or simulate motion among several components.

Equations can be simple or contain many algebraic operators, prefixes, and


functions. For example, here is a simple equation:

2 ul *(6+3)

The following complex equation uses internal parameters such as pi:

(PI rad/5 ul +(25 deg *PI rad)/180 deg))

Supported Algebraic Operators

The following table lists the algebraic operators supported by Autodesk Inventor.

Operator Meaning
+ addition
- subtraction
% floating point modulo
* multiplication
/ division
^ power
( expression delimiter
) expression delimiter
; delimiter for multi-argument functions

Supported Unit Prefixes

The following table lists the unit prefixes supported by Autodesk Inventor.
Prefix Symbol Value
exa E 1.0e18
peta P 1.0e15
tera T 1.0e12
giga G 1.0e9
mega M 1.0e6
kilo k 1.0e3
hecto h 1.0e2
deca da 1.0e1
deci d 1.0e-1
centi c 1.0e-2
milli m 1.0e-3
micro micro 1.0-6
nano n 1.0-9
Pi co p 1.0e-12
femto f 1.0-15
atto a 1.0e-18

When you use unit prefixes in an equation, enter the prefix symbol. Do not enter
the prefix itself. For example, an equation that includes the unit "nanometer"
might look like this equation: 3.5 ul * 2.6 nm.

When you add the unit prefix for name to the meter unit, your equation is
calculated based on the length of 2.6 nanometers.

Note Prefix symbols are case sensitive. Enter them exactly as they appear in the
previous table.

Supported Functions

The following table lists the supported functions.

Syntax Returns Unit Expected Unit Type


Type
cos(expr) unitless angle
sin(expr) unitless angle
tan(expr) unitless angle
acos(expr) angle unitless
asin(expr) angle unitless
atan(expr) angle unitless
cosh(expr) unitless angle
tanh(expr) unitless angle
acosh(expr) angle unitless
asinh(expr) angle unitless
sqrt(expr) unit^1/2 any
sign(expr) unitless any (Return 0 if negative, 1
if positive.)
exp(expr) unitless any (Return exponential
power of expression: for
example, return 2 for 100,
3 for 1000, and so on.)
floor(expr) unitless unitless (Next lowest whole
number.)
ceil(expr) unitless unitless (Next highest whole
number.)
round(expr) unitless unitless (Closest whole
number.)
abs(expr) any any
max(expr1;expr2) any any
min(expr1;expr2) any any
In(expr) unitless unitless
log(expr) unitless unitless
pow(expr1;expr2) unit^expr2 any and unitless,
respectively
random(expr) unitless unitless
isolate(expr;unit;unit) any any

Note Function names are case sensitive. Enter them exactly as they appear in the
previous table.

Reserved System Parameters

The following table lists the reserved system parameters supported by Autodesk
Inventor.

Parameter Value
PI 3.14159265358979323846264338328
E 2.71828182845904523536

Unit Types

The unit type that you use with an equation depends on the type of data that you
are evaluating. For example, to evaluate a linear or angular value, you typically
use a unit type of millimeters, inches, or degrees (mm, in, or deg).

Some equations must return a unitless value, for example, an equation to solve
the number of occurrences in a pattern. You designate a unitless value with the
characters ul. For example, 5 ul means that the equation has been evaluated and
returned the number 5, as in the number of occurrences in a pattern.

Note Keep units consistent within equations containing parameters that represent
different unit types. You can do this using the Isolate function. For example, to
calculate the number of occurrences for a pattern that is based on one occurrence
for each unit of a parameter named Width, your linear equation would be:

isolate(Width;mm;ul)

The number of Occurrences value in a dialog box requires a unitless (ul) result,
but you are referencing the unit width, which is a linear value. Convert the Width
parameter to a unitless value.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Component Authoring
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Part Template Parameters

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Component , on


the Parameter Mapping tab, click the button at the end of the
edit fields.

To display Part Template Parameters dialog box, on the Layout tab select the
Parameter Category.

Assign part template parameters to category parameters during the Authoring


process.

To map the parameter to a column, double-click a parameter, or select it and


click OK.

The Part Template Parameters dialog displays all part template parameters that
can be valid for mapping in a tree structured by parameter categories.

Note You can save all the information you insert during the Authoring process,
and publish it to the Content Center Library.

Model Displays the part model tree with features and


feature related parameters.
Parameters
Model Displays the part model tree with features and
feature related parameters.
User List of User parameters. Decide if a dimensional
parameter is used for mapping.
Threads Provides list of threads in the part template with
Thread Family, Designation, and Class parameters.
iProperties Provides part template iProperties - Summary,
Project, Physical (only material) and Custom.
Suppression Allows selection of a feature to map to a table
column and specifies individual features to compute
or suppress for each family member.
Valid Template parameter mapping

What if the table columns are not presented in the Category Parameters
tab (Template parameters mapping to Category Parameters)
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Best practices and general workflows

Design Accelerator generators and calculators

Design Accelerator generators and calculators support assemblies and


weldments. In drawing, sheet metal or part environment they are not
available.

Design Accelerator support of positional representations is limited to


changes in the component only.

You can promote and demote Design Accelerator components in the


browser using the context menu. Ensure that the subassemblies that the
Design Accelerator components are part of are grounded after demoting.
Note that the drag function is not available to promote or demote
components in the browser.

Design Accelerator components must be encapsulated in an assembly to


apply kinematics. A component can be placed in a deep level
subassembly. In that case, in-place edit its parent assembly before you
start any Design Accelerator commands. Only entities inside a parent
assembly can be selected in Design Accelerator commands

A Design Accelerator assembly is used to organize components under an


assembly. A single assembly can have only one component assembly.

Tips and Tricks

When working with Design Accelerator generators and calculators there are many
features that can help you to work faster and efficiently:

Multi-line tooltips with images describe what you must do or select, in


the case of an error or problem they describe the nature of the error.

Use the (More) in the majority of generators and calculators to


access additional setting options.

3D grips + double-click : Most of the generators use 3D graphics for


better orientation and workflow. Use the 3D preview to see the
component in context with other parts of the assembly even before
creating it. Move the grip to change important dimensions of the
displayed preview. Double-click the 3D grip to open the Edit dialog box
to enter the dimension directly.
Output units change: Double-click a result value to change units. Enter
new units.

Items lists – drag : You can drag in most of the generators. You can
change the order of generated components. For example, in the Bolted
Connection Generator, you can change the order of nuts and washers.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Design Accelerator Browser

Uses the Assembly browser to organize and manage component entities.

When you open any generator and calculator, a prompt is displayed with the
option to save the design accelerator generator or calculator to the assembly
before you continue. Change the assembly name and folder or accept the default,
and click Save. An assembly node is added to the browser structure. The
component is designed in this assembly.

Design Accelerator generators and calculators are saved as subassemblies. All


inserted design accelerator components are stored together. For example, when
you insert Spur Gears connection, Gear 1 and Gear 2 are placed together in one
subassembly with a user- specified name. Use the Promote command to create
another instance of a component and move it up within the assembly structure.

Browser structure of generators and calculators

Design Accelerator Context Menu

Context menu for Design Accelerator Update


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview >

Material Database
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Wire Diameters and Ultimate Tensile Strength


Use the dialog to enter values of wire diameters and the ultimate tensile strength
of the selected material. Double-click the edit field to change values.

According to the specified values of wire diameters and the ultimate tensile
strength, generator uses the ultimate tensile strength value if you design a spring
of an appropriate wire diameter. For example, you set the wire diameter value in
this table to 0,072 and the ultimate tensile strength value to 232692. If you set
the wire diameter value in the Design tab to 0,072, generator automatically
inserts the ultimate tensile strength value (232692) to the Ultimate Tensile
Strength edit field of the Calculation tab.

If generator does not find the ultimate tensile strength value for inserted wire
diameter in the table, the value is calculated. Generator finds the closest lower
and upper wire diameter values and approximately calculates the ultimate tensile
strength.

The data from material database are stored in the XML format in ...Design
Data\Design Accelerator\Tables\Materials folder. If you edit the data, tables in
XML format are by default stored in ...Design Data\Design
Accelerator\Tables\Custom folder.

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab. Open Compression Spring,
Tension Spring, or Torsion Spring, Calculation tab. Check the
box next to the Material edit field to open Material Database
dialog box. Double-click the last column, Wire Diameters.

Add item Adds a row for new wire diameter and ultimate
tensile strength values.

Delete item Removes selected row with data from the table.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Component Generators

Topics in this section

Bolted Connection Component Generator


Shaft Component Generator
Parallel Splines Component Generator
Involute Splines Component Generator
Parallel Key Connection Generator
Cam Component Generators
Spur Gears Component Generator
Bevel Gears Component Generator
Worm Gears Component Generator
Bearing Component Generator
Plain Bearing Calculator
Compression Spring Component Generator
Extension Spring Component Generator
Torsion Spring Component Generator
Belleville Spring Component Generator
V-Belts Component Generator
Synchronous Belts Component Generator
Roller Chains Generator
Clevis Pin Component Generator
Pin Component Generators
O-Ring Component Generator
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Bolted Connection Component


Generator
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Modify length/hole
Specifies hole and bolt parameters that you can change.

For bolts, you can change the length only.

For holes, you can change type, diameter, designation, and class.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Fasten panel Bolted Connection


and then click the Design tab. In the area on the right side,
specify fasteners. Select the row with hole and click .
For bolts, select bolt and hold the Alt key + to open Modify
length dialog box.

The dialog box differs depending on whether the selected component is a bolt or a
hole.

Modify Hole
Type You have several options to select the type of
hole. Depending on the selected option, the hole
is adjusted. For example, if you select the Loose
option and click OK, you can see that the hole
dimensions are changed in the Design tab.
Threaded - Hole Diameter is always driven. It
designs the threaded hole type.
Designation For some holes, there are more possible
dimensions for the bolt type. Specify the hole
more accurately by selecting the appropriate
designation.

Modify Bolt
Custom Length Check the box to select the bolt length from the
drop-down list. Values in the list depend on the
type of the selected bolt.
type of the selected bolt.
When you enter a user parameter and return to
the Design tab of the Bolted connection
Generator, the part item with user dimensions is
displayed with a green background.
You can also change the length of bolt in the
graphics window using the 3D grip. Drag the grip
to the appropriate length. The edit field of the
part is displayed with a green background in the
Design tab.
Double-click the 3D grip to edit the bolt length.

Confirms the input from the component.

Closes the dialog box.

Design tab
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Shaft Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Torque
Use the dialog box to enter parameters of shaft torque.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel


Shaft. Click the Calculation tab, In the Loads &
Supports drop-down list select Loads, and in the
toolbar click Add Torque.
On the Loads & Supports area of the Calculation tab,
select Torque in the tree control, and click Loads
properties.
Double-click the torque preview in the Autodesk
Inventor window.

Properties Enter the value for distance measured from the


middle of the section.
Moment Enter the torque value.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Parallel Splines Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Loading Conditions
Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters on the connection
acceptability.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Key,


Involute Splines, or Parallel Splines, and on the Calculation tab
click Loading Conditions.

Joint Type
Fixed Splines are firmly joined by pressing or fixed by
rings, avoiding axial movement.
Flexible Splines are flexibly joined to allow axial
movement.
Crowned Uses external splines with crowned teeth for
misalignment up to 5 degrees.
Note This option is available for Involute Splines
only and if the ANSI Standard is selected.

Ka - Application factor

This coefficient reflects the effect of the character and the type of loading on
decrease of the loading capacity or the coupling. It is determined according to
empirical values given in the following table:

Drive Type of loading

Continuous Light Cyclical Heavy


shocks shocks shocks

Uniform 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8

Light shocks 1.2 2.1 1.8 1.8

Medium shocks 2.0 2.2 2.4 3.8


Fatigue-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of the operational character and appropriate


service life of the coupling (measured in number of torque cycles) on increase of
the loading capacity of the coupling. It is determined according to empirical
values given in the following table:

No. of Torque Fatigue-life factor, Kf


Cycles
Unidirectional Fully bi-directional

10000 1.0 1.0

100000 0.5 0.4

1000000 0.4 0.3

10000000 0.3 0.2

Wear-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of wear of contact surfaces during the appropriate
service life of the coupling (measured in number of revolutions) on increase of
the loading capacity the coupling. It is determined according to empirical values
given in the following table:

Total number of Kw
revolutions
[millions]

0.01 4.0

0.1 2.8

1 2.0

10 1.4

100 1.0

1000 0.7

10000 0.5
Note only for flexible joints.

Load Distribution factor

In couplings with two keys, the loading is not distributed exactly uniformly onto
the two keys due to production and assembly inaccuracies. The actual load
bearing surface of the coupling is lower than the load bearing surface determined
theoretically. The ratio between the theoretical and actual load bearing surface of
the coupling is defined by the coefficient of distribution of the loading. With
regards to the accuracy of bearing, the size of the coefficient is given in a range
from 0.6 to 0.8.

Tip: For common accuracy of production and installation, a coefficient of 0.75 is


taken into account .

Note In cases of couplings with 1 key, the coefficient is equal to 1.

Factor of Tooth Side Contact

Note This factor is available for Involute Splines only.

The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because
of production and assembly inaccuracy. At a common and higher mounting
accuracy, it is assumed that half of the teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5). For
splines with higher production inaccuracy, the load is only carried by one third of
the teeth (Ks = 0.3).
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Involute Splines Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Loading Conditions - Metric method


Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters to the connection
acceptability.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Involute


Splines. In the Involute Spline Connection Generator, click
Loading Conditions.

Note This dialog box is available only if you select the ISO or CSN spline type and
Metric Method in the Strength Calculation area on the Calculation tab.

Joint type
Fixed Joins splines firmly by pressing or fixed by rings
avoiding axial movement.
Working Conditions
Specifies the type of working conditions.
Tooth Side
Specifies the type of tooth sides.

Recommended values of allowable pressures on tooth sides:

Type of loading Working Hardened Non-


conditions Tooth Side Hardened
Tooth Side

Allowable pressure p D [kg/mm3]

flexible under adverse - 0.3 - 1


load
medium - 0.5 - 1

advantageous - 1 -2

no load adverse 1.5 - 2 2 - 3.5


medium 2 -3 3 -6

advantageous 2.5 - 4 4 -7

fixed adverse 3.5 - 5 4 -7

medium 6 - 10 10 - 14

advantageous 8 - 12 12 - 20

Factor of Tooth Side Contact

The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because
of production and assembly inaccuracy. At a common and higher mounting
accuracy, it is supposed that one half of teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5), for
splining with higher production inaccuracy the load is only carried by one third of
teeth (Ks = 0.3).

Calculation Tab
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Parallel Key Connection Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Loading Conditions
Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters on the connection
acceptability.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Key,


Involute Splines, or Parallel Splines, and on the Calculation tab
click Loading Conditions.

Joint Type
Fixed Splines are firmly joined by pressing or fixed by
rings, avoiding axial movement.
Flexible Splines are flexibly joined to allow axial
movement.
Crowned Uses external splines with crowned teeth for
misalignment up to 5 degrees.
Note This option is available for Involute Splines
only and if the ANSI Standard is selected.

Ka - Application factor

This coefficient reflects the effect of the character and the type of loading on
decrease of the loading capacity or the coupling. It is determined according to
empirical values given in the following table:

Drive Type of loading

Continuous Light Cyclical Heavy


shocks shocks shocks

Uniform 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8

Light shocks 1.2 2.1 1.8 1.8

Medium shocks 2.0 2.2 2.4 3.8


Fatigue-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of the operational character and appropriate


service life of the coupling (measured in number of torque cycles) on increase of
the loading capacity of the coupling. It is determined according to empirical
values given in the following table:

No. of Torque Fatigue-life factor, Kf


Cycles
Unidirectional Fully bi-directional

10000 1.0 1.0

100000 0.5 0.4

1000000 0.4 0.3

10000000 0.3 0.2

Wear-life factor

This coefficient reflects effects of wear of contact surfaces during the appropriate
service life of the coupling (measured in number of revolutions) on increase of
the loading capacity the coupling. It is determined according to empirical values
given in the following table:

Total number of Kw
revolutions
[millions]

0.01 4.0

0.1 2.8

1 2.0

10 1.4

100 1.0

1000 0.7

10000 0.5
Note only for flexible joints.

Load Distribution factor

In couplings with two keys, the loading is not distributed exactly uniformly onto
the two keys due to production and assembly inaccuracies. The actual load
bearing surface of the coupling is lower than the load bearing surface determined
theoretically. The ratio between the theoretical and actual load bearing surface of
the coupling is defined by the coefficient of distribution of the loading. With
regards to the accuracy of bearing, the size of the coefficient is given in a range
from 0.6 to 0.8.

Tip: For common accuracy of production and installation, a coefficient of 0.75 is


taken into account .

Note In cases of couplings with 1 key, the coefficient is equal to 1.

Factor of Tooth Side Contact

Note This factor is available for Involute Splines only.

The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because
of production and assembly inaccuracy. At a common and higher mounting
accuracy, it is assumed that half of the teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5). For
splines with higher production inaccuracy, the load is only carried by one third of
the teeth (Ks = 0.3).
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Cam Component Generators


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Add Motion
You can define your own motion. You must specify the motion name and the file
name.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Disc, Linear,
or Cylindrical Cam. On the Design tab click Add next to the
Motion Function pull-down list.

Motion Specify a user motion name to display on the Motion


Name list.
File Name Specify a file name with path of file with motion
data.

File Format

The Motion file is a text file that contains 2 columns of values delimited by tabs or
characters ";" or "|".

The first column represents the position in segment. The first value must be zero
(start of segment). The last value must be 1, or all values are transformed by
1/last value in the table. For example, if the last value in the table is 30,
generator recalculates value 1/30. The values must be listed ascendingly.

The second column represents an elevation at position. The first value must be
zero. The last value must be 1, or all elevation values are transformed by 1/last
value in the table. The values must be listed ascendingly.

Example of the values of the Polynomial motion of third degree. You can copy the
values from the table directly to the TXT file.

0;0
0.1;0.028
0.2;0.104
0.3;0.216
0.4;0.352
0.5;0.5
0.6;0.648
0.7;0.784
0.8;0.896
0.9;0.972
1;1
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Spur Gears Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Accuracy
Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Spur Gear
or Bevel Gear. In the Spur Gears or Bevel Gears Component
Generator, Calculation tab, click Accuracy.

Standard Selects the standard for accuracy calculation.


According to your selection, the Precision
Specification options are displayed.
Precision Select precision degree.
Specification
Note For the CSN Standard, list contains all
values. Some of these values cannot be selected
randomly, but they depend on the inserted
values on their left. If you select a value that
does not correspond with the value on the left,
the value is not inserted automatically. The
nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted.
OK Click to confirm the selection and close the
dialog box.
Cancel Click to close the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Bevel Gears Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Accuracy
Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Access: On the Design tab, Power Transmission panel, click Spur Gear
or Bevel Gear. In the Spur Gears or Bevel Gears Component
Generator, Calculation tab, click Accuracy.

Standard Selects the standard for accuracy calculation.


According to your selection, the Precision
Specification options are displayed.
Precision Select precision degree.
Specification
Note For the CSN Standard, list contains all
values. Some of these values cannot be selected
randomly, but they depend on the inserted
values on their left. If you select a value that
does not correspond with the value on the left,
the value is not inserted automatically. The
nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted.
OK Click to confirm the selection and close the
dialog box.
Cancel Click to close the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Worm Gears Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Accuracy
Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Worm Gear


and on the Calculation tab, click Accuracy.

Precision Selects the precision degree.


Specification
Note For the CSN Standard, the list contains all
values. Some of these values cannot be selected
randomly because they depend on the values on
their left. If you select a value that doesn't
correspond with the value on the left, that value
is not inserted. The nearest acceptable value is
selected and inserted automatically. For example,
if you set the first left value to 2, values on the
right side are updated according to specified
value. In this case the second value from left is
set to 3.
OK Confirms the selection and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Bearing Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Various Load Conditions


Specifies the values of various loads.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Bearing

and click the Calculation tab. On the Loads section, click


the load diagrammatic picture.

If the load is not constant during bearing life, use the dialog box to enter
additional loads.

Click Add load to add load.

To enter the load values, double-click the edit fields. You can insert Time values
either in absolute values or in percent.

For calculation of Equivalent Dynamic Load P used in Bearing Life Calculation, the
time ratio of the loading conditions is crucial, not the absolute values of the
loads.

The diagram on the Calculation tab displays the impact of individual element to
the Equivalent Dynamic Load P value.

Adds new load.

Deletes selected load

Moves selected load one line up.

Moves selected load one line down.


OK Confirms the loads settings and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Plain Bearing Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Diagram of radial bearing


Displays the preview of designed radial bearing.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Bearing

Calculator and on the Calculation tab, click Preview.

OK Click to close the dialog box.

Calculation tab

Advanced...
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Compression Spring Component


Generator
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Compression Spring Component Generator - Calculation tab


Sets parameters for calculation of a compression spring. You can calculate
generator data based on selections made in the Design tab.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Compression and


click the Calculation tab.

Spring Strength Calculation

Calculation Options

Load

Dimensions

Spring Coils

Spring Material

Check of Buckling

Fatigue Loading

Assembly Dimensions

(More)

Results

Summary of Messages

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Extension Spring Component


Generator
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Extension Spring Component Generator - Calculation tab


Sets parameters for calculation of an extension spring.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Extension and click the

Calculation tab.

Type of Strength Calculation

Calculation Options

Loads

Dimensions

Spring Prestress

Spring Material

Assembly Dimensions

Spring Coils

(More)

Results

Summary of Messages

Toolbar Commands
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Torsion Spring Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Torsion Spring Component Generator - Calculation tab


Sets parameters for calculation of a torsion spring.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Torsion and click


the Calculation tab.

Spring Strength Calculation

Calculation Option

Loads

Spring Mounting

Dimensions

Spring Coils

Spring Material

Assembly Dimensions

(More)

Results

Summary of Messages

Toolbar Commands
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Belleville Spring Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Belleville Spring Dimensions


Use this dialog box to modify the existing spring values or add new spring sizes.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel Belleville and click


the Design tab. Click in the Dimensions group box.

Note The list of springs depends on the selected standard in the Spring Type list.

Add You can add a new spring size.

Remove You can remove the existing spring size.

Reverts all changes Deletes all changes created and


reverts to original data.

Click the Add icon to insert new spring size. Enter all required values for new
spring size.

The following table lists the data displayed for each spring size:

Name Spring dimension


D [in], [mm] Outside Diameter
d [in], [mm] Inside Diameter
t [in], [mm] Material Thickness
H [in], [mm] Unloaded Height
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

V-Belts Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Coordinates
Controls the X and Y coordinates of the pulley given by precise input. The Fixed
position by coordinates placement type must be selected for the pulley.

Access: In the Autodesk Inventor assembly preview of the V-belt,


double-click the center grip of the pulley.

Confirms the input of the coupling.

Closes the Coordinates dialog box.

V-Belts Generator Design Tab

Synchronous Belts Generator Design Tab


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Synchronous Belts Component


Generator
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Coordinates
Controls the X and Y coordinates of the pulley given by precise input. The Fixed
position by coordinates placement type must be selected for the pulley.

Access: In the Autodesk Inventor assembly preview of the V-belt,


double-click the center grip of the pulley.

Confirms the input of the coupling.

Closes the Coordinates dialog box.

V-Belts Generator Design Tab

Synchronous Belts Generator Design Tab


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Roller Chains Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Roller Sprocket Properties


Set up properties of a toothed sprocket.

Note This dialog box is displayed only if you select the roller chain sprocket.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Roller

Chains and click the Design tab. On the Sprockets group


box, click Sprockets Properties commands.

To more precisely control dimensions and properties of sprocket for analysis,


double-click the sprocket within the preview, or click within the dialog box.
The transmission requires a minimum of 2 toothed sprockets. All others can
be flat idlers.
Design Guide Controls the size of the idler based on a diameter
specified, or appropriate transmission ratio. Select the
Diameter option to retain the sprocket size when you
change the size of the driver sprocket. If you select
the Transmission Ratio option, you cannot enter the
sprocket size value. It is determined by size of driver
sprocket and transmission ratio. If you change the size
of the driver sprocket, the size of this driven sprocket
changes as well.
Custom size Customizes dimensional parameters of the sprocket
such as tooth gap shape properties, or sprocket hub
size. By default, the sprocket size values are set
according to the chain standard (data tables are
stored within the ...\Design Data\Design
Accelerator\Tables\Chains\RollerChains folder). If you
select the Custom Size option, you are responsible for
all sprockets' properties.
Custom number Overrides number of strands adopted from a chain by
of strands default. Number of strands of the sprocket can be
bigger than number of strands of the chain. You can
select active strand which is used for the chain.
Note To set active strand, select the blue grip within
Autodesk Inventor window.
Motion clockwise/ Motion counterclockwise
Changes the motion direction. When you have a
design with 2 sprockets drive, select this option to
change the direction of the chain motion. When you
have a design with multiple sprockets drive, select this
option to change motion just for the given sprocket.
Power ratio Power ratio magnitude range is from 0.0 to 1.0,
depending on the amount of power that is distributed
by a given sprocket. If more than 2 sprockets are
within the chain drive, some sprockets can act also as
idlers or power can split into more driven sprockets in
some ratio. If the power ratio is 0.0, the generator
considers it an Idler. The first sprocket (driveR) always
has 100% power so the power ratio value is 1.0.
Inertia moment An important value for calculation of natural
frequencies of the chain drive. If the Vibration analysis
option is selected within the Calculation tab then the
inertia moments of toothed sprockets cannot have a
zero value. The moment of inertia is considered not
for a sprocket itself but for entire rotating mass that
holds with the sprocket.

Theoretical tooth form Generates sprocket with


theoretical form of the tooth gap for specified number
of teeth. See the Geometry design properties chapter
within the Engineer's Handbook for more information.
ISO tooth form Generates sprocket with idealized ISO
form of the tooth gap for specified number of teeth.
See the Geometry design properties chapter within the
Engineer's Handbook for more information.
Dimensions Modify the sprocket dimensions.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Clevis Pin Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Service Factor
Displays the list of factors and appropriate values.

To edit the field manually, you can enter the value in the Calculation tab, or you
can select a value from the table.

To insert a value on the Calculation tab, click the white field with a value, and
click OK.

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab, Fasten panel, select any
Pin Generator. On the Calculation tab, click next to the
Service Factor edit field.

Pernament Fit

Specifies the overall effect of manufacturing and operational parameters upon


connection loading capacity reduction in terms of allowable deformation of contact
surfaces. Its value depends on the pin type and connection loading character.
With regards to the mentioned parameters, the literature gives values of the
coefficient in a range from 1 to 3.

Running Fit

Specifies the overall effect of manufacturing and operational parameters upon


reduction of the loading capacity of a pin loaded with shearing or bending stress.
Its value depends on the pin type and connection loading character. With regards
to the mentioned parameters, the literature gives values of the coefficient in a
range from 1 to 3.

OK Confirms the selection and closes the dialog box.


Includes the value in the calculation.
Cancel Closes the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

Pin Component Generators


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Modify Pin
Changes pin parameters (tolerance class, type, length, and so on).

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab, Fasten panel. Click any Pin
Generator, Design tab, Items area, click the Custom Properties
commands.

When you enter a parameter (Length or Diameter, for example) and


return to the Design tab of the pin generator.
You can also change the length of a pin in the Autodesk Inventor
window using the grip. If you drag the grip to the appropriate length,
the value is automatically inserted into the generator.

Confirms the parameters entered for the component.

Closes the dialog box.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators >

O-Ring Component Generator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

O-Ring Generator - Pattern tab


Connect to the Content Center server and configure Content Center on your
computer before you insert components using the O-Ring Generator. See the
Content Center Help, or Manage libraries across design workgroups Help to learn
how to use the Content Center.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel O-Ring


and click the Pattern tab.

By default, No Pattern option is selected.

When you select an o-ring, the displayed options depend on the type of selected
o-ring, axial or radial.

Apply and OK commands are grayed out. They become available when you specify
the placement geometry and select a family with a valid o-ring member. At that
point you can insert an o-ring into the assembly.

Radial o-rings

Axial o-rings

Menu Commands
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Calculators

Topics in this section

Weld Joint calculators


Solder Joint Mechanical Calculators
Clamping Joint Calculators
Tolerance Mechanical Calculator
Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator
Press Fit Calculator
Power Screw Calculator
Beam and Column Calculator
Plate Mechanical Calculator
Brake Mechanical Calculators
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Weld Joint calculators


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Spot Weld Calculator - Calculation tab


Sets parameters for calculation of a spot weld joint.

Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Convert panel Spot Weld

Calculator

Calculation of Statically Loaded Weld


Specifies the Standard Calculation Procedure and Method of Comparative
Stresses. Selects a calculation method for statically loaded weld joints. Both
methods calculate resultant stresses in a similar way, but the evaluation of
results for the strength check is different. See the Engineer's Handbook for
used methods of weld joint calculations.
Standard Checks joint strength by direct comparison of
Calculation calculated normal, shear, or resulting reduced stress
Procedure with the allowable stress by using a standard
calculation procedure. See the Engineer's Handbook
for calculation formulas.
Method of Compares allowable stress with auxiliary comparative
Comparative stress, which is determined from the calculated partial
Stresses stresses by using conversion factors of the weld joint
when the strength check is carried out with this
method. See the Engineer's Handbook for calculation
formulas.

Loads

Enter the acting force.

Dimensions

Summarizes all parameters necessary for definition of the weld geometry.


Displayed options depend on the Weld Design selected type.

Joint Material and Properties


Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Edit the properties
of the material, if needed.
Yield Strength Displays the maximum stress that can be applied
without permanent deformation of the test specimen.
The value is automatically modified according to the
selected material. When you edit the value, the
selected material is changed to User.
Safety Factor Enter the value or click the arrow to set the value in
the Safety Factor dialog box.

Weld Design

Diagrammatic pictures of weld design are changed according to the selected weld
type. Choose the corresponding weld design.

Results

Displays the calculated values and the weld strength check.

Summary of Messages area

Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of Messages area at
the bottom of the tab, double-click the double line at the bottom of the tabs or
click the chevron.

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Solder Joint Mechanical Calculators


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Step Solder Joint Calculator - Calculation tab


Sets parameters for calculation of a step solder joint.

Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Convert panel Step Solder

Calculator

Type of Strength Calculation


Joint Design Designs the step depth for the indicated load,
dimensions, and joint properties.
Check Calculation Performs the strength check for the specified load,
dimensions, and connection properties.
Load
Specifies the force carried by the joint or for the torque in the stepped joint.
The direction of load action is shown in the diagram of the solder joint in the
dialog window.
Joint Material and Properties
Select the check box to open the Material Database and select a material.
Edit the properties of the material, if needed.
Shear Safety Specifies the Shear Safety Factor value you enter or
Factor select in the dialog box that opens when you click the
button beside the input field. The recommended range
of appropriate coefficients is displayed in the dialog
box.

Dimensions

Specifies dimensions of connected materials. The picture of the weld joint


contains the most important geometric joint dimensions specified in the
Dimensions section. Forces and moments which load the joint and which are
entered in the Loads section, are represented in the same way.

Results
Assessments of the joint strength, including the results of the strength check, are
presented in the Results section. If input parameters are changed, refresh the
values in this section by clicking the Calculate button (F5 key).

Summary of Messages area

Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of Messages area at
the bottom of the tab, double-click the double line at the bottom of tabs or click
the chevron.

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Clamping Joint Calculators


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Cone Joint Calculator


Sets parameters for calculation of cone joints.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Cone Joint

Calculator

Loads
Loading is entered through torque.
Dimensions
Enter the dimensions of the cone hub joint.
d, D, L Taper Calculates the pin taper ratio for the specified pin
Ratio diameters and joint length.
d, D, Taper Calculates the joint length for the specified pin
Ratio L diameters and taper ratio.
d, L, Taper Calculates the major pin diameter for the
Ratio D specified taper ratio, minor pin diameter, and
joint length.
D, L, Taper Calculates the minor pin diameter for the
Ratio d specified taper ratio, major pin diameter, and
joint length.
Joint Properties
Type of Loading Using the roll-down menu, select the Type of
loading.
Material Check the check box to open Material Database
and select a material. Edit the properties of the
material, if needed.
Allowable Allowable pressure in the joint is entered by
Pressure selection from the list according to the joint
character or by typing a value into the input
field.
Results

Displays the calculated values and the joint strength check.

Summary of Messages area

Summary of Messages area opens at the bottom of the tab when you double-click
the double line at the bottom of tabs or if you click the chevron at the bottom of
the tabs. It displays the reports about calculation.

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Tolerance Mechanical Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Tolerance
In the Tolerance dialog box, you can enter individual chain element dimensions
and tolerances.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Tolerance


Calculator. On the Calculation Tab, Dimension List box, click
Edit.

Confirms the tolerance inputs.

Closes the Tolerance dialog box.

Name: Enter the tolerance name.


Model value: Displays the computed value of the selected
dimension. You cannot change the value in this dialog
box.
Tolerance
Redefines the tolerance type and value for the selected dimension. Click the
arrow and select from the list.
Type: Specifies the tolerance type. The tolerance method
determines which tolerance values are available. Click
the arrow and select from the list.
Upper: Sets the value for upper tolerance.
Hole: Sets the tolerance value for the hole dimensions when
using Limits and Fits tolerance. Click the arrow and
the tolerance from the list.
Lower: Sets the value for upper tolerance.
Shaft: Sets the tolerance value for the shaft dimensions
when using Limits and Fits tolerance. Click the arrow
and the tolerance from the list.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator


Use to design fits and limits.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Limits/Fits

Calculator

The Limits and Fits Mechanical calculator takes recommendations from ISO 286 or
ANSI B4.1. The option to select a standard is available within the More Options
area. (To display the More Options area, click More in the lower right corner
of the Calculation tab.) Each standard has its own profile and the units of the
nominal diameter and deviations are millimeters for ISO and inches for ANSI.

Conditions

Tolerances

Tolerance Zones

Specify the limits and fits. Selected fit is displayed in a graphic form.

Fit Type Select Clearance, Transition, or Interference.


Preferred Select 1 of the predefined Fits. The list is dynamically
Fits updated when the Fit Type is changed. The Limits graph
is dynamically updated to display the selected fit.
Limits Select the limit letter and number. The Limits graph is
dynamically updated to display the selected Limits. If
you manually enter any letter or number, the Fit Type
and Preferred Fits pull-down lists are disabled. When
you click the Fit Type and Preferred Fits drop-down
arrows, you enable these selections and Limits entries
are reset to default values.
Limits are defined by a letter and a number. Capitol
letters are used for holes, and lower case letters are
used for shafts.
The letter is the Fundamental Deviation from the basic
size. It is the maximum size or upper tolerance of the
feature.
The number is the Standard Tolerance Grade. It is the
size of the tolerance zone. Subtract the Standard
Tolerance Grade from the Fundamental deviation to
determine the minimum size or lower tolerance of the
limit.
Limits Displays all available hole and shaft tolerance classes for
graph the entered nominal diameter and tolerance grade. You
can see currently selected tolerance class, displayed in a
hidden line. Pause the cursor over each fit symbol to see
the information about any fit deviations, which belong to
the selected tolerance class. Click a tolerance class to
change it.
The Zero line is displayed. The fit parameters are
dimensioned to show the tolerance zone dependencies
clearly. The dimensions that join the center of the
tolerance zones can have a value of less than zero.
Using this technique, you can design the transition fit
with respect to the maximum center value. It defines
the Interference fit (negative) or Clearance fit (positive).

(More)

Results

To display the Results area on the right side of the Calculation tab, double-click
the double line on the right or click the chevron.

The area displays numerical values for the tolerances. Click Calculate to calculate
the values.

The following items are displayed in the Results pane:

Hole

Minimum diameter of the hole (Hole min)

Maximum diameter of the hole (Hole max)

Upper tolerance of the hole (Hole upper)

Lower tolerance of the hole (Hole lower)


Shaft

Minimum diameter of the shaft (Shaft min)

Maximum diameter of the shaft (Shaft max)

Upper tolerance of the shaft (Shaft upper)

Lower tolerance of the shaft (Shaft lower)

For Clearance Fits

Minimum clearance diametric value of the fit (Clearance min)

Maximum clearance diametric value of the fit (Clearance max)

For Transition Fits

Maximum interference diametric value of the fit (Interference


max)

Midpoint

Distance between midpoints of tolerance zones (Midpoint)

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Press Fit Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Press Fit Calculator


Sets parameters for calculation of a press fit.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Press Fit

Calculator

Required Load

Enter values for required transferred loading.


Required Torque Performs a calculation according to required
torque.
Required Force Performs a calculation according to required
force.
Torque Maximum torque required to transfer between
shaft and hub.
Force Axial force required to transfer between shaft
and hub.
Safety Factor Enter the value of safety factor. This value is
multiplied with force or torque and in fact
describes size of over design. Use higher number
than 1.0 specially if non-static load is applied.

Dimensions

Enter dimensions for press fit. If you enter values that do not correspond with
other dimensions, the values are displayed in red.
Outer Diameter Enter outer diameter of the hub.
Shaft Diameter External shaft diameter in place of contact.
Inner Diameter Internal shaft diameter of hollow shaft. If solid shaft is
considered use 0.0.
considered use 0.0.
Connection Length Enter length of pressure connection.

Limits and Fits

This part of the panel is used to find standard fit for shaft and hub.
Fit Symbol Standard hub and shaft fit that is calculated
based on ISO or ANSI standard.
Change... Opens the Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator -
Interference Fit dialog box. You can adjust the
maximum and minimum interference. Click OK to
return to the Calculation tab.
Fundamental If the corresponding standard fit for the
Deviations calculated maximum possible and minimum
possible interference cannot be found, the limit
deviations are calculated and numerically
expressed. In the tolerance field, you can adapt
the limit deviations. You cannot exceed
maximum possible or minimum possible
interference. If so, the calculated interferences
are shown in red and display an error message.
To adapt limit deviations, clear the check box for
the Specify manually option in the Fundamental
Deviations box.
Note : When you click Calculate, Design
Accelerator presents a new solution or calculates
new limit deviations. Your changes are not saved.
When you edit the fields, partial results are
calculated. It is not necessary to start the
calculation again.

Advanced

Assembly Assembly clearance is an important dimension for


Clearance the shaft cooling temperature calculation and hub
warming. You can specify the dimension only
when the Assembly Clearance check box is
selected.
Surface Surface quality affects the size of the trueing at
Smoothness contact surfaces and the size of efficient
interference. Trueing is not applied to perfectly
interference. Trueing is not applied to perfectly
smooth surfaces. For smooth surfaces, the
efficient interference equals the minimum
interference and the maximum loading capacity.
The Surface Smoothness fields for editing surface
quality are only available when you select the
Surface Smoothness check box. If you clear the
check box, you can specify the value of trueing.
The surface quality value is not used in the
calculation.
Clamping Factor The calculation contains a table of minimum
values for the steel parts clamping coefficient.
Click the button on the Clamping Factor box to
open the Clamping Factor table.
Clamping Factor Applies this factor for connections manufactured
(pressing) (connected) in the cold state. Pressing force
affects the assembly shaft and hub.

Hub Material

Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Edit the properties
of the material, if needed.
Material can be selected form predefined values. All properties that are used
in calculation are displayed and can be modified if "user" material is selected.

Shaft Material

Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Edit the properties
of the material, if needed.
Material can be selected form predefined values. All properties that are used
in calculation are displayed and can be modified if "user" material is selected.

Temperature

Limitation of Hub Sets limitations for hub warming up.


Warming Up
Limitation of Sets limitations for shaft cooling.
Shaft Cooling
Hub Warming Up Specifies the minimum warming up temperature
for the hub if the connection is assembled in the
for the hub if the connection is assembled in the
hot state.
Base Specifies the base temperature of the
Temperature surroundings environment.
Shaft Cooling Specifies the minimum cooling temperature of
the shaft if the connection is assembled in the
hot state.

Results

Displays the results of strength proportion calculation. Also, the hub warming
temperature is shown, which can be reduced by using shaft cooling.

Summary of Messages

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Power Screw Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Power Screw Calculator - Calculation tab


Sets parameters for calculation of a power screw.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Power

Screw Calculator

Type of Strength Calculation


Screw Diameter Calculates the screw diameter according to the
Design specified load, geometric dimensions, material
properties, and safety coefficient.
Material Design Designs the minimum material values for the specified
load, length, and properties.
Check Calculation Performs the stress check in the screw, and checks
allowable pressure in its threads.
Loads
Specifies force, moment, and thread friction coefficient.
Max. Axial Force Sets the value of maximum operating force carried by
the screw.
Max.Torque Sets the value of maximum operating torque.
Thread Friction Sets the friction coefficient in the thread between the
Factor nut and the screw. Values are presented in the table
in the Engineer's Handbook.
Screw
Specifies or calculates screw diameter, nut height, factor for end conditions,
and maximum length of loaded screw.
Thread Diameter, Sets geometric screw dimensions.
Pitch, and Mean
Screw Diameter
Min. Screw Sets the smallest screw diameter, usually the thread
Diameter small diameter.
Diameter small diameter.
Nut Height Specifies the active nut (thread) height.
Factor for End Sets the coefficient according to the diagram of
Conditions mounting types. See the chapter in the Engineer's
Handbook.
Max. Length Specifies the maximum loaded length of the power
screw.
Material
Specifies screw properties. Check the check box to open Material Database
and select a material. Edit the properties of the material, if needed.
Allowable Thread Sets the allowable thread pressure in the nut. Click
Pressure the arrow to show appropriate values in the Allowable
Thread Pressure table.
Elasticity Module Selects the material, such as steel, aluminum, or a
custom value.
Yield Strength Sets the yield strength of the screw.
Safety Factor Sets the required safety level, usually from 2 through
10.
Type of transmission
Rotation Shift Transform rotation to shift.
Shift Rotation Transform shift to rotation.

Results
Displays the calculated and limit stresses in the screw and pressure in
the thread.

Summary of Messages area


Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of
Messages at the bottom of the Calculation tab, double-click the double
line at the bottom or click the chevron.

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Beam and Column Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Restraint
Use this dialog box to enter parameters of a restraint.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Frame panel Beam/Column Calculator


Click the Beam Calculation tab. From the Loads &
Supports drop-down list select Supports, and on the
toolbar click Add Restraint.
In the Loads & Supports area of the Calculation tab,
select restrain in the tree control, and click Restraint
properties.
Double-click the support preview in the Autodesk
Inventor window.

Distance Enter the distance value which defines the distance


of the restraint from the left side of the element.
Yielding Define the plasticity for XY and XZ planes.
Radial Enter the radial displacement values for XY and XZ
Displacement planes.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Plate Mechanical Calculator


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Plate Calculator
Calculates flat plates of the circular, square, and rectangular shape with uniformly
distributed load over the surface, or with load concentrated at the center.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Frame panel Plate Calculator

Type of Strength Calculation


Design for specific Designs the minimal thickness and material values for
deflection specified load and deflection.
Design of minimal Designs the minimal material values for specified load
material values and dimensions.
Design of plate Designs the minimal thickness of plate for specified
thickness load and properties.
Strength check Performs the strength check for the specified load,
dimensions, and properties.
Shape of plate
Select on of the place shapes from the drop-down menu: Circular Flat Plate,
Square Flat Plate, or Rectangular Flat Plate.
Support type
Select the supported edges or fixed edges and the support type.
Load
Select the appropriate type of load and load input.
Material
Select the check box to open Material Database and select a material. Edit
the properties of the material, if needed.
Yield Strength Displays the maximum stress that can be applied
without permanent deformation of the test specimen.
The value is automatically modified according to the
selected material. When you edit the value, the
selected material is changed to User.
selected material is changed to User.
Safety Factor Specifies the value you enter or select from the
predefined list.
Dimensions of
Plate
Summarizes all parameters necessary for definition of the plate geometry.
Results
Displays the calculated values and the plate strength check.
Summary of Messages area
To open the Summary of Messages area at the bottom of the tab, double-click
the double line at the bottom of tabs or click the chevron. It displays the
reports about calculation.

Tip

To complete the plate calculation or design, click Calculate.

To create an output report, click the Results icon.

Toolbar buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators >

Brake Mechanical Calculators


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Start Energy
Displays a dialog for energy calculation.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Drum Brake


Calculator, Disc Brake Calculator, Cone Brake Calculator, or
Band Brake Calculator. Then click the button next to the Start
Energy edit field.

OK Click to confirm the selection and close the


dialog window. Enters the Start Energy value in
the calculation.
Cancel Closes the Start Energy dialog box.

Rotation Energy
Moment of Enter value of Moment of Inertia of the braked
Inertia element.
Revolutions Enter the value for Revolutions of the braked
element.
Rotary Energy Calculated value of the Rotary Energy.
Kinetic Energy
Mass Enter value of Mass of the braked element.
Speed Enter value of Speed of the braked element.
Kinetic Energy Calculated value of the Kinetic Energy.
Start Energy Calculated value of Start Energy.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Content Center

Topics in this section

Content Center Installation and Setup


Administrative tasks on the Autodesk server
Migrate or synchronize user libraries
Configuration of Content Center libraries
Content Center Environment
Find parts in the Content Center Library
Content Center Consumer
AutoDrop
Refresh Standard Components
Content Center Editor
Publish parts and features in Content Center
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Installation and Setup


Concept Procedure

Share libraries across design workgroups

Before beginning, designate an administrator who installs and manages Content


Center libraries on the Autodesk data management server.

Library configurations for team members are saved in the Autodesk Inventor
project and can be edited in Project Editor. Each team member can create a
personal project using the project file (.ipj) as a template, or include a common
project (.ipj) file that is configured with the shared libraries. This enables each
team member to have the same configuration.

Note You cannot include a project file in an Autodesk Vault project file. Autodesk
Vault does not support included project files.

If you are connecting to a vault database and the Content Center libraries
database, the administrator creates the vault project file first and makes it the
active project. Then the administrator configures the Content Center libraries in
the Configure Libraries dialog box.

Overview

Install the server and client components for a design team.

Create a common project file (.ipj) with the desired configuration of


Content Center libraries. This project can be used as a template or as an
included project.

In the common project, change the folder where standard components


are created, if needed.

In Autodesk Vault Server Console, create the user accounts for anyone
requiring editing permissions. Communicate user account information
and the Login procedure to each member in the team.

Install the server components

Use the server console to configure libraries on the server

Create Content Center Editor user accounts in the server console

Install the client components


Connect to the server from Autodesk Inventor

Create a project file (.ipj) and configure Content Center libraries

Configure local project settings


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Administrative tasks on the Autodesk


server
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Autodesk Server Console - Reference


Use the server console to perform Content Center Library administrative tasks.

The server console displays the list of Content Center libraries currently available
on the server.

Note An .mdf and an .idf file comprise one library and must be maintained as a
pair for both Import and Export.

Access
Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Data Management
Autodesk Vault (Server Console).

Context Menu for Libraries folder

Create Creates a read/write Content Center library that can be


Library configured for use in a local or remotely served
Autodesk Inventor project.
Attach Attaches an existing .mdf and .idf file (containing
Content Center library data) to the server. Use the
Attach command to:
Reattach to the server a library you previously
detached.
Attach a library (pair of .mdf and .idf files)
Note For information on the location of the libraries see
the Autodesk Data Management Server (version)
Implementation Guide. The guide is installed as a PDF in
Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.
Use the Library Name dialog box to specify the library
name, which may be different than the name of the
.mdf file.
Import Copies library files (a pair of .mdf and .idf files) that are
not in the database to the server console.
Note For information on the location of the libraries see
the Autodesk Data Management Server (version)
Implementation Guide. The guide is installed as a PDF in
Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.

Context Menu for a selected library

Detach Removes Content Center libraries from the list of


available libraries in the Content Center Library Manager
dialog box. Detach does not delete them from the
database. The libraries can be reattached and made
available using the Attach command, or can be manually
copied to another location, for example, to be backed
up or moved to another computer.
Delete Detaches and deletes the selected library from the
database. All data contained in the library is
permanently deleted.
Export Copies a set of library files that are in the server
console to a specified location. You can specify a folder
on the same computer or a location available on the
network.
Read Changes the status of a user-created read/write Library
Only to read-only.
Note The read-only status of Autodesk Inventor
standard and Parker libraries cannot be changed.
Copy Copies a library from the Autodesk Inventor 2008 or
2009 partition to the Autodesk Inventor 2010 partition.
Edit Edits the display name of the library.
Display
Name

Note For information on the location of the libraries see the Autodesk Data
Management Server (version) Implementation Guide. The guide is installed as a
PDF in Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Migrate or synchronize user libraries


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Update Tool
Use the Update Tool guide to migrate and synchronize user libraries.

Access:

Click Manage Projects. In the Projects dialog box,


click Configure Content Center Libraries. In the Configure

Libraries dialog box, click Update Tool.

Step 1: Review the introduction and click Next


Welcome Page
Step 2: Select libraries to migrate and click Next.
Libraries to The Libraries to Migrate list displays all legacy
Migrate libraries that need to be migrated. If you clear
the selection for a library, the library will not be
available for use in your version of Autodesk
Inventor.
Step 3: Select libraries to synchronize and click Next.
Libraries to The Libraries to Synchronize list displays all
Synchronize libraries that include out-of-date copied families
with link to parents. Parent families must be
available in the current library configuration to
perform the synchronization. Synchronization is
not mandatory.
Step 4: Library Set the options and click Next to start the
Analysis process.
Select location for family templates backup If
appropriate, change the location of the backup
folder.
Do not create backup of customized part
templates Select to discard your customized
family templates. If not selected, customized
legacy family templates are saved in the backup
folder, and you can replace the standard
folder, and you can replace the standard
templates with your customized templates.
Overwrite existing files Select to replace the
existing files in the backup folder with the new
files.
Create Log file Select to create a log file. The
log file is saved in the specified folder.
Step 5: Update Review the process report.
Finished Done lists all actions that are complete.
Final fix required lists families that require
additional table fix.
Failures lists families that did not update and
why the family failed to update.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Configuration of Content Center


libraries
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Content Center log files


Log files are generated which record the events that occur during installation.

The log files are typically written to Documents and Settings\[USERID]\Local


Settings\Temp.

In addition, there are subfolders for the server, client, and Web client installations
(named Server, Vault, and WebClient, respectively). Each installed product writes
to its own log file in one of those subfolders. So, you sometimes see edm_wse.log
and msde.log under Server\ too.

You can use a log file to track system operations, warning, and errors.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Environment


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Customize Selection
Use the Customize Selection dialog box to select or reorder properties displayed
in the Detail List view.

Access: In the Content Center dialog box, click View > Detail List on
the menu. Then right-click a column heading on the Detail List
table and click Customize.

Properties Lists family properties that can be displayed in the Detail


list List view.
Select a property to display it in the view. Clear the
check box to remove a property from the view.
Move Up Moves the selected property up in the list. Moves the
corresponding column to the left in the Detail List view.
Move Moves the selected property down in the list. Moves the
Down corresponding column to the right in the Detail List
view.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Find parts in the Content Center


Library
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Advanced Search
Use Search for searching in Content Center Library. You can search in the entire
Library, or you can search for a part that matches specific criteria in the
Advanced Search dialog box.

Access: In the Content Center dialog box, click Search , and then
click Advanced Search on the Quick Search bar.

Look For: Click the drop-down arrow and select Families to


list families in Search Result, or Members to list
all members of families that match the searching
criteria.
Look In: Click the Categories button to specify categories
to include in the search.
Note A structure of all available categories is
displayed. Select categories to include them in
the selection.
Search Now Starts the search process.
Search Result: Lists families that match the selected search
criteria.
Move to Displays all Search Result families in the Content
Content Center Center dialog box.

Basic Tab
Name To specify a name as search criteria, select the
check box and enter a name in the text field.
To specify a description as search criteria, select
the check box and enter a description in the text
field.
Part Number To specify a Part Number as search criteria,
select the check box and enter a Part Number in
select the check box and enter a Part Number in
the text field.
Standard To specify a Standards search criteria, click the
drop-down arrow and select from the list.
Material To specify a Material as search criteria, select the
check box and click the button next to the Value
field. Then select appropriate materials in the
Select Materials dialog box, and click OK.
Advanced Tab
Define more Defines a search condition.
criteria
Parameter Select a parameter from the list of category
parameters.
Condition Select a condition operator for the selected
parameter.
For string parameters, choose Contains, Starts
with, Ends by, or In List operator.
Value Defines a value, list of values, or range for the
selected parameter.
Notes:
Enter a value with the unit for numeric values. If
the unit is not specified, centimeters are used as
the default unit.
If you select In List operator, use a semicolon to
separate individual values.
If you select Material as Parameter, click the
button next to the Value field to select materials
from the list.
Add to list Adds the search condition to the list of search
criteria.
Find items that Displays the search criteria to use when Search
match these Now is clicked.
criteria
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Consumer


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Place or Replace from Content Center, Change Size


Use the Family dialog box to select a family member, and then complete 1 of the
following operations:

Place from Content Center: Places a part into an assembly.

Place Feature: Places a feature into a part or assembly.

Replace from Content Center: Replaces a Content Center component


in an assembly.

Change size: Changes the size of a Content Center component in an


assembly.

Note The available options depend on how the dialog box is accessed

Access: The following commands use the Family dialog box:

Open from Content Center

Place Part from Content Center

Place Feature from Content Center

Replace from Content Center

As Places the selected member as a custom part.


Custom
As Places the selected member as a standard part.
Standard
Use Places the selected by using the Content Center
iMates component iMates.

Replace Replaces all instances of the selected part in the


All assembly. Available only for Content Center parts.
Context menu:

Add to Adds the part or feature with the selected parameters to


Favorites the active Favorites group.

Select tab

Table View

Family Information
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

AutoDrop
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

AutoDrop
Use AutoDrop to automatically size and place standard content.

Access: In an open assembly file:


In the Place from Content Center dialog box:
Select an AutoDrop enabled Family, and
click OK.
Double-click an AutoDrop enabled family.
Note Hold down ALT and double-click an
AutoDrop enabled family to place a member
from the Family dialog box. The Family
dialog box allows selection of specific sizes
and material.
From the Browser Bar Favorites drop-down menu, use
drag and drop or double-click the selected AutoDrop-
enabled family.

Overview of individual cursors:

Select a conical hollow face - used for a countersunk


bolt. The target cone angle and the bolt head cone angle
must be the same.

Select a shaft cylinder - used for bearings, washers,


retaining rings, and so on.

Select an edge on a shaft - used for bearings,


washers, retaining rings, and so on.

Select an edge in a housing - used for bearings.


Select a hollow cylindrical face -used for bolts, pins,
bearings, and so on.

Select a hole edge -used for bolts, nuts, washers, pins,


and so on.

Select a tapped cylindrical face - used for nuts.

Select a normal planar face - used for nuts, bolts,


washers, bearings, pins, and so on. Used as a secondary
target after a cylindrical face was selected.

Select a groove edge

Select an inner groove edge - used for external and


internal retaining rings.

Toolbar commands

Change size inserts the part and opens the Part Family dialog
box where you can edit the component.

Bolted Connection opens the Bolted Connection Generator.


Available for some bolts only.

Apply inserts the component to the assembly. This command


finishes the current insertion and AutoDrop continues with the
given family. You can insert several sizes during one command
call. The subsequent default member is always the last one
dropped.

Done inserts the component to the assembly and stops


AutoDrop.

Follow pattern is for circular patterns. If the target geometry


is in a pattern, the inserted component can follow the pattern.
By default, this option is switched on.
Note The pattern must be on a part, not an assembly.

Follow pattern for rectangular patterns. If the target


geometry is in a pattern, the inserted component can follow the
geometry is in a pattern, the inserted component can follow the
pattern. By default, this option is switched on.
Note The pattern must be on a part, not an assembly.

Insert multiple inserts multiple components. This switch is


available if AutoDrop identifies several available targets like the
selected target. For example, if you select a circular edge of a
hole and in the target component there are several co-planar
circular edges with the same diameter, use this switch to
populate components for all holes.
If the Insert multiple switch is on, AutoDrop highlights the
targets. Use the tooltip of the Insert multiple button to check
how many components are offered for the insertion.
Insert multiple function does not offer targets for insertion that
are already occupied. If there is a component already inserted
to some geometry, Insert multiple function disregards such
target. For example, if a screw is inserted to some of the holes,
such holes are not populated. This behavior happens even if
the screw is invisible or suppressed.

Flip flips the bearing. It changes the bearing side used for
mating (for example for tapered roller bearings).
The bearing is always inserted to mate the adjacent planar
face, regardless of the flip. With some bearings, which look the
same from both sides, the flip has no visible effect. If the
particular bearing family template does not have iMates defined
from both sides of the bearing, the Flip command is not
available.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Refresh Standard Components


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Standard Component Refresh

Use Refresh Standard Components to update out-of-date


standard parts in an assembly by using the most current data
from the Content Center library.

Access: Open an assembly file which contains Content Center standard


parts, and click Manage tab Content Center panel Refresh.

Current Project Name displays the name of the current project.


Project Content Center Files displays the path to the folder
Information where Content Center part files are stored. Standard
parts must be saved in the Content Center Files folder
to include them in the Refresh Standard Components
process.
Revised Lists all out-of-date Content Center standard parts.
Standard Refresh selects the standard part to refresh. Clear the
Components selection to skip the standard part during the refreshing.
Component shows the display name of the standard
part. The display name is for example visible in the
assembly browser.
Status displays the status of the standard part. The
status changes after the part is refreshed. For more
details, see Statuses of standard parts before and after
refresh.
Differing Language displays the language of the
standard part when it differs from the current Content
Center language.
Family Folder displays the folder where the standard
part is saved within the Content Center Files folder.
Part File displays the name of the standard part file.
Family Name displays the current Family Name of the
family saved in the library. Use the Family Name to find
the family in Content Center, if appropriate.
Select All Selects all standard parts in the Revised Standard
Components list.
Unselect All Clears the selection for all standard parts in the Revised
Standard Components list.
Refresh Starts the refreshing process.
Click to Opens the log file and displays a detailed report of the
Open Log refreshing process. For more details, see Warnings and
File Failures list and description.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Content Center Editor


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Material Guide (Panel 8) - Final Report


Review the process report.

Access: Click Manage tab Content Center panel Editor to open the
Content Center Editor dialog box. Then locate the category,
family, or families to add materials and do one of the following:
Select a category, right-click, and click Material Guide.
Select families (or one family), right-click, and click
Material Guide.
Select a family, right-click, and select Family Table. In
the Family Table dialog box, select family members
(rows) to add material to, right-click, and click
Material Guide.

Stop Terminates the material adding process.


Is available only while the process runs. Adding
materials is always completed for the family in
progress before the process stops.
Save Saves a detailed report about the material adding
Report process into a TXT file.
Finish Closes the Material Guide dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center >

Publish parts and features in Content


Center
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Publish feature
Use the Publish Feature to select an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Hole feature
and its parameters and publish to a Content Center library. For hole features with
multiple hole center points, you can publish the hole in two ways. You can publish
either with all center points or publish the hole as a single hole without existing
center points.

Text on a profile sketch is not included in a published feature.

Access: Click Manage tab Content Center panel Publish Feature.

A dialog box to specify parameters and properties for the


selected Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Hole feature is displayed.
After specifying parameters and properties, click Next to open
the Publish dialog box.

Parameters tab

Properties tab
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Build structural frames with Frame


Generator

Topics in this section

Frame Generator
Apply or Modify End Treatments
BOMs and Cut Lists
Structural Shape Authoring
Tips for generating frames
Frame Generator browser
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Frame Generator
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Resolve errors
Errors can occur when inserting, changing, or updating frame members. Problems
can also occur while you use commands such as Miter or Lengthen/Shorten Frame
Member. While most errors produce a logical error message, an uncommon and
unknown error can result in a message stating the error is unknown.

Error messages are shown in different ways:

If problems occur, Autodesk Inventor displays a message dialog box.


The dialog box explains where the error originated and why the error
occurred.

An icon is displayed next to a node in the browser indicating that the


element is sick. When you pass the cursor over the node for the sick
element, a tooltip explains the reason for the sickness.

You can fix errors when they occur in various operations:

Insert frame member

Change frame member

Miter

Trim to Frame

Trim to Face

Notch

Lengthen

Promote/Demote

Position update sick

End Treatment update sick

Other
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Apply or Modify End Treatments


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Remove End Treatments


Returns a frame member to its original creation state.

Access: On the ribbon, click the Design tab. Click the Frame panel

drop-down arrow, and select Remove End Treatments .

Select Frame Select the frame member to return to its


Members to original creation state.
Remove End
Treatments
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

BOMs and Cut Lists

A bill of materials is a table that contains information about the parts within an
assembly. It includes quantities, names, costs, vendors, and other needed
information. Quantities on the bill of materials are updated when a part is added
or removed from the assembly

The Frame Generator is integrated with the bill of materials and drawing
functionality in Autodesk Inventor. Frame members behave like other Autodesk
Inventor parts in Bills of Material (BOMs) and Parts List, and support ballooning
and cut list roll-up.

The BOM functionality in Autodesk’s Inventor software supports three of the most
common structural frame bills of material:

A unique part number for frame members with identical stock, length,
and cut treatments.

A single part number per frame stock type. Often, the part number is
the stock number.

All frame members receive a unique part number.

Assigning Part Numbers

Cut Lists
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Structural Shape Authoring


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Structural Shape Authoring

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Structural Shape

Layout

Defines the category and geometry of the part to be published.

Category

Use the pull-down menu to view the list of available publishing categories. When
you select a category, the graphics and selection prompts adjust appropriately to
guide authoring.

Geometry Mapping

In the geometry mapping group box, define the structural shape. Two geometry
types are listed.

Base Extrusion
Select Geometry Parts authored for Frame Generator require a base
extrusion feature. If there is only one extrusion feature in the part, it is
automatically selected. If there is more than one feature, the user has
to manually select the base feature.

Default Base point


This row becomes available after the first selection row is satisfied. The
Selection column contains two selection filters.
Predefined Point is the default, and is selected automatically once a
base extrusion is selected. The default insertion point is the geometric
center of the profile.
Select Geometry defines a base point based on your selection of a
point in the highlighted sketch of the selected extrusion feature. The
selected sketch point is highlighted in red in the graphics window, and is
shown in the Selection Preview.
Selection Preview

A selection preview provides dynamic visual feedback from the sketch of the
extrusion feature you select. The preview is available after you select a category
for authoring and the extrusion feature is selected.

Parameter Mapping

Enables mapping between category parameters, family columns, and template


parameters. Required parameters have a light yellow background, and optional
parameters have a white background. The only required parameter for Frame
Generator authoring is the base length.

Category Parameters and Table Columns

Lists the parameters for the selected category. Enables mapping of table columns
to category parameters.

All steel shape categories provide the same parameters to map to the appropriate
part table column names. Mapping is required for parameters displayed with a
light yellow background.

Publish Now

Available when all geometries are selected and required parameters are mapped.
Completes the authoring of the part and starts the Publish part command.

OK

Available when all of the geometries are selected. Saves the authoring of the part
and then closes the dialog box.

Cancel

Discards authoring input and closes the dialog box.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Tips for generating frames

Frame members

Frame Generator supports assemblies and weldments.

Frame members cannot be inserted on closed curves (like circle, ellipse).


If closed curves are involved, use the standard sweep feature in
Autodesk Inventor to complete the insertion.

Frame Generator does not consider bending practices or bend


deformation according to established manufacturing standards. As a
result, you can create sharp bends that cannot actually be manufactured
due to material or manufacturing process limitations.

Frame Generator support of Positional representations is limited to


changes in the frame only. Individual frame members do not move
relative to one another, although they can move or rotate together.
Setting transformation to a frame member occurrence has no effect in
the parent assembly when the frame document is in Positional
representation.

You can promote and demote frame members in the browser using the
context menu. Ensure that the subassemblies that contain the frame
members are grounded after demoting. Note that the drag function is
not available for promoting or demoting frame members in the browser.

Frames must be encapsulated in an assembly to apply kinematics. A


frame can be placed in a deep-level subassembly. In that case, perform
an in-place edit on its parent assembly before you use any Frame
Generator commands. Only entities inside a parent assembly can be
selected for Frame Generator commands.

Frames are automatically updated while you edit the skeleton model. To
ensure best performance of Frame update, put only skeleton lines for
locating frame members into a skeleton model.

You must keep the reference skeleton model in sync with the Frame
assembly. Each frame member must have a corresponding line in the
reference skeleton part. Consistency between the frame assembly and
the reference skeleton model might be broken if you do one of the
following:
Replace the reference skeleton components
Replace the reference skeleton file on disk
Check out inconsistent skeleton files from the Vault.

Use a frame assembly to organize structural members under an


assembly. A single assembly can have only one frame assembly.

End treatments

Frame end treatments of a rail on a spline are not directly supported in


Frame Generator. If splines or arc segments are involved, either add a
straight segment at the end and use the automated functionality for end
treatments, or use the standard editing commands in Autodesk
Inventorto complete end treatments.

If you create frame members using multiple edges and the Merge
feature, you cannot apply automatic end treatments to them with Frame
Generator commands. Instead, you can apply cuts and trims using
standard modeling commands within Autodesk Inventor to edit the part
directly.

Frame Generator doesn't have multiple end treatment commands. You


can complete multiple end treatments by accumulating basic end
treatments.

Frame Generator in Autodesk Inventor 2010 does not support frame


members created in Autodesk Inventor 2007.

Drawing manager, parts lists, and BOMs

With Frame Generator, you can extract end treatments on individual


structural members in bills of material (BOMs) and parts lists.

Frame members are based on the same standard, family, and size as
Metal Shapes in the Content Center. Frame members created with
Frame Generator have identical Stock Numbers to the numbers found in
Content Center.

Frame Generator leaves the Part Number blank when the frame member
is created.
Note If the Part Number is left blank, Autodesk Inventor populates the
file name for a part number upon creation. You can change this part
number.

The part name follows standard Autodesk Inventor behavior by


defaulting to the file name for each frame member. Once you save file
names that include length, you must use Design Assistant, Vault, or
other manual methods to update them.

Frame Generator provides a mechanism for automatically organizing,


naming, and saving under a file name.

Skeletal frame models default to a Reference state in BOM structure.


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator >

Frame Generator browser

Uses the Assembly browser to organize and manage machine frame entities.

When you insert the first frame member, a prompt is displayed with the option to
save the skeletal model as an assembly before you continue. When you save the
skeletal model as an assembly, a folder is created in the project workspace with
the name of the frame assembly, and a second prompt is displayed to specify the
name for the frame assembly. When you click OK to confirm the name of the
frame assembly, an assembly node is added to the browser structure. The frame
is designed in this assembly.

Browser structure of frames

Context menu for frame members

Context menu for end treatments


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies >

Weldments

Topics in this section

Weldments environment
Templates for weldments
Strategies for designing weldments
Weld bead feature types
Weld feature groups
Welding symbols on models
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Weldments environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Convert to Weldment reference


Converts an existing assembly file to a weldment assembly. You set the standard
to use and the default weld bead material. You also indicate the weld feature
group in which to place any assembly features.

Note Once you convert an assembly to a weldment, it cannot be converted back


to a regular assembly. Although all assembly capabilities are available within a
weldment, back up each assembly before converting it.

Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Convert panel Convert to


Weldment

Standard Sets the standard to use for the weldment file.


Default is the standard set at installation. Click
the desired button to specify a new standard.
Feature Specifies where to place any existing assembly
Conversion features. Click the desired button to specify the
weld group to use.
Weld Bead Sets the weld bead material to use as the
Material default. Click the arrow to select a material from
the list.
BOM Structure Sets the BOM structure to use in the converted
assembly. Click the arrow to select from the list.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Templates for weldments


Concept Procedure

Create templates for weldments

All new weldment files are created with a template. When you start a new
weldment, settings from the default weldment template are applied to the
weldment. You can create your own templates, and then add them to the
templates provided by Autodesk Inventor.

1. Create a weldment, using an existing template.

2. Set the default units of measurement.

3. Set the standard to use.

4. Specify the weld bead material type, visibility, and enabled status.

5. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate


the average weldment size.

6. Set the properties for the file.

7. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a


subfolder of Templates. A weldment file automatically becomes a
template when it is saved to the Templates folder.

Note The "weldment.iam" file in the Templates folder is the default assembly
template. To replace the default template, remove "weldment.iam" and replace it
with a template that has the same name.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Strategies for designing weldments

You design your weldments based on how you want to create and maintain
welding symbols and weld bead annotations (caterpillars and end fills) in your
drawings.

You can create and maintain your welding symbols and weld bead annotations
using fully automated, partially automated, or manual methods. You can also
create specialized views of the different weld states in your drawing.

Use of the weldment environment supports the automatic creation and updating
of model welding symbols and weld bead annotations in the drawing environment.
It also supports the creation of specialized weld state views in drawings.

Design weldments for assembly size and performance

Design weldments for automation in drawings

Design weldments for specialized weld state views in drawings


Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Weld bead feature types


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Cosmetic welds
Creates a cosmetic weld feature in a weldment assembly. A welding symbol may
be created simultaneously with the feature, but may be created in a separate
operation.

The weld bead and the welding symbol are separate features in the welds folder
of the browser. The welding symbol and the weld bead feature are not associated,
so you can specify any welding symbol values for any weld bead feature. When
consumed by a welding symbol, the cosmetic bead is a child node of the welding
symbol.

Cosmetic weld beads are useful when the design does not require interference
analysis or the aesthetic appearance of solid weld beads. Their approximate
physical properties can be included in mass properties.

Access: Right-click the Welds folder in the browser and select Edit. On
the ribbon, click Weld tab Weld panel Cosmetic.

The Bead box specifies the parameters for constructing the cosmetic bead.
Select Mode Sets the selection preference for areas on which to
apply the cosmetic weld bead. Edge is the default.
Chain automatically selects tangent, contiguous edges.
Loop selects a closed loop.
Extents Determines the method for ending a cosmetic weld. A
cosmetic weld can terminate on a work plane or
extend across all selected geometry for a full-length
weld. Click the arrow to select the extent method.
All creates the weld on all features and sketches in
the specified direction.
From-To select beginning and ending faces or planes
on which to terminate the weld feature. In a
weldment, the faces or planes may be on other parts,
but must be parallel.
Area Sets the cross-sectional area for a cosmetic weld bead
so the physical properties of the cosmetic bead can be
calculated.
Select Create Welding Symbol to expand the dialog box to set welding
symbol parameters. Click this link to go to the Model Welding Symbol
Reference .
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Weld feature groups


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Weldment group properties

Access: In the browser, right-click the Welds group, select iProperties,


and then click the Weld Bead tab.

Controls characteristics for weld bead features in a weldment assembly weld


bead group. Specifies whether solid fillet weld beads and cosmetic welds are
visible and enabled. Also sets color style of the weld bead material.
Except for color style, characteristics may also be set from the context menu.
Visible Specifies whether the weld bead feature is visible in
the graphics window. Default is On (checked). Clear
the check mark to turn visibility Off.
Enabled The default setting is On (checked), which specifies
that the weld bead feature can be selected in the
graphics window. Clear the check mark to change weld
bead features to Not Enabled.
Weld Bead Color Sets the color style to use for the weld bead material.
Style Default is As Material.
End Fill Color Sets the color style to use for end fill. Default is As
Style Weld Bead.
Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments >

Welding symbols on models


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Model welding symbol


Provides annotation and acts as a grouping mechanism by referencing multiple
beads with a single welding symbol. The beads and welding symbols are grouped
in the welding browser under the Welds folder. When consumed by a welding
symbol, beads are nested under the welding symbol that consumes them. All
weld bead features (consumed and unconsumed) are listed in the Beads folder
under the Welds browser node.

Access: In a weldment assembly, right-click the Welds folder and select


Edit. On the ribbon, click Weld tab Weld panel Symbol.
If creating a welding symbol at the same time as the bead,
select the Create Welding Symbol check box.

Sets the layout and contents of the welding symbol.


Bead Selects one or more cosmetic, fillet, and groove
weld beads to be consumed by a welding symbol.
The welding symbol groups the features into a
composite weld bead, annotated by a single
welding symbol.
The welding symbol leader is attached to one of
the consumed beads. You can drag the leader
point to any of the consumed beads.
Identification Click the arrow to select no identification line,
Line identification line above, or identification line
below the reference line. Available for ISO and
DIN only.
Swap Arrow/ Click to switch the arrow and symbols above or
Other Symbols below the reference line.
Stagger Staggers the welding symbols for fillets. Available
only if fillet welding symbols are set on both
sides of the reference line.
Tail note box Adds description to the selected reference line.
ABC Select check box to enclose note text in a box.
Prefix Sets a prefix to precede Leg 2 text.
Leg Specifies text for the leg.
Depth Sets the weld depth.
Symbol Click button to select symbol from palette.
Arrow side symbol selects symbol to display on
arrow side of the reference line.
Other side symbol selects symbol to display on
the other side of the reference line.
Angle Specifies the angle between weldments.
Number Specifies the number of welds.
Length Specifies the length of the weld.
Pitch Specifies the distance between welds.
Contour Specifies the contour finish for the weld. Click the
arrow and choose the contour from the list.
Secondary fillet Specifies the type of weld for secondary fillets.
type Click the button to display and choose from the
palette of available weld types. This button is
available only when the active drafting standard
is based on ANSI.
Angle Specifies the angle between weldments.
Brazing Specifies whether the weld is brazed. Select or
clear the check box to add or remove the
brazing symbol.
Clearance Specifies the clearance for the braze.
Depth Specifies the depth of the weld.
Diameter Specifies the diameter of the weld.
Gap Specifies the space between weldments.
Height Specifies the height of the weld.
Length Specifies the length of the weld.
Method Specifies the finish method for the weld. Click the
arrow and choose the method from the list.
Middle Specifies the type of inspection to perform on the
weld.
Number Specifies the number of welds.
Root Specifies the root thickness of the weld.
Root gap Specifies the gap for the weld.
Size Specifies the size of the weld.
Small leg Specifies the thickness of the weld.
Spacing Specifies the space between welds.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the weld.
Flag Specifies whether to add a flag indicating a field
or site weld to the selected reference line. Click
the button to turn the flag off or on.
All Around Specifies whether to use an all-around symbol on
symbol the selected reference line. Click the button to
turn the symbol off or on.
Fillet Weld Associatively links values of a single fillet weld
Linking bead with one side of the fillet welding symbol
values and options. Can be linked to one side
(Arrow or Other) or both sides of the parent
welding symbol. Available only when unconsumed
fillet weld beads exist or when creating a new
fillet weld bead.
Click the arrow to select an unconsumed fillet
bead. When the link is established, linked
welding symbol controls are controlled by the
bead and cannot be edited.
When a welding symbol is created with
the fillet bead, the Current Bead option
prefills the symbol values with fillet
bead values.
None is the only option if all no fillet
weld beads exist or all are consumed by
welding symbols. Select None to
remove the association between the
fillet bead and the welding symbol,
allowing access to previously linked
values.
Autodesk Inventor >

Drawings

Topics in this section

Drawings overview
Create drawing views
Drawing annotations
Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD
Exploded views and presentations
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Drawings overview

Topics in this section

Drawing Environment
Drawing Browser
Templates for drawings
Sheet Formats
Create drawings
Deferring automatic updates to drawings
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Drawing Environment

Each new drawing is created from a template. When you install Autodesk
Inventor, your selection of a default drafting standard sets the default template
used to create drawings. Use this template or another predefined template,
modify one of the predefined templates, or create your own templates to enforce
conventions.

Create a template from a drawing, preserving annotations on drawing sheets,


such as custom symbols, notes, and revision tables. Your borders, title blocks,
and view definitions can be retained in the template. View annotations and
general notes are not saved in a template.

A drawing becomes a template when you save it in the Templates folder. For
example, if you have a drawing file that contains the setup you want to use for
other drawings, save a copy of it in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates
folder. The next time you create a drawing file, the new template is available.

The location of the Templates folder is by default:

Microsoft Windows XP: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates.

Microsoft Vista: Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates.

When you create a drawing, it is automatically assigned an active drafting


standard that controls the styles used to format dimensions, text, line weights,
terminators, and other elements that are dictated. You can use the default
standard or select from another named standard (ANSI, BSI, DIN, GB, ISO, or
JIS).

The active standard has a default set of styles. Add or edit styles in the current
document, and if you want other designers to use the custom styles, save them
to the style library. Usually, the style library, which contains a master version of
all styles, is managed by the CAD Administrator.

Autodesk Inventor drawings also include elements that are not part of the named
standard. Copy, edit, or delete the elements as needed to customize them for
your company. Save the changes to sheets and views, for example, in the
drawing template, so they are available to other designers.

If you must supply customers with AutoCAD files, create a DWG template in
Autodesk Inventor using an AutoCAD file that contains the appropriate layers,
blocks, title blocks, and borders you need to deliver to your AutoCAD customers.
Specify the object defaults for these properties in the Styles Editor.

Note Autodesk Inventor needs a valid drawing template file when opening
AutoCAD .dwg files directly. By default, Autodesk Inventor uses the Standard
drawing template files (Standard.idw or Standard.dwg) located in the Templates
folder for the current project or in the Default Templates location. Override this
behavior by specifying a full path and file name to any Autodesk Inventor drawing
(*.idw;*.dwg) in the following registry key:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Autodesk\Inventor\RegistryVersion[version]\Applets\DrawingLayout\Preferences\General\Standard
Template Override

Setting the drafting standard

Setting up drawing resources

Setting up sheets in a template

Adding default views

Setting properties

Setting a default drawing template


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Drawing Browser
Concept Quick Reference

Drawing browser
Shows the Drawing Resources, sheets, and views in a drawing or template.

Drawing Resources

Sheets

Views
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Templates for drawings


Concept Procedure

Customize drawing templates

The following steps get you started quickly with


your company standard for drawing files. These
steps are overview of the main components of a
customized drawing template.
The Drawing Resources folder in the Drawing
browser contains folders for sheet formats, title
blocks, borders, and sketched symbols. Each can
be reused in new sheets and saved in the
template file.

Custom IDW template setup overview

Configure Document Settings

Clean up the browser

Setting the border

Title block basics - Part A: Set up and maintenance tips

Title block basics - Part B: Adding Properties

Title block basics - Part C: Format text tips

Setting Sheet Formats

Updating styles
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Sheet Formats
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Edit Drawing Border Parameters


Edits the parameters for a custom zone border inserted in a drawing.

Access: In the drawing browser, expand Drawing Resources and


Borders, and right-click a custom border instance. Select Insert
or Edit Instance from the menu.

Horizontal Sets the number and style for the horizontal zones.
Zones Number of Zones sets the number of horizontal
zones. Enter the number in the box.
Label Sets the label style for horizontal zones. Click
to select an option.
Vertical Sets the number and style for the vertical zones.
Zones Number of Zones sets the number of vertical
zones. Enter the number in the box.
Label sets the label style for vertical zones. Click to
select an option.
Label Zones Bottom/Right sets the base point for zone labeling
From to the bottom right corner of the drawing border.
Top/Left sets the base point for zone labeling to
the top left corner of the drawing border.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Create drawings
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard


The Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard is a command that copies drawing
resources from a source drawing to a target drawing. Close Autodesk Inventor
before you can use the wizard. Use the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard to:

Transfer selected title blocks, borders, and sketched symbols to multiple


drawings.

Optionally replace existing resources in the target drawing.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


[version] Tools Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard.

Welcome page Describes the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard processes.

Select Source Drawing and Resources page Selects the source drawing, shows
a preview image, and lists drawing resources.

Source Drawing selects files to process in a detailed view.

Preview, if available, shows a thumbnail view of the source drawing.

Source Resource shows the drawing resources hierarchy.

Select Target Drawings page Selects the target drawing or multiple drawings.
Navigate to the appropriate folder.

Add drawings opens the Select Target Drawings so you


can browse to the desired folder to select one or more
target drawings.
A target drawing can be listed only once. Click the File or
Path column name to sort files.
Skipped Files dialog box opens if a target file:
Is the same as the source drawing.
Is already listed.
Is read-only.
Has not been migrated to the current version of
Autodesk Inventor.
Next progresses to the next page when one or more target
drawing is specified.

Select Option page Specifies how to handle drawing resources in the target file
that have the same name as drawing resources in the source file.

Yes replaces drawing resources in the target file with the same name as
resources in the source file.

No gives a unique name to target drawing resources that have the same name as
those in the source file. The copied resource is named Copy of ResourceName.
The target drawing version retains its original name.

Begin the Batch Processing page Shows progress of transferred selected


borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols.

Start begins processing of selected files.

Pause temporarily halts transferring resources.

Cancel halts processing.

Results of the processing are shown in a log file.


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview >

Deferring automatic updates to


drawings
Concept Procedure

Defer automatic updates to a drawing

When you change part and assembly models, associated drawings are updated
automatically.

You can defer the automatic updates for a drawing, keeping it static until you
change its update status.

To defer automatic updates before opening a drawing

To defer automatic updates in an open drawing

To enable automatic updates in a drawing


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Create drawing views

Topics in this section

Develop assembly drawings


Design view representations in drawing files
Drawing views
Drawing view alignments
Sketches in drawings
Projecting geometry to a drawing sketch
Section views
Detail Views
Overlay Views
Break Operations
Crop Operations
Slice Operations
Create drawing views of surfaces
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Develop assembly drawings


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Multi-sheet plot
Plots a collection of drawing sheets of one or more sizes. You can schedule
plotting so that several jobs print in a batch at a specified time.

Access: From the Start menu, click Programs Autodesk Autodesk


Inventor [version] Autodesk Multi-sheet plot.

Page Setup

Select Drawing Files

Select Project

Preview

Print
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Design view representations in


drawing files
Concept Procedure

Create drawings of assemblies using Level of Detail representations

Use a Level of Detail representation when creating a drawing of a top-level


assembly to reduce the number of files loaded in memory. When creating a
drawing view, you can select a Level of Detail representation. Suppressed
components are not used when computing the drawing view.

1. On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base.

2. In the Drawing View dialog box, browse to the appropriate assembly.

3. Specify the Design View and Positional representations, orientation,


and other information.

4. Select the Level of Detail to represent in the view.

5. Click the drawing sheet to place the view and close the dialog box.

Note After the view is created, you can edit the drawing view and select a
different Level of Detail representation.

For more information about creating and annotating drawings using Level of Detail
representations, see the following sections:

Guidelines for creating a view

Guidelines for creating and maintaining annotations


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Drawing views
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Part, Feature, or Edge properties


Changes the line type, line weight, and color for selected edge, feature or part to
the value specified in the style or for the current document, overrides values set
in the style.

Manages properties for view edges, symbols, feature and component selection
priorities, trails, user-defined symbols, and sketch geometry.

Note You can load and use line types from AutoCAD *.lin files as the line type for
an edge property.

Access: Right-click on the edge of an object, and then select Properties


from the menu.

By Layer Available only when the Select command on the


Quick Access toolbar is set to either Feature
Priority or Part Priority. Select the check box to
show properties specified as By Layer. Clear the
check box to set Line Type, Line Weight, or Color
independently.
Line Type Specifies how a line or type of curve is displayed.
Set to By Layer to inherit the line type specified
for the layer.
Note To load an AutoCAD .lin file, select Other
from the bottom of the Line Type list. For more
information, see Select Line Type (LIN file).
Line Weight Specifies the thickness of the line type. Set to By
Layer to inherit the line weight specified for the
layer.
Scale Available only in a drawing sketch. Changes the
scale of the selected line type. Enter scale size in
the text box.
Color Sets the line color for the line type. Set to By
Layer to inherit the color specified for the layer.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Drawing view alignments


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Rotate Drawing Views

Rotates the orientation of an


existing drawing view.

You can rotate a view to make a selected edge vertical or horizontal, or rotate an
edge precisely by specifying an angle. You cannot rotate a view that has a
dependent section or auxiliary view, or an associated sketch.

When you rotate a base view with a dependent detail view, the detail view
maintains its relationship to the base view. Other dependent views do not rotate
with the base view.

Access: Select the view, right-click, and then select Rotate from the
menu.

Note When you rotate views, annotations maintain their associativity to the
views.

Method of Alignment

Direction
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Sketches in drawings
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Format Text
Use the Format Text dialog box to set the attributes for a drawing or sketch text.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Text

Style

Text attributes

Font attributes

Model, Drawing, and Custom Properties

Parameters

Symbol

Zoom buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Projecting geometry to a drawing


sketch
Concept Procedure

Project geometry in a drawing view to a sketch

You can select geometry in a drawing view and project it to a sketch associated
with the view. You can then use the projected geometry in the sketch.

The following image shows how model geometry can be projected into a sketch.
In this particular example, the projected geometry is used to help define sketched
lines.
Projected geometry remains associated to the parent geometry. If you change the
geometry in the model, the projected geometry updates when the drawing is
updated.
1. Create a sketch attached to a drawing view, or open
an existing sketch.
2. On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel
Project Geometry.
3. Select the geometry to project.
4. Right-click, and then select Done [ESC] to project
the selected geometry to the sketch.

Tip On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow next to Select and change the
filter to Select Part to select all geometry in a part in the view.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Section views
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Break Out

Removes a defined area of material to


expose obscured parts or features in
an existing drawing view. The parent
view must be associated to a sketch
that contains the profile defining the
breakout boundary

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Break Out, and then

click to select the parent view.

Boundary Selects the sketch geometry to define the


Profile breakout boundary. When the Profile command is
selected, click the sketch profile to select it.
Depth Selector Selects the geometry to define the depth of the
breakout area. Click to select the arrow button,
and then click the geometry in the drawing view.
Depth Type Selects the method for defining the depth of the
breakout. Click the arrow next to the box and
select the Depth Type from the list.
From Point sets a numeric value for the depth
of the breakout.
To Sketch uses sketched geometry associated
with another view to define the depth of the
breakout.
To Hole uses the axis of a hole feature in the
view to define the depth of the breakout.
Through Part uses the thickness of a part to
define the depth of the breakout.
define the depth of the breakout.
Depth Specifies a numeric value for the depth of the
breakout. Available only when the Depth Type is
From Point.
Display Select Show Hidden Edges to display the
hidden edges in the view temporarily. You can
pick a point on the hidden line geometry to
define the depth of the breakout. Clear the check
box to omit hidden lines in the view.
Select Section All Parts to section parts that are
not currently sectioned in the breakout area.
Clear the check box to omit non-sectioned parts
from the view.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Detail Views
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Detail View
Creates and places a detailed drawing view of a specified portion of a parent view.
The view is created without an alignment to the parent view. When creating a
detail view of a presentation, trails are visible, but can be turned off if necessary.
Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Create panel Detail

View/Scale Label

Style

Display
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Overlay Views
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Overlay View
Creates an overlay view to show an assembly in multiple positions in a single
view. A base view, projected, or auxiliary view is the parent for an overlay view.

Specifies a positional representation and design view representation for position


and visibility characteristics.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Create panel Overlay


And then click the view to use as the parent view.

Positional Specifies the positional representation to use for the


Representation overlay view. The Master positional representation can
be used. A positional representation can be used in
multiple overlay views.
View Specifies a design view representation to use for an
Representation overlay view. The design view can be different from the
parent view to allow an overlay view that shows only
needed components. Each overlay view can use a
different design view representation.
Select the Associative check box to update the view
when changes are made to the associative design view
representation in the assembly environment.
Label Indicates the label text used for the overlay view.
The Use Positional Rep Name check box sets the
name in the browser and label, if applicable. Clear the
check box to enter a name in the box.
The Toggle Label Visibility controls the visibility of the
overlay view label. Click the command to change the
label visibility.
The Edit View Label edits the view label the Format
Text dialog box.
Display Specifies the appearance of tangent edges and work
features.
The Tangent Edges sets the visibility of tangent edges
the overlay view. Select the check box to display
tangent edges. Clear the check box to hide them.
Foreshortened sets the display of tangent edges.
Select the check box to shorten the length of tangent
edges to distinguish them from visible edges.
Work Features specifies if work features are visible in
the overlay view. Select the check box to show work
features.
Style Sets the display style for the view. To change the
display style, click a command.

Sets the display to show hidden lines.

Sets the display to remove hidden lines.

Sets the display to a shaded rendering.

Style from Base sets the display style of a


dependent view to be the same as its parent
view. When the check box is selected, the
dependent view uses the same display style as
its parent view. To change the display style, of
a dependent view, clear the check box.
Layer sets the line style for the overlay view.
As Overlay sets all view items to the line type specified
by the Layer style.
As Part sets geometry to standard line styles used in
the part model. All reference models use reference line
styles.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Break Operations
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Break

Creates a broken, foreshortened view.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Break

Style

Orientation

Display

Gap

Symbol

Propagate to parent view


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Crop Operations
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Crop Settings
Use to set boundary type and visibility of crop cut lines for crop operations.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Crop

Default Boundary Type

Display Crop Cut Lines


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Slice Operations
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Slice
Creates true zero-depth section views in a drawing.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Slice

Select Sketch

By default, this command is already activated when the dialog appears. Select an
unconsumed Sketch for defining the Slice sketch geometry. Valid sketches include
the following:

Must contain at least one open profile (only open profiles are used for
the Slice sketch geometry).

Can be located in a Parent, Child, or Sibling View of the Target View.

Cannot be entirely made of reference geometry. Reference geometry


cannot be selected for Slice sketch geometry.

Note An unconsumed Model Sketch (in a part or assembly model) that is


recovered in the Drawing cannot be used for slice sketch geometry. Sketches
which were created in a Draft View cannot be used for slice sketch geometry.

Slice All Parts

Override the browser context menu settings and slice all parts in the view, if they
are crossed by the Slice sketch geometry.

Not checked

The Slice operation obeys the browser context menu settings for each component.

Checked

The browser settings are overridden. All components crossed by the Slice sketch
geometry participate in the Slice. Components that are not crossed by the Slice
sketch geometry do not participate in the Slice operation.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views >

Create drawing views of surfaces


Concept Procedure

Include or exclude surfaces in a drawing view

The workflow differs according to the combination of bodies and surfaces in a file.

Create views containing both solid bodies and surfaces

Create views containing surfaces but no solid bodies


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Drawing annotations

Topics in this section

Suppressed annotations
Dimensions in drawings
Centerlines and center marks
Symbols and sketched symbols
Tables
Hole notes
Hole tables
Balloons
Parts lists
Text in drawings
Text in drawing sketches
Weld annotations in drawings
Revision tables and revision tags
Sheet metal annotations in drawings
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Suppressed annotations

Annotations in drawings are suppressed when a part feature is suppressed or an


assembly component is made invisible. Components may be made invisible in the
assembly (in a design view) or in the drawing.

Some guidelines to help you understand why an annotation is no longer visible in


a drawing:

If a dimension is attached to multiple features or edges, the dimension


is suppressed if any of its target features or components are suppressed
or made invisible.

If a feature is suppressed or a component is made invisible, the


attached annotation does not appear.
For example, a center mark attached to a hole center becomes
suppressed when the hole feature is suppressed. Any dimension
attached to the center mark is also suppressed.

Some leaders also have secondary leaders that reference other features
or components than the primary leader. If only a primary leader is
present and attached to a suppressed feature or invisible component, it
is suppressed.
If multiple leaders exist, and the primary leader is attached to a
suppressed feature or invisible component, it is not suppressed.

Note If a feature is unsuppressed or an assembly component is made visible,


annotations are also unsuppressed and become visible.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Dimensions in drawings
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Copy Dimension Properties


Copies one or more properties from the selected dimension to a target dimension.

Access: Right-click a drawing dimension and select Copy Properties.


Right-click again and select Settings to show the Copy
Dimension Properties dialog box.

You can copy properties for these dimensions:

Linear dimensions (placed and recovered from model)

Angular dimensions (placed and recovered from model)

Radial and Diameter dimensions (placed and recovered from model)

Ordinate dimensions

Ordinate and baseline dimension sets

Note Individual ordinate and baseline dimension set members are valid sources
only, but the entire set is a target.

Style Select the check box to replace the style associated


with the target dimension with the style of the
selected dimension.
Clear the check box to retain the current style of the
target dimension.
Layer Select the check box to replace the layer of the
target dimension with the layer of the selected
dimension.
Clear the check box to retain the current layer of
the target dimension.
Dimension Specifies which of the properties set in the Edit
Overrides Dimension dialog box to copy. Those settings
generally override the defaults specified in the
dimension style.
Select the Text check box to copy the text overrides
to the target dimension.
to the target dimension.
Select the Precision and Tolerance check box to
copy the overrides specified on the Precision and
Tolerance tab of the Edit Dimension dialog box.
Select the Inspection check box to copy the
inspection dimension attributes specified on the
Inspection Dimension tab of the Edit Dimension
dialog box.
Select the Arrowhead Shape check box to copy the
arrowhead shape to the target dimension.
Select the Arrowheads Inside/Outside check box
to copy the arrowhead position from the selected
dimension to the target dimension.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Centerlines and center marks


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Automated Centerline Settings


Sets the defaults for adding automated centerlines and center marks to drawing
views or changes the centerline and center mark settings for the selected view.
Defaults are used when a view is created.

Access: When setting up a drawing or template, Click Tools tab


Options panel Document Settings Drawing, click
Automated Centerline Settings.
To add automated centerlines to a view, select the view, right-
click, and then select Automated Centerlines.

Apply to Selects the features to which automated centerlines


are applied. Features can include holes, fillets,
cylindrical features (including the arc of punch
features), revolutions, bends, and sheet metal
punches.
If the features are used in a pattern and a patterned
centerline is used, use the Rectangular Pattern or
Circular Pattern buttons.
To add center marks to a sketch, use the Sketch
Geometry option.
Projection Sets the projection of objects in view for which
automated centerlines or center marks are applied.
Axis Normal creates center marks when the circular
edge is normal to the view plane.
Axis Parallel creates centerlines when the circular
edge is parallel to the view plane.
Work Only visible user-defined work features in the top-
features level model are recovered. To recover additional
button work features, use Include Work Features to recover
work features in the view, or Include to recover a
specific work feature.
Threshold Sets the limits for automated centerlines on fillet,
arc, and circular features. Centerlines are not added
to features that fall outside the specified threshold.
to features that fall outside the specified threshold.
Fillet sets threshold for applying automated
centerlines to fillet features. Enter the minimum and
maximum radii.
Circular Edges sets the threshold for applying
automated centerlines to arcs and circular features.
Enter the minimum and maximum radii.
Precision sets the rounding precision for comparing
the size of fillets, arcs, and circular features to the
threshold. Click the arrow, and then select the
precision.
Arc Angle Angle Minimum sets the minimum angle for
Threshold creating a center mark or centerline on circles, arcs,
or ellipses.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Symbols and sketched symbols


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Surface Texture Symbol

Specifies the content of a surface texture symbol.


The options in the dialog box are determined by the
surface texture style.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate tab Symbols panel Surface

Symbols can be created as stand-alone objects, be placed directly on the


geometry in a drawing view, or reside on top of a leader line which points to
the geometry. Surface Texture Symbols can also be used in notes and in the
tolerance block.
Surface Type Click a button to select the desired surface type.

Basic

Material removal required


Material removal prohibited
Miscellaneous Specifies the general attributes of the symbol. Click the
button to add or remove each attribute.

Force tail adds a tail to the symbol.


Majority indicates that this symbol specifies the
standard surface characteristics for the drawing.
All-round adds the all-round indicator to the symbol.
The diameter is specified in the Leader style.
Surface Defines the values for the surface characteristics. Enter
characteristics the appropriate values in the boxes.
A specifies the roughness value, roughness value Ra
minimum, minimum roughness value, or grade number.
minimum, minimum roughness value, or grade number.
Available only when A' has an entered value.
A' specifies the roughness value, roughness value Ra
maximum, maximum roughness value, or grade number.
B specifies the production method, treatment, or coating.
If the active drafting standard is based on ANSI, this
box can be used to enter a note callout.
B' specifies an additional tail for the production method
if the drafting standard is based on ISO or DIN. This
option is available only when B has an entered value.
C for ANSI, specifies the roughness cutoff or sampling
length for roughness average; for ISO or DIN, specifies
the waviness height or sampling length. For JIS, specifies
the cutoff value and evaluation length.
C' for ANSI, specifies the roughness cutoff or sampling
length for additional roughness value. For ISO or DIN,
specifies the sampling length for additional roughness
value; for JIS, specifies the reference length and
evaluation length.
D specifies the direction of lay. Click the arrow and
choose the symbol from the list. This option is not
available when the removal prohibited option is selected.
E Not available when the Machining Removal Prohibited
is selected. Specifies the machining allowance.
F specifies the roughness value other than Ra or the
parameter value other than Ra. For ANSI, can also
specify the waviness height.
F' specifies the surface waviness for JIS. This option is
not used for ANSI, ISO, or DIN standards.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Tables
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Table Layout
For tables formatted by a Table style, changes the title, the location of the
heading, row spacing, table wrap preference, and sort order.

Access: Right-click the table, and select Edit. In the Edit Table dialog
box, right-click a column heading, and then select Table Layout
or click the Table Layout command.

Heading and Sets the options for naming and formatting tables.
Table Title specifies the title to display on the table and in
Settings the browser. Enter the title in the box or leave it
blank if you want to use the name of the .xls or .csv
file as the title . Select the Title check box if you
want the title to display.
Text Styles shows the styles associated with the
title, column header, and cell data.
Direction specifies the direction of the item
numbers in the table. Set to ascending or
descending order.
Heading specifies the placement of the heading in
the table. Set top, bottom, or no heading.
Line Spacing sets single, double, or triple spacing
between lines of text.
Heading Gap shows the preset value.
Row Gap shows the preset value.
Table Direction to Wrap Table sets the wrap to Left or
Wrapping right,
Select the Enable Automatic Wrap check box and
then specify the maximum rows and number of
sections. Not available if the check box is not
selected.

Note To change the default settings, click Manage tab Styles and Standards
panel Styles Editor. In the Style and Standard Editor dialog box, click Table
and edit values. The changed values are valid for the current document only,
unless you select click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Save to
replace the library style. Use caution because the changed setting could affect all
other documents that use the style.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Hole notes
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Edit Hole Note


Modifies formatting and note text for a hole note. Overrides settings specified by
the hole note style for the current document.

Access: Right-click a hole note and select Edit Hole Note.

Hole type Displays the hole type.


Edit Field Edits the content of the note. Click a button in the
Values and Symbols section to add the
corresponding property to the note text. Click the
arrow next to the Insert Symbol button to select and
insert a symbol.
You can use a combination of text, inserted symbols,
and variables to configure the annotation text of the
note. For example:
C <DIST1> X <DIST2> would result in C 10 X 10
Note To stack text, type a correct stacking
sequence, select it, right-click and choose Stack.
Options Use Default sets hole note to the default format.
Tap Drill selects the Tap Drill hole note type.
Part Units sets the note to use the measurement
units of the model. Check the box to use model
units. Remove the check mark to use the
measurement units specified by the dimension style.
Precision/Tolerance Settings opens the Precision
and Tolerance dialog box so you can add tolerance
information to values included in the note, or
override the default precision settings.
Edit Quantity Note opens the Quantity Note dialog
box. Allows custom configuration of the quantity note
display in the context of a hole note (represented by
the Quantity Note symbol).

Values Adds values and symbols to the Edit Field. Click a value or
and symbol to add it to the hole note. To remove, place the cursor
and symbol to add it to the hole note. To remove, place the cursor
Symbols after the value or symbol in the Edit Window and backspace.

Hole diameter

Hole depth

Counterbore/Spotface diameter

Counterbore/Spotface depth

Countersink hole diameter

Countersink hole angle

Countersink depth is calculated from model hole


parameters. It is not a part modeling parameter.

Quantity note adds text to indicate quantity. Not displayed


if the hole note is used inside a hole table or if the quantity is
less than two.

Selects a symbol from the list to add to hole note.

Thread designation does not display if the thread has no


thread information in part modeling.

Custom thread designation

Thread pitch

Thread class

Thread depth

Tap drill diameter

Fastener type indicates the fastener type used to define


hole parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the
feature has no fastener information.

Fastener size indicates the fastener size used to define hole


parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the feature
has no fastener information.

Fastener fit represents the fastener fit class used to define


hole parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the
feature has no fastener information.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Hole tables
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Format Column - Hole Table


Sets the column format for properties in the hole table.

Note To change the default column format for properties in hole tables, click
Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor, and edit the Hole
Table style.

Access: Right-click a hole table and select Edit Hole Table. On the
Formatting tab of the Edit Hole Table dialog box, right-click a
Property in the Column Settings area, and then select Format
Column.
Select a hole table or punch table style in Style and Standard
Editor. On the Formatting tab of the style panel, right-click a
Property in the Column Settings area, and select Format
Column.

Property Displays the name of the selected column.


Heading Sets the name of the selected column. To change,
enter a different name.
Type Displays the type of data in the column.
Leading/Trailing Controls the display of leading and trailing zeros.
Zeros
Justification Sets the alignment for the column heading and
respective cells.
Heading sets the alignment for the column heading.
Click a button to select left, center, or right
alignment.
Value sets the alignment for the data in the column.
Click a button to select left, center, or right
alignment.
Units Formatting Available only for numeric columns of the hole table.
Unit Type selects the type of measurement units.
Format selects a fractional or decimal format.
Fractional formats are available only if Length is
selected as Unit Type and inches or feet are selected
as Units.
Precision selects the precision of values displayed in
the selected column.
Fractional Text Scale sets the text scale for
numbers in stacked fractions. Available only if a
fractional format is selected.
Units selects the measurement units. If inches or
feet are selected, fractional format is available in the
Format option.
Decimal Marker selects the marker for the decimal
format. Click the arrow to specify either a period or
comma as the decimal character.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Balloons
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Attach Balloon, Custom/Virtual Parts


Use the Attach Balloon dialog box to select parts to be ballooned and the balloons
attached to an existing balloon.

Use the Custom/Virtual Parts dialog box to select custom/virtual parts to be


ballooned.

Access: Right-click a balloon in the drawing and select Attach Balloon


From List to open the Attach Balloon dialog box.
Click Annotate tab Table panel Balloon. Right-click and
select Custom/Virtual. Specify points for the balloon leader line
in the graphic window. Right-click and select Continue. The
Custom/Virtual Part dialog box is displayed.

Filter Filters parts displayed in the table. Click the arrow to


select a filter from the list.
Table Lists parts according to the active selection filter.
Right-click Select All selects all parts in the list to be
menu ballooned.
Clear All clears the selection for all parts in the list.
Invert Selection inverts the current selection.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Parts lists
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Export Parts List or Table


Saves the parts list or table to an external database, spreadsheet, or text file.

Access: Click Export in the Edit Parts List or Edit Table dialog box .

Save in Browse to select the location for the external file.


File Name Specifies the name of the external file. Enter the file
name or click the File button to select an existing
file.
Note The name for a DBF file cannot be longer than
eight characters.
Save As Specifies the type of external file to use. Click the
Type arrow, and then select from the list.
Table Name If the file type is Microsoft Access, specifies the
name of the table.
If the file type is Microsoft Excel, specifies the name
of the worksheet. Not used for other file types.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Text in drawings
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Align text

Access: Within a drawing with at least two text boxes selected: right-
mouse click and select Align from the context menu.

Alignment
Vertical

Click to align multiple selections to the left edge of the first


selected text box.

Click to align multiple selections to the right edge of the


first selected text box.
Horizontal

Click to align multiple selections to the top edge of the first


selected text box.

Click tto align multiple selections to the bottom edge of the


first selected text box.

Offset Data entry field. Used to input the offset distance from the
selected edge of the first text box.

Help Click to display this help page.


Apply Click to apply the selected alignment to the selected text
boxes.
Close Click to ignore any input and dismiss the dialog box.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Text in drawing sketches


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Geometry-Text
Use Geometry-Text to create and align text to sketch geometry.

Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Geometry Text

Geometry

Text Orientation and Format

Font attributes

Zoom buttons
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Weld annotations in drawings


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Drawing Welding Symbol

In a drawing view, specifies the content of a welding


symbol placed on a selected weld edge.
The dialog box opens when you place a welding
symbol. Available options are determined by the weld
symbol style and the associated drafting standard.

If the model in the drawing view is a weldment that contains fillet welds, the
dialog box displays the available data from the model.

Note Once placed, a welding symbol does not update if the model changes. To
add welding symbols that maintain association to the model, set the weldment
options on the Options tab of the Create View dialog box when you place a view,
or right-click the view, and select Get Model Annotations Get Welding Symbol.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate tab Symbols panel Welding

Sets the layout and content of the welding symbol. Symbols and values change,
depending on the specified weld type and the active drafting standard. Choose
the weld type and secondary fillet type, if applicable, and then specify the
corresponding attributes.

Identification Click the arrow to select no identification line,


Line identification line above, or identification line below
the reference line. Available for ISO and DIN only.
Swap Arrow/ Click to switch the arrow and symbols above or
Other below the reference line.
Symbols
Stagger Staggers the welding symbols for fillets. Available
only if fillet welding symbols are set on both sides of
the reference line.
the reference line.
Tail note box Adds description to the selected reference line.
ABC Select check box to enclose note text in a box.
Prefix Specifies a prefix to precede the symbol.
Leg Specifies text for the leg.
Depth Sets the weld depth.
Pitch Specifies the distance between welds.
Contour Specifies the contour finish for the weld. Click the
arrow and choose Flush or flat finish, Convex finish,
Concave finish, or Toes blended smooth (DIN only).
Secondary Specifies the type of weld for secondary fillets. Click
fillet type the button to display and choose from the palette of
available weld types. This button is available only
when the active drafting standard is based on ANSI.
Angle Specifies the angle between weldments.
Brazing Specifies whether the weld is brazed. Select or clear
the check box to add or remove the brazing symbol.
Clearance Specifies the clearance for the braze.
Depth Specifies the depth of the weld.
Diameter Specifies the diameter of the weld.
Gap Specifies the space between weldments.
Height Specifies the height of the weld.
Length Specifies the length of the weld.
Method Specifies the finish method for the weld. Click the
arrow and choose the method from the list.
Middle Specifies the type of inspection to perform on the
weld.
Number Specifies the number of welds.
Root Specifies the root thickness of the weld.
Root gap Specifies the gap for the weld.
Size Specifies the size of the weld.
Small leg Specifies the thickness of the weld.
Spacing Specifies the space between welds.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the weld.
Flag Specifies whether to add a flag indicating a field or
site weld to the selected reference line. Click the
button to turn the flag off or on.
All-around Specifies whether to use an all-around symbol on
symbol the selected reference line. Click the button to turn
the symbol off or on.
The diameter of the all-round character is specified
in the leader style.
Symbol box Click buttons to add a welding symbol to the current
symbol, delete the current symbol, or activate the
Previous or Next symbol. All edits affect the current
symbol only.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Revision tables and revision tags


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Format Column - Tables


Sets the formatting and alignment properties for a column in the table.

Access: To define columns in a Table style: Click Manage tab


Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. In the Style and
Standard Editor dialog box, click Table. On the Default Column
Settings tab, right-click a column name cell to open the Format
Column dialog box.
To edit a table column: Right-click a table and select Edit. In
the Edit Table dialog box, click the Format Column button.

Property Displays the name of the property displayed in


the selected column.
Heading Sets the name of the selected column. To
change, enter a different name.
Column Width Specifies the width of the column.
Leading/Trailing Controls the display of leading and trailing zeros.
Zeros
Justification Sets the alignment for the column heading and
respective cells.
Heading Sets the alignment for the column
heading. Click a button to select left, center, or
right alignment.
Value Sets the alignment for the data in the
column. Click a button to select left, center, or
right alignment.
Stacked Enables stacking of numeric fractions. All
Fractional Text fractional numerical strings (in 1/2 format) in the
selected column are replaced with a stacked
numeric fraction in the drawing. Available only
when editing a parts list in the drawing and Use
Default Formatting is selected.
Stack Properties Opens the Stack Properties dialog box and sets
button the format and text scale for stacked fractions.
Available only when editing a parts list in the
drawing and Use Default Formatting is selected.
Use Default Uses the default settings specified in the
Formatting standard.
Apply Units Enables the formatting and units settings for the
Formatting selected column. Changes made to these settings
only apply to the selected column.
Unit Type selects the type of measurement units.
Format selects a fractional or decimal format.
Fractional formats are available only if Length is
selected as Unit Type and inches or feet are
selected as Units.
Precision selects the precision of values
displayed in the selected column.
Fractional Text Scale selects the text scale of
numbers in stacked fractions. Available only if a
fractional format is selected.
Units selects the measurement units. If inches
or feet are selected, fractional format is available
in the Format option.
Decimal Marker selects the marker for the
decimal format. Click the arrow to specify either
a period or comma as the decimal character.
Unit String displays the name of the units next
to the value.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations >

Sheet metal annotations in drawings


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Edit Hole Table


Modifies formatting and options of a hole table. Overrides settings specified by the
hole table style for the current document.

Access: Right-click a hole table and select Edit Hole Table.

Formatting

Options
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD

Topics in this section

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD Standard


Annotate (ESKD) tab
Sheet Format
Title Block
Drawing Annotations
Parts List
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD


Standard

GOST is a set of technical standards published by the Federal Agency on Technical


Regulating and Metrology of the Russian Federation. Inventor 2010 now supports
GOST standards and the ESKD standards subset. ESKD is the Unified System of
Design Documentation, a subset of the GOST standard. This system governs
everything from font type and size to text placement on a page.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Annotate (ESKD) tab


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Annotate (ESKD) tab


Used to add GOST compliant annotations, symbols, and more. Gain access to
some options from drop-down in panel bar.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab

Icon Name Definition

Unidentified Displays the Unidentified Surface Texture


Surface Texture dialog box. Add surface texture symbol
that applies to all elements.

Surface Texture Displays Surface Texture symbol. Add one


Symbol or more surface texture symbols for
certain elements and for all elements that
do not have a surface texture defined.

Welding Symbol Displays the Welding Symbol dialog box.


Add welding symbols to the drawing.

Soldering Displays the Soldering Symbol dialog box.


Symbol Add soldering symbols to the drawing.

Gluing Symbol Displays the Gluing Symbol dialog box.


Add gluing symbols to the drawing.

Stitching Displays the Stitching Symbol dialog box.


Symbol Add stitching symbols to drawing.

Stitching by Displays the Stitching by Staples dialog


Staples box. Add stitching by staples symbols to
drawing.
Feature Control Display the Feature Control Frame dialog
Frame box. Add feature control symbols to the
drawing.

Datum Displays the Datum Identifier dialog box.


Identifier Add datum identifier to the drawing or to
Symbol another symbol.

Marking Symbol Displays the Marking Symbol dialog box.


Add a marking symbol to the drawing or
to another symbol.

Stamping Displays the Stamping Symbol dialog box.


Symbol Add a stamping symbol to the drawing or
to another symbol.

Surface Places a surface covering indicator at a


Covering specific place on the drawing. Use with
Symbol the Leader Text symbol to add details for
the surface covering symbol.

Leader Text Displays the Leader Text dialog box. Add


text to a leader line.

Technical Displays the Technical Requirements


Requirements dialog box. Add new technical
requirements to the drawing sheet or edit
existing technical requirements.
Table Displays the Table dialog box. Select the
number of columns and rows then add a
table to the drawing sheet.

Balloon Displays the Balloon dialog box. Add a


balloon to the drawing or to a symbol.
The balloon can appear in the parts list
when associated with a part.
Auto Balloon Displays the Auto Balloon dialog box. Use
Auto Balloon to create multiple item
balloons for selected components. Select
balloon characteristics.
balloon characteristics.

Parts List Displays the Parts List dialog box with an


automatically generated parts list that you
can edit.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Sheet Format
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet Format
Accept default format or change default sheet format. Add custom size, custom
format. Some change options are available from the browser context menus.

Access:
Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Drawing Sheets panel

Sheet Format
Right-click the Sheet, and select Sheet Format from
the context menu.

Name Drawing sheet name.


Size Drawing sheet size. You can select
predefined sizes or create a custom size.
Multiplier Sheet width is multiplied by the selected
number.
Height Drawing sheet height.
Width Drawing sheet width.
Portrait Long side of sheet is vertical.
Landscape Long side of sheet is horizontal.
Show Zones Identify zones on drawing sheet.
Start zone Type the vertical and horizontal zone
enumeration from enumeration. Vertical is the first field and
horizontal is the second field.
Form 1 One of three GOST compliant title boxes.
Form 2 One of three GOST compliant title boxes.
Form 2a One of three GOST compliant title boxes.
Extension 1 An additional title box that appears on the
drawing border.
Extension 2 An additional title box that appears on the
drawing border.
Extension 3 An additional title box that appears on the
drawing border.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Title Block
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Materials
Select and manage materials. Some default materials are covered in the dialog
box. New materials can be added to the list. Changes to a material display in the
drawing title block while the material is selected.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Drawing Sheets panel Title


Block Favorites

Material column Material name


Shape column Material shape
Assortments Material assortment
column
New Creates new material row at the end of the table.
Select Closes the dialog box and use specified material
in the dialog.
Close Closes the dialog.

Note Click the column title once to sort, click a second time to reverse the sort
order.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Leader Text
Procedure Quick Reference

Leader Text

Add one or more lines of leader text to the drawing


with limited text formatting. Attach technical
requirements.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Text panel Leader Text

Align Left Align all text on the left margin.


Center Align all text in the center.
Align Right Align all text on the right margin.
Technical Display the Technical Requirements dialog
Requirements box to associate technical notes to the leader
text. A reference to the selected item in
technical requirements is inserted into the
first line.
Insert Symbol Inserts a symbol in the active text field.
Type The Associative Text property type.
Property Property associated with the property type.
Precision Specifies the precision for numerical
properties displayed in the text.
Add Text This field is active when you select the
Parameter Associative Text Type property, Physical
Properties - Model. Inserts content from the
Associative Text Property field in the text
fields.
Undo Reverses the most recent action.
Redo Reverses the effects of the previous Undo
command.
Style Sets the style. Click the Bold, Italic, or
Underline buttons to apply the style to the
Underline buttons to apply the style to the
text.
Insert Landing Inserts landing line under the leader text.
Line below
Insert Landing Inserts landing line above the leader text.
Line above
Text Height Sets the height of the text in sheet units
(inches or millimeters). Enter the size or click
the arrow and select a size from the list.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Unidentified Surface Texture


Procedure Quick Reference

Unidentified Surface Texture

Add global surface texture information to drawing.


Global surface texture defines the surface texture for
all part surfaces without a specific surface texture
definition. Fields change depending on the GOST
standard you select.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Unidentified

Surface Texture

GOST 2.309-73(chg3) GOST standards updated in 1973.


GOST 2.309-73 GOST standards updated in 1973.
Treatment Basic surface texture symbol. Type of
Unspecified surface texture is not specifically
identified.
Removal of Material Material must be removed from the part
Required to meet the requirements.
Removal of Material Material cannot be removed from the
Prohibited part.
Force Tail Adds a tail to the symbol.
Majority This button is specific to Global Surface
Texture.
All-around Adds the all-around indicator to the
symbol with the diameter specified on the
leader.
Production Method Identifies the appropriate production
method for the texture. You can use a
combination of typing text and selections
from the context menu. This field is
enabled only when you click the Removal
of Material Required button.
Surface Texture Value Identifies the surface roughness. You can
use a combination of typing text and
selections from the context menu.
Texture Direction Identifies the surface texture type left by
the cutting instrument.
Add Row Insert a new Surface Texture Value line.
Remove Row Remove a Surface Texture Value line.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Surface Texture Symbol


Procedure Quick Reference

Surface Texture

Add surface texture information to a drawing.


Surface texture applies to a specific place on a part
and not the entire part. Fields change depending on
the GOST standard you select.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Surface

Surface Texture Value Identifies the type of texture you add to a


specific location. You can use a
combination of typing text and selections
from the context menu.

Full dialog
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Welding Symbol
Procedure Quick Reference

Select Standard

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Welding


Symbol. In the Weld Annotation context menu, click Select
Standard.

Click to select the preferred standard used for drawing annotations.


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Soldering Symbol
Procedure Quick Reference

Soldering Symbol

Add soldering information to drawing. Add as much


or as little information as required. Expand the
dialog box to add more information. Leader lines
identify the solder location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Soldering

Symbol

Weld Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding
Index annotation. You can use a combination of typing text
and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Gluing Symbol
Procedure Quick Reference

Gluing Symbol

Add gluing information to drawing. Add as much or


as little information as required. Expand the dialog
box to add more information. Leader lines identify
the glued location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Gluing

Symbol

Weld Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding
Index annotation. You can use a combination of typing text
and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Stitching Symbol
Procedure Quick Reference

Stitching Symbol

Add stitching information to drawing. Add as much or as


little information as required. Expand the dialog box to
add more information. Leader lines identify the stitched
location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Stitching

Symbol

Weld Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding
Index annotation. You can use a combination of typing text
and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Stitching by Staples
Procedure Quick Reference

Stitching by Staples

Add stitching by staples information to drawing. Add as


much or as little information as required. Expand the
dialog box to add more information. Leader lines identify
the staple stitched location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Stitching by

Staples Symbol

Weld Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding
Index annotation. You can use a combination of typing text
and selections from the context menu.

Full dialog
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Datum Identifier
Procedure Quick Reference

Datum Identifier

Add datum identifier to drawing.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Datum

Identifier

Datum Type one or more datum identifier symbols in the field.


Identifier
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Marking Symbol
Procedure Quick Reference

Marking Symbol

Add marking symbol annotations to the drawing. The


marking symbol is represented by a reference to
technical requirements. The reference appears in a
circle accompanied by marking content and method
annotation.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Marking

Symbol

Contents and Select contents and marking method.


Technique
Leader-based Text Edit text that appears on the leader line
summarizing Contents and Methods.
Tech Requirements Add reference to technical requirements.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Stamping Symbol
Procedure Quick Reference

Stamping Symbol

Add stamping symbol annotations to the drawing.


The marking symbol is represented by a reference to
technical requirements. The reference appears in a
triangle accompanied by marking content and
method annotation.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Stamping

Symbol

Content and Select contents and marking method.


Technique
Leader-based Text Edit text that appears on the leader line
summarizing Contents and Methods.
Tech Requirements Add reference to technical requirements.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Surface Covering
Procedure

The surface covering symbol draws a dashed-dotted offset curve for surfaces that
require a covering. This command is used with the ESKD Leader Text command
to provide detailed information for the surface covering.

To add one or more surface covering symbols, complete the following steps:

1. On the ribbon, click Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols


panel Surface Covering. A plus (+) sign and a box
appear beside the cursor.
2. Place the cursor on the surface where you want to
add the surface covering. The surface color changes
when you hover over the surface.
3. Click the appropriate surface or surfaces.
4. Right-click after making your selections. A context
menu appears.
5. From the context menu, click Continue. A dotted line
appears beside the selected surface and a line is
added under the Sketched Symbols node in the
browser.
6. To complete the action, right-click to display a
context menu.
7. From the context menu, click Done (Esc). The plus
sign is removed from the cursor.

Add Leader Text

Edit Surface Covering Symbol

Delete Surface Covering Symbol


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations >

Technical Requirements
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Technical Requirements Settings


Change text settings in the Technical Requirements dialog box.

Access:
Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Format panel Technical
Requirements Settings

Text Settings
Text Height: H Text height of a requirement line.
Line Spacing Distance between lines in the Technical
Requirements, in terms of H.
Item Spacing Distance between items.
Left Indent Indent distance for first line in item.
Column Width Width of column containing the requirements.
Use period after Check to add a period after the item number.
numbers
Text Location
Horizontal Offset Horizontal offset from top left corner of the
title block.
Vertical Offset Vertical offset from top left corner of the title
block.
Line Limit Set the number of lines that appear in the
requirement.
Alternate Text
Location
Horizontal Offset Horizontal offset from top left corner of the
title block.
Vertical Offset Vertical offset from drawing sheet bottom
border.
Line Limit (2nd Defines the number of lines for second
column) column. If technical requirements contain too
many items, which fill completely the first
and second columns, the remaining items are
allocated in the third column.
allocated in the third column.
Limit for Sets the limit for widow/orphan lines. If this
Widow/Orphan parameter is set to 0, there is no elimination
lines of widow/orphan lines.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD >

Parts List
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Parts List: Print


Identify the printer and printer setting, number of copies to print, and pages to
print.

Access:
Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Table panel Parts List Print

Name Select the printer to use to print the parts


list.
Status Indicates the printer status.
Type Printer name and type.
Where Printer location.
Comment Information about the printer.
Current Page Click to print the currently displayed page
only.
All Click to print all pages.
Pages in Range Click to print the range of pages identified in
the From and To fields.
From Beginning page number in a range of pages
to print.
To Ending page number in a range of pages to
print.
Number of Copies Specify the number of copies you want to
print.
Collate Place the parts list pages in numerical order.
This option is enabled if you elect to print two
or more copies.
Best Fit Place the parts list on the drawing so that it
fits on one page.
Custom Click to identify the number of columns to
place on a page.
Custom field Specify the number of columns to place on
the page.
Preview button View how the parts list looks on a printed
page.
Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List >

Edit Parts List


Concept Procedure

Editing the parts list includes changing the content by adding or removing
information, formatting the parts list, and changing the update behavior.

To edit the cell content, complete the following steps:

From the parts list, click twice in the cell you want to change or click
the text in the cell. A cursor appears in the cell.

Type your changes in the cell.

Press enter to accept the change in the cell.

Note Your changes are not permanent until you click OK and close the dialog box
or until you place the parts list on the drawing.

Undo Action

Redo Action

Delete Entry

Add Static Value

Move item to new category

Save item overrides to BOM

Add category

Add custom category

Remove category

Renumber category

Sort category

Sort parts list

Renumber all items

Renumber contiguous rows


Insert empty row

Change parts list table settings


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List >

Edit Parts List on Drawing


Concept Procedure

Before making the changes described, be sure to place the parts list on the
drawing. All of the following procedures are accessed from a context menu.
Procedures for all items on the context menu are not covered in this topic. The
procedures covered include editing the parts list from the drawing, editing the
table style, rotate the parts list, view the bill of materials, and delete the parts
list.

To edit the parts list from the drawing, complete the following steps:

1. From the drawing, right-click the parts list. A context menu appears.

2. From the context menu, click Edit Parts List.... The Parts List dialog
box appears.

3. Make changes in the parts list dialog box.

4. Click OK to save the changes. The Parts List dialog box closes and the
parts list on the drawing is updated.

Edit Table Style

View the BOM

Delete the parts list from the drawing


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List >

Export Parts List


Concept Procedure

Export information from the parts list to an Excel spreadsheet. You can use the
default spreadsheet, choose another spreadsheet provided with the application, or
add your own spreadsheet.

To export a spreadsheet, complete the following steps:

1. From the Parts List dialog box toolbar, click the Export button. The
Save As dialog box appears.

2. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to
save the file.

3. In the File name field, type a file name.

4. Click OK to begin the export and save the file. When the export is
complete, the Save As dialog box closes.

Note To view the exported file, either open the file from Excel or from Windows
Explorer.

Preview parts list in excel

Select Excel template

Add custom template


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings >

Exploded views and presentations

Topics in this section

Exploded views and presentations


Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Exploded views and presentations >

Exploded views and presentations


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Tweak Component

Specifies distance, direction, and other settings for a


selected component or group of components when
adding tweaks to an exploded presentation view.

Access: Ribbon: Presentation tab Create panel Tweak Components

Create Tweak

Transformations

Clear
Autodesk Inventor >

Collaboration and Visualization

Topics in this section

Render and animate with Inventor Studio


Translate data
Share data
Design Assistant
Autodesk Inventor Tools
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Render and animate with Inventor


Studio

Topics in this section

Render and animate overview


Styles for rendering
Rendering Images
Animating in Studio
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Render and animate overview


Concept Quick Reference

Studio scene browser


Graphically illustrates assembly hierarchy, without parameters. Provides a set of
folders unique to Studio. Shows and hides selected components, and provides
alternate access to functions from the context menu.

The context menus for browser content in the studio environment is different
from the menus in the assembly environment.

Whenever animation objects are added to lists, browser, and so on, they are
followed by a number in sequence. This is to allow multiple object creation
without name duplication. You can easily change names by slow double-clicking
the name in the browser and then entering the name you want to use.

Access: Enter the Studio environment.

Productions

Animations

Lighting (style)

Cameras

Animation Favorites

Local Lights

Representations

Origin

Model Nodes

Context menu commands


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Styles for rendering


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Lights in Lighting Styles


Create and edit lights in lighting styles.

Access: On the ribbon, click Render tab Scene panel Lighting


Styles . In the Studio browser, double-click the icon in front of
a light style.
or
In the Lighting Styles dialog box, styles list, click a light.

General tab

Illumination tab

Shadows tab

Directional tab

Point tab

Spot tab

Lighting Styles dialog box, Light context menu commands

Lighting Styles, Light browser node context menu commands


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Rendering Images
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Render Image
Specifies general settings for rendering images.

Access: Ribbon: Render tab Render panel Render Image

When you select the Realistic or Illustration style, it is applied to the entire image.
Only one style can be applied at one time. Changes to the applied style must be
done as a post process in an image editor.

General tab

Output tab (Render Image only)

Style tab - Realistic

Style tab - Illustration

Rendering Tutorial
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio >

Animating in Studio
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Render Animation
Specifies general settings for rendering animations.

Access: Ribbon: Render tab Render panel Render Animation

When you select the Realistic or Illustration style, it is applied to the entire image
or animation. Only one style can be applied at one time. Changes to the applied
style must be done as a post process in an image editor.

General tab

Output tab

Style tab - Realistic

Style tab - Illustration

Rendering Tutorial
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Translate data

Topics in this section

Parts and assemblies from other CAD systems


DWG Translation
Create a template to import DWG data
Export drawing data to AutoCAD
Export parts, assemblies, and more
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Parts and assemblies from other CAD


systems
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Choose a translator
Choose from the list of potential translators to import the selected file. The
translators listed depend on the type of file selected.

Access: Do one of the following:

Translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file:

Click Open, set Files of type to All Files


(*.*), and click a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or assembly
(*.asm, *.asm.1) file.
Drag a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or assembly (*.asm,
*.asm.1) file from Windows Explorer and drop onto
the Autodesk Inventor title bar.
Place into an open Autodesk Inventor assembly:
In an assembly file, click Place, set Files of type to All
Files (*.*), and click a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or
assembly (*.asm, *.asm.1) file.
Drag a part (*.prt, *.prt.1) or assembly (*.asm,
*.asm.1) file from Windows Explorer and drop into
the graphics window.

Available Translators for (file type). Lists the translators that can be chosen to
import the selected file.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

DWG Translation
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

DWG/DXF File Import Wizard


The DWG/DXF File Wizard imports parts, assemblies, and drawings with
associative relationships with Autodesk Inventor drawing views and annotations.

Note on opening DWG files

Access: Click Open and select the appropriate file. If you are
importing a DWG file, click Options, select Import options, and
then click OK. Click Open to start the DWG File wizard.

DWG File Import Options

Model/Layout Options

Import Destination Options


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Create a template to import DWG data

When you create a Autodesk Inventor file, you use a template to set the
measurement units of the file, specify common file properties, and include
elements or even content that is common between files.

You can develop as many templates as you need and make them available for
creating new files.

When you import AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop files in Autodesk Inventor, you
can choose templates to use in the Import Destination Options dialog box for
creating the part, assembly, and drawing files that result.

A drawing becomes a template when you save it in the Templates folder. For
example, if you have a drawing file that contains the setup you want to use for
other drawings, save a copy of it in the Autodesk\Inventor [revision]\Templates
folder. The next time you create a drawing file, the new template is available.

Tips for creating templates for imported DWG files

Remove any unwanted content from the templates. It can include sketch
geometry, features, or standard drawing views.

Set the measurement units and other document settings.

Set file properties that are common to the files you import.

In part and assembly templates, set up color, texture, lighting, and


material styles.

In drawing templates, set up drawing resources, dimension styles, text


styles, and drafting standards.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Export drawing data to AutoCAD


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Export DWG File Options


Specifies options for exporting Autodesk Inventor drawings or sheet metal flat
patterns to AutoCAD DWG (.dwg) files. You can save the settings as a
configuration for saving other .dwg or .dxf files.

You can export an Autodesk Inventor drawing file in AutoCAD format to translate
the content into AutoCAD objects and to access to the AutoCAD geometric
entities in the view blocks (for example, lines, arcs circles, and so on).

Note on saving drawing files as Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg)

Access: In the Save Copy As dialog box, change the file type to
AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg), and then click Options. When you
finish the settings in each dialog box, click Next to open the
subsequent dialog box.

Click the following choices to display information about the settings in each dialog
box.

DWG File Export Options

AutoCAD Mechanical Export Options

Export Destination

Mapping Options
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data >

Export parts, assemblies, and more


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Bitmap Export Options


You can save a snapshot of the graphics window as a bitmap file. The default
creates a bitmap the size of the active graphics view, but you can change X and Y
values.

Access: In the File Save As dialog box, set the file type to BMP, and
then click Options.

Enter an integer.

Resolution

Set X and Y both to 0 to generate an image the same size as the on-
screen image in the current active view.

Set either X or Y to 0 (not both) to have the non-zero dimension value


used as given and the zero dimension set to whatever value preserves
the shape of the on-screen image

Set both X and Y to non-zero values to center the field of view the
same as the on-screen image, but the portion of the scene included in
the view may be different. .
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Share data

Topics in this section

Publish to DWF
DWF markup
Insert objects
AEC exchange
Engineers Notebook
Task Scheduler application
Use i-drop to access parts within Web pages
Communication Center
CAD Manager Control Utility
Subscription Center
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Publish to DWF
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

DWF Output - Complete


When you Publish a file using the Complete option, the published content varies
based on the file type as described in the following table.

Document Condition DWF output - complete


type
Part (IPT) General The DWF file represents
the current state of the
model
Sheet Metal If a folded model and flat
pattern exists, the DWF file
includes it
iPart factory The DWF file includes all
members and member
table
iPart member The DWF file represents
the current state of the
model
Stress Analysis The DWF file includes the
current state of the model
with stress\constraint
indicators and stress scale.

Document Condition DWF output - complete


type
Assembly General The DWF file includes the
(IAM) assembly with design
views, positional
representations, and
enabled BOM views.
iAssembly factory The DWF file includes all
members and member
table with design views,
positional representations,
and enabled BOM views..
iAssembly The DWF file includes the
member assembly with design
views, positional
representations, and
enabled BOM views.
enabled BOM views.
Weldment The DWF file includes the
assembly with design
views, positional
representations, enabled
BOM views, weld beads,
and weld symbols.
LOD Master The DWF file includes the
assembly with design
views, positional
representations, and
enabled BOM views.
LOD Non-Master Only the active LOD only
publishes to DWF.
However, all design views,
positional representations,
and enabled BOM views
publish.

Document Condition DWF output - complete


type
Presentation General The DWF file includes all
(IPN) presentation views,
animations, assembly
instructions, and referenced
assembly with complete
contents.

Document Condition DWF output - complete


type
Drawing General The DWF file includes all
(IDW, sheets, tables, and
DWG) referenced models with
complete contents for the
models.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

DWF markup
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Sheet Properties
Displays the sheet properties and a preview of the sheet.

The information is informational only. You cannot edit the edit field.

Access:

Click Open. Select a DWF file containing markups. In


the Markups browser, right-click the sheet, and select
Properties.

Following properties appear with their values:

Sheet Status

Sheet Name

Parent File

File Location

File Size

Modified

Last Save by
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Insert objects
Procedure

Insert objects into models or drawings

You can link or embed external files (such as spreadsheets or word processing
documents) in an Autodesk Inventor model or drawing. When you insert an
object, a 3rd Party folder is added as the first folder in the browser. All linked or
embedded files are found under the 3rd Party folder.

1. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object.

2. In the Insert Object dialog box, choose the options to achieve the
desired result:

To create a file, select the object type and select Create New.
The application for the object type opens so that you can
create the object. The new object is embedded in the model or
drawing and does not exist as a separate file.

To embed the content of an existing file, select Create from


File then click Browse to find the file. After the file is
embedded, you can make changes that do not affect the
source file.
Note You can link to an embedded file from another Inventor
model or drawing. When you edit the external file from the
linked file and save the edits, only the Inventor file where the
external file was embedded is updated. Close the external file
to update the linked Inventor file.

To link to an existing file, select Create from File, select Link,


and then click Browse to find the file. After the file is added to
the Autodesk Inventor file, any changes you make also change
the source file. Save the edits to show the updates in
Autodesk Inventor.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

AEC exchange
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Check Design
Contains information related to the model and building components.

Access: Ribbon: AEC Exchange tab Manage panel Check

Design
In the Export Building Components dialog box, click
Check Design.

A check mark next to a node indicates the item is OK. An exclamation next to a
node indicates the item needs attention.

Click Clipboard to copy the data to the operation system clipboard and make it
available to paste in a word processing or spreadsheet application.

Indicates there are no issues with the item.

Indicates that there is a potential problem with the item and it


requires attention. Models can be exported with this icon
showing except for the Component Type node. The Component
Type is a required field.

The Model Complexity it determined by the number of faces and the number of
components in the model as follows:

Low Number of occurrences: < 25


Number of faces: < 500
Medium Number of occurrences: > 24 and < 100
Number of faces: > 499 and < 2000
High Number of occurrences: > 99
Number of faces: > 1999
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Engineers Notebook
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Engineer’s Notebook browser


Lists all the notes in a part or assembly. The browser provides options for sorting
and organizing notes.

Note list

Browser menu
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Task Scheduler application

Task Scheduler is a separate application that performs automated tasks and acts
as a batch processor in Autodesk Inventor and other applications.

To open Task Scheduler, click Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


(version) Tools Task Scheduler.

Use the Task Scheduler to organize and define one or more time-consuming tasks
from different types of programs, and execute the tasks in a specified order at a
time that you schedule. Close the Task Scheduler window, and the tasks you
scheduled run at the specified time.

Task Scheduler contains predefined task managers for executing common tasks,
and a custom task manager for defining your own tasks. A Sequential Task
manager is provided to set up multiple predefined and custom tasks. The Migrate
Files task is used to migrate files directly from the Vault.

In addition to Custom and Sequential tasks, the predefined tasks include:

Migrate Files

Update Design

Publish DWF Files

Print Files

Import and Export Files

Check In to Vault

Check Out from Vault

Get Latest Version from Vault

Convert IDW to DWG

Refresh Standard Components in Assemblies

More detailed Help is available in the Task Scheduler.


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Use i-drop to access parts within Web


pages
Concept Procedure

Create custom Team Web files

Using i-drop parts requires ActiveX. If you do not have ActiveX installed on your
computer you can download it here:
http://www.autodesk.com/prods/idrop/download/idrop.cab

1. Save the part you want to make available as an iPart to C:\Program


Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\.

2. Close Autodesk Inventor.

3. Using a graphics program, create a BMP of the iPart you want to


display on your Web page.

4. Open to edit C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor


[version]\Web\my_template.xml

5. Replace my_image1.bmp with the name of your BMP file.

6. Replace the caption, My Template of i-drop Parts with a caption you


want displayed on this page.

7. Replace my_part1.ipt with the name of the part you want to make
available as an iPart.
Note my_part1.ipt is referenced twice. Replace both instances with the
name of your part

8. Save the file to C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor


[version]\Web\ with a new name, and then close the file.

9. Open to edit C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor


[version]\Web\WebTemplate.htm

10. Replace my_template1.xml with the name you have given your new
XML file.

11. Save C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor


[version]\Web\WebTemplate.htm\WebTemplate.htm as
SampleWeb.htm.
Note If you give WebTemplate.htm a name different from
SampleWeb.htm, modify the Team Web address specified in: Tools tab
Options panel Application Options File.

12. Start Autodesk Inventor. On the ribbon, click Tools tab Web panel
Team Web.

Your new TeamWeb page displays.


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Communication Center
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Communication Center
Until you configure the Communication Center, the only option available is to
select your country and update preference.

Access:

At the right end of the Status bar, click the Live Update icon.

Specify your country and preferred update frequency specifies the country
for which you want the Live Update information to localize.

Connect to the Internet and download available information downloads the


latest updates and announcements.

Specify which information channels you want to view selects the information
channels you want Communication Center to access.

Settings

Channels
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

CAD Manager Control Utility


Concept Procedure

Install patches using local patch lists

You can use a local patch list to specify the patches you want to receive from
Live Update. To create a local patch list:

1. Download a patch file and the associated patch list text file from the
Autodesk Web site.

2. Review any associated README files.

3. Store the patch file in a location that users can access.

4. Use the CAD Manager Control utility so users can access the
Communication Center.

5. In Live Update Configuration, select Enable Using Local Patch List.

6. Enter the path to your local patch list.

Save changes to your computer


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data >

Subscription Center

Subscription customers can access the Subscription Center, which provides


resources such as e-Learning and Web support. To access these resources, install
the CAD Manager utility. The CAD Manager utility is on the Autodesk Inventor
installation CD.

After you install the CAD Manager, go to the Subscription Center tab on the CAD
Manager Control Utility and select the Subscription Center check box. Go to Start
Programs Autodesk Tools CAD Manager Control Utility Autodesk
Inventor CAD Manager Control Utility.

Selecting the Subscription Center check box gives you access to subscription
resources listed on the Help menu in Autodesk Inventor:

e_Learning Catalog accesses self-paced lessons to give you hands-on


experience.

Create Support Request sets up Web-based technical support for installation,


configuration, and troubleshooting.

View Support Requests lists your support requests. You can update or add
attachments.

Resolved Error Reports lists resolved error reports. You can click a report to
see advice about updates or configuration.

Edit Subscription Center Profile describes information about your system and
its configuration.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Design Assistant

Topics in this section

Use Design Assistant


Package files
Manage links between files
iProperties
Projects and Libraries
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Use Design Assistant


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Design Assistant
Design Assistant maintains links between Autodesk Inventor files, locates
referenced files in folders, previews files with a thumbnail sketch, and manages
file properties.

Access: Click Manage Design Assistant, and then click


Properties.
From Microsoft Windows Explorer, select one or more Autodesk
Inventor files or a folder containing Autodesk Inventor files,
right-click, and then select Design Assistant from the menu,
and click Properties.

Note If you drag an Autodesk Inventor file from Microsoft Windows Explorer into
an active Design Assistant session, the file in the active session is replaced with
the new file. Unsaved changes in the current file are lost.

Properties

Preview

Manager
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Package files
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Find missing referenced files - Pack and Go


Locates a referenced file that was not found during a Pack and Go packing
process.

Access: Automatically displayed if file is not found during packing


process.

Start Pack and Go using one of the following methods:

From Design Assistant, select an Autodesk Inventor file (.iam, .ipt, .idw,
.dwg (Autodesk Inventor Drawing), .ipn) in the browser, right-click, and
then select Pack and Go.

Look in Shows path of the active directory.


Open Adds the selected file. The packing process
continues.
Cancel Cancels the packing process and displays the Pack
and Go dialog box without referenced files.
Set Project Sets the project file used for file path resolution
File during packing process. Automatically restarts
packing process.
Skip Skips the missing referenced file and continues
packing process. Skipped file is not included in
packaged assembly.
Skip All Skips all missing referenced files and continues
packing process. Skipped files are not included in
packaged assembly.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Manage links between files


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Design Assistant Manager


The Design Assistant Manager provides options for managing associations
between Autodesk Inventor files. You can:

View relationships between files.

Rename files.

Create a copy of a single file with a different name.

Copy an assembly with a different name to create a new assembly.

When you make changes, Design Assistant Manager updates any references in
associated assembly, part, or drawing files and displays the new relationships.

Use Design Manager only for files in a single-user or a shared project. You cannot
use Design Manager for files in a semi-isolated project

You cannot use Design Manager to work with links to external files such as
Mechanical Desktop parts, word processing, spreadsheet, or text files.

Note Before working with Autodesk Inventor files created in a previous release,
open them in the current release to migrate the data format.

Access: From Microsoft Windows Explorer, select an Autodesk Inventor


file, right-click, and select Design Assistant from the menu.
Click the Manage icon.

Note

If you open Design Assistant from within Autodesk Inventor or from a


folder in Microsoft Windows Explorer, the Design Assistant Manager is
not available.

If you drag an Autodesk Inventor file from Microsoft Windows Explorer


into an active Design Assistant session, the file in the active session is
replaced with the new file. Unsaved changes in the current file are lost.

The Design Assistant Manager browser has two sections:


Top browser

Lower browser
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

iProperties
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Properties - iProperties tab


Opens the Autodesk Inventor properties (iProperties) dialog box so you can set
the file properties specific to Autodesk Inventor files.

Access: From Windows Explorer, select an Autodesk Inventor file, right-


click, and then select Properties from the menu. Click the
iProperties tab.

Click the iProperties button to open the dialog box.


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant >

Projects and Libraries


Concept Procedure

Use best practices in projects

Create projects

Edit projects

Change the active project

Set search paths for projects

Find where files are used

Find specific objects in Autodesk Inventor files

Set paths for iPart factories in projects


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

Learn about Projects


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Project Setup
Sets the project file for the active Design Assistant work session. Design Assistant
uses the project file to determine the workspace and search paths available for
the session.

Access: The Projects Setup dialog box is displayed if the default project
location is not defined.

Project Folder:

Specifies the location of the Project Files to use for the active Design Assistant
work session.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

Project libraries

A library is a collection of related data files that you reference but usually don't
modify, such as a released data set, a set of commonly used components, iPart
factory parts, or standard parts. Libraries are located in a folder with a unique
name separate from other data files. A single library can be used across any
number of projects. You can use some or all files in a library.

In a project file, you right-click the Libraries location, and then use menu options
to browse to a folder. By assigning the folder as a library, you indicate that the
files are no longer editable using Autodesk Inventor. It is a good practice to use
Microsoft Windows Explorer to set your library folders and files as read-only.

References to library files include the library name, as well as the relative path
from the library folder to the referencing file. When resolving library references,
only the named library is searched. It is a good practice to avoid using duplicate
file names whenever possible, even for parts in different folders or different
libraries. If you cannot control where referenced parts originate or how they are
named, files in different libraries might have the same name. Autodesk Inventor
can resolve the reference because it knows which library to search in.

To share libraries across design workgroups

You can eliminate the need for each member of a design workgroup to set the
names and paths manually in their individual projects for the libraries to share.

1. An administrator creates a common project with one or more library


paths.

2. Each team member creates a personal project, using the common


project as a template.
When you create a project using the project editor, select the common
project before you click the New button. By default, the new project
created by the wizard uses the selected project as a template, and has
the same library definitions as the template project.

A project can include several kinds of libraries:

Standard content

iPart Factory

Proxy libraries
Another design set
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

Collaborative design
Concept Procedure

Use Autodesk Inventor in workgroups


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries > Collaborative design >

Projects for collaborative design


Concept Procedure

Use Autodesk Inventor in workgroups

If you are working in a design team, the CAD Administrator typically sets up the
working environment and develops the projects for team members. A project
specifies the locations where Autodesk Inventor searches for files.

Before working on a collaborative project, specify the project to use and set
options.

Set Autodesk Inventor project type

To check out files stored in a workgroup location

To check in files to a workgroup location

To copy files to your workspace

To update referenced files


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries > Collaborative design >

Tools for working collaboratively

Autodesk Inventor provides tools for concurrent design so that members of a


group can share design data and work in the context of the same assembly
without making conflicting edits.

The tools include:

A project editor that manages projects a designer is working on, defines


the locations of all files associated with a project, provides quick
navigation to key project locations, and simplifies moving and copying
folders associated with a project without breaking cross file references.

A file status browser in the shared and semi-isolated projects shows the
status of all open files in a project, and checks files in and out to avoid
conflicting edits.

The semi-isolated project saves changes to files in a personal


workspace. Changes are not visible to others on the design team until
the edited files are checked in.

Autodesk Vault, when installed, isolates source files from files checked
out to designers. Changes must be checked in to the vault before they
are visible to other designers. Database queries access file properties,
references, and past configurations.

The Engineer's Notebook captures design information and other notes.

The Design Assistant tracks and manages file properties, links between
files, and other important information about Autodesk Inventor files.

Additional tools are provided for extended design teams. Tools for extended
design teams save all types of Autodesk Inventor design data into package
formats. Package formats optimize both 2D and 3D digital CAD data for
distributing outside the design department and viewing in Autodesk Streamline.

Once package files are published to Autodesk Streamline, all members of


extended design teams can view, manipulate, and mark up files in a secure Web-
based environment. It includes team members who may not own Autodesk
Inventor.

See the Autodesk Streamline Web site for additional product information and
purchase options.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

File versions

Each time you save changes, a new version of the file is created in your
workspace, and the previous version is moved to the OldVersions\ folder. Other
designers who are referencing the file continue to see the earlier version of the
file and do not see the new version until you check the file back in to the
workgroup location in semi-isolated projects, or save the file in shared projects,
and they refresh their view of the assembly.

What happens when you save a file?

How do projects control file versions?

Why would you use old versions of files?

How do file versions integrate with a PDM?


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

Set search paths


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Find String
Specifies a string (such as a referenced file name) and searches for it in all files
listed in the Design Assistant Manager browser.

Access:
Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to select an assembly file,
right-click, and then select Design Assistant.
Click the Manage icon to activate the Design Assistant Manager.
Select Tools Find String from the menu.

Search Enter the string into the box, and then click OK to
String initiate the search. When the search is complete, the
file names are highlighted in the Design Assistant
Manager browser.
Note The search on the string is case sensitive.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

Paths for iPart factory parts


Concept Procedure

Set paths for iPart factories in projects

In a project file, define a library for both the folder containing the iPart factory
part files and a corresponding proxy folder. After the libraries are added to the
project, you can add the iParts to an assembly.

1. Verify that all Autodesk Inventor files are closed.

2. In the Project Editor, double-click a project to activate it.

3. In the lower pane, right-click the Libraries category, and then click Add
Path. Browse to the folder or enter the name of the library folder to
add a new library path for the iPart factory file.

4. If the folder was created previously, right-click the newly created


library path, and then click Add Proxy Path on the menu. Browse to
the folder location and select it.
For custom iPart factories only, enter a location for the iPart factory
proxy file. A proxy folder is created automatically with the same name
as the iPart factory library, but with a leading underscore (_)
character.

If the proxy folder does not exist, use Microsoft Windows Explorer to create it
before you add the proxy path or use Add Path again and specify the new folder
path. Name the new library the same as the iPart factory library preceded with an
underscore character.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and
Libraries >

File locations for Mechanical Desktop


parts
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Link Mechanical Desktop File Options


Sets the units of measurement and template for the Mechanical Desktop file when
you are placing it in as a component in an Autodesk Inventor assembly.

Access:
In an assembly file, click Assemble tab Component panel
Place, and then select a Mechanical Desktop file in the Open
dialog box. The Link Mechanical Desktop File Options dialog box
opens so that you can specify the measurement units for the
file.

Note If the path to the selected file is not specified in the active project, a series
of dialog boxes are displayed so that you can add the path.

Units of Specifies the units of measurement that are


Mechanical assumed in the Mechanical Desktop part. Click the
Desktop arrow and select the units type from the list.
part
Template Specifies the Autodesk Inventor part template to
File use. The template controls the display of the part in
the assembly, including the units of measurement,
display color, and any other attributes that are set in
the template.
Note You can use the same standard template that
you use to create parts, or customize a template
that you use for Mechanical Desktop parts.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization >

Autodesk Inventor Tools

Topics in this section

Add-In Manager
Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard
Autodesk Multi-Sheet Plot
Style Library Manager
Style Management Wizard
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Add-In Manager
Procedure Quick Reference

Add-In Manager
Lists the Autodesk Inventor add-ins that are installed on the system. You can
load or unload any displayed add-in.

Sort the list by name or load behavior by clicking the column header. Press CTRL
+ click to select multiple items on the list.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Add-Ins

Start menu: Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


[version] Tools Add-In Manager.

Available Add-Ins and Load Behavior

Description

Load Behavior

Note If you change the status of an add-in, the change is not effective until you
click OK.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard


Procedure Quick Reference

Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard


The Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard is a command that copies drawing
resources from a source drawing to a target drawing. Close Autodesk Inventor
before you can use the wizard. Use the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard to:

Transfer selected title blocks, borders, and sketched symbols to multiple


drawings.

Optionally replace existing resources in the target drawing.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


[version] Tools Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard.

Welcome page Describes the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard processes.

Select Source Drawing and Resources page Selects the source drawing, shows
a preview image, and lists drawing resources.

Source Drawing selects files to process in a detailed view.

Preview, if available, shows a thumbnail view of the source drawing.

Source Resource shows the drawing resources hierarchy.

Select Target Drawings page Selects the target drawing or multiple drawings.
Navigate to the appropriate folder.

Add drawings opens the Select Target Drawings so you


can browse to the desired folder to select one or more
target drawings.
A target drawing can be listed only once. Click the File or
Path column name to sort files.
Skipped Files dialog box opens if a target file:
Is the same as the source drawing.
Is already listed.
Is read-only.
Has not been migrated to the current version of
Autodesk Inventor.
Next progresses to the next page when one or more target
drawing is specified.

Select Option page Specifies how to handle drawing resources in the target file
that have the same name as drawing resources in the source file.

Yes replaces drawing resources in the target file with the same name as
resources in the source file.

No gives a unique name to target drawing resources that have the same name as
those in the source file. The copied resource is named Copy of ResourceName.
The target drawing version retains its original name.

Begin the Batch Processing page Shows progress of transferred selected


borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols.

Start begins processing of selected files.

Pause temporarily halts transferring resources.

Cancel halts processing.

Results of the processing are shown in a log file.


Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Autodesk Multi-Sheet Plot


Procedure Quick Reference

Multi-sheet plot
Plots a collection of drawing sheets of one or more sizes. You can schedule
plotting so that several jobs print in a batch at a specified time.

Access: From the Start menu, click Programs Autodesk Autodesk


Inventor [version] Autodesk Multi-sheet plot.

Page Setup

Select Drawing Files

Select Project

Preview

Print
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Style Library Manager


Procedure Quick Reference

Create New Style Library


Creates a style library by specifying the creation method, the library location, and
the source library.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


Tools Style Library Manager. In the Style Library Manager,
click the Create New Style Library button.

In the Create New Style Library dialog box:

Creation Method selects how you want to create the library. Click the arrow to
choose Copy Existing Style Library, and then modify as appropriate or Create
Empty Style Library, and then select styles from one or more libraries.

New Style Library Location browses to the folder where you want to store the
new library.

Source Style Library to Copy browses to the library you want to copy when the
creation method is Copy. Unavailable when the creation method creates an empty
style library.
Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools >

Style Management Wizard


Procedure Quick Reference

Style Management Wizard


The Style Management Wizard is a tool for administrators to assist in batch-style
management for Autodesk Inventor files. Using the Style Management Wizard,
you can:

Harvest styles from Autodesk Inventor files and place them in a target
style library.

Purge styles from Autodesk Inventor files. Purging removes unused style
information and can be beneficial in large assemblies by reducing
required memory.

Use the Style Management Wizard when transitioning to using a style library with
your design project.

Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor


Tools Style Management Wizard.

All files must migrate to the latest version of Autodesk Inventor. Files that
are not migrated are skipped during batch processing, including assemblies
that are migrated but contain components that are not migrated.
Welcome page Describes the Harvest Styles and Purge Styles
processes.
Projects to Lists all defined projects by Name and Project Location.
Manage page The active project is indicated by a check mark. Its
settings for Style Library and path are summarized
below the window. Double-click to select a project and
make it active. The Style Management Wizard uses the
active project to resolve all file paths during processing.
Files to Process Selects files to process in a detailed view.
Add Specific Files button Browses to the folder that
contains the files to process. Selected files are listed by
file name, file type, and path.
Add All Files in Active Project button Lists all files by
file name, type, and path. Clear the check box to
exclude a file from processing.
Alternate methods of adding files to the list:
Drag and drop files from Microsoft Windows
Explorer. Drop them in the list to add them.
Get all files referenced by a specific file by
right-clicking the file in the process list, and
right-clicking the file in the process list, and
then selecting Get Referenced Files. Adds all
files that the selected file is dependent on to
the list.
Get all drawings or presentations that use
a specific file by right-clicking a file in the
process list. Select Drawings and
Presentations, and then Get All. Adds to the
process list all drawings and presentations in
the project search paths that use the specific
file.
Select Chooses a harvest or purge operation.
Management Harvest Styles into Target Style Library specifies the
Options page target style library.
Use Source Project Style Library
Automatically selects the style library specified
in the project. Clear the check box of files you
want to exclude from processing.
Create a New Style Library Opens the New
Style Library dialog box. Specify to copy an
existing style library or create an empty library.
Browse to the folder where the library will be
stored, and if copying, the source style library
you are copying.
Select an Existing Style Library Lists the
Default Style Library and any project that uses
a style library. Use the Browse button to browse
to a specific library.
Purge All Unused Styles from Files automatically
deletes unused styles from selected documents. Styles
not saved to a styles library are permanently lost.
Begin Batch Starts batch processing, using previously selected
Processing options.
Press Pause to halt the processing temporarily or Cancel
to stop.
Autodesk Inventor >

Design Optimization

Topics in this section

Find and correct design errors


AutoLimits
Parameters in models
Edit models
Derived parts and assemblies
Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Find and correct design errors


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Command message dialog box


Provides information about problems that occur as you design in Autodesk
Inventor. The title of the dialog box identifies the failed operation. To resize the
dialog box, drag a corner of the box.

Access: The command message dialog box is displayed when an


operation cannot be successfully completed. For example, it
appears when a specified fillet radius is larger than the edge to
which it is applied or when an extrusion is specified to act as a
cut does not intersect with another feature.

Tip When command message dialog box is open, you can use the shortcut keys
to change the view in the graphics window.

Press F2 to pan.

Press F3 to zoom.

Press F4 to rotate.

Message list

Copy button

Options
Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

AutoLimits
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

AutoLimits Settings
Use AutoLimits Settings to accept or to change defaults. Settings apply to all
AutoLimits created in the future, but do not affect previously created AutoLimits.

Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab AutoLimits panel AutoLimits Settings

Default Sets visibility preferences for OK, Warning, and Serious


Visibility Warning levels. Sets boundaries for each AutoLimit type.
Some options may not be available for all AutoLimit types.
The defaults for AutoLimit indicator visibility are displayed
when the dialog box is opened. Select On to display or Off
to turn off display of the indicator.
Green OK (data within normal limits). Default
setting is Off to avoid clutter in the
graphics window.
In individual AutoLimits, the default range
is 90-110%. That is, monitored values that
fall within that range are considered to be
acceptable.
Yellow Warning (data approaching limit of target
range). Default setting is On.
In individual AutoLimits, the default upper
range is 110-130%. The default lower
range is 70-90%. Monitored values that fall
within that range are considered to be out
of the ideal range.
Red Serious Warning (data exceeds target
range). Default setting is On.
In individual AutoLimits, the default range
is less than 60 or greater than 140 or 50-
70 or 130-150 depending on how you set
it.
Boundaries In the AutoLimit Settings browser, expand AutoLimits to
show individual AutoLimit types. Select a type to set
boundary conditions.
boundary conditions.
Use Model When selected, applies the model tolerance
Tolerances to each level (OK, Warning, and Serious
Warning). Select this check box to use the
tolerances already defined for the model.
Clear the check box to use tolerances set
in the boundaries of individual AutoLimits.
For example, if you create all five levels for
a particular AutoLimit, the range between
red levels is three times the model
tolerance.
Precision Selects the level of precision (number of
decimal places) for AutoLimits tolerances.
Method Selects the method to use as a range for
acceptable tolerances:
% As a percentage of a total
specified value.
+/- As numbers below or above
a total specified value.
Lower Defines the left (lower) value of the
boundary range.
Upper Defines the right (upper) value of the
boundary range.

Tool tip In the AutoLimit Settings browser, click the Tool Tip
icon to set AutoLimits Tooltip Feedback options.
Select check boxes for the information to include in a
tooltip for an AutoLimit with defined boundaries.
Once the boundaries are created, place the cursor
over a browser icon of an object to show information
related to the AutoLimit. Clear the check box to turn
off tool tips.
Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Parameters in models
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Custom Property Format


Enables the format of exported parameters to set.

Access: In the Parameters dialog box, right-click a parameter that is


designated for export and click Custom Property Format. To
designate a parameter for export, the Export Parameter check
box must be selected.

Property Export the parameter data type as either text or


Type number.
Units Select the units for the parameter export.
Format For Text Type parameters defined in inch or feet
units, the parameter can be exported in decimal or
fractional formats.

For Text Type parameters defined in degrees units,


the parameter can be exported in decimal degrees or
degrees-minutes-seconds formats.
Precision Select the precision for the parameter export.
Different choices are available based on the Format
setting.
Apply to Select the check box to apply the designated format
existing to all exported parameters in the current document.
comparable Only parameters of the same type (Length, Volume,
parameters and so on) are affected.

This option does not link the parameters for future


format changes. This option must be selected each
time a format change is to be made to all exported
parameters of the same type.
Preview Preview the parameter with export format applied.
Units For Text Type parameters, select the check box to
String append the units string to the parameter.
Leading Leading zeros are applied to the parameter if the
Zeros check box is selected.
Trailing Trailing zeros are applied to the parameter if the
Zeros check box is selected.
Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Edit models
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Measure command
On the Tools tab, Measure panel, use the Measure commands to measure
distance, angle, loop, or area. Results are displayed in the measurement box.

Access: On the Tools tab, Measure panel, select Measure Distance,


Measure Angle, Measure Loops, or Measure Area.
Or, right-click in the graphics window and select Measure, and
then select the option.

From the measure box, click the arrow to list options.

Reset Clears the measurement from the Measurement box


so that you can make another measurement.
Measure Measures length of a line, length of an arc, distance
Distance between points, radius and diameter of a circle,
distance between two components in an assembly
(minimum distance), distance between two faces, or
position of elements relative to the active coordinate
system.
Click arrow at left to change selection priority to
Component, Part, or Edges and Faces.
Measure The drop-down list is available only if your active
UCS drop- document contains a UCS. Origin option is listed first
down list in the drop-down list followed with list of UCSes in
your active document.
Shows measured distance from the origin of the part,
or center point of the selected coordinate system.
Measure Measures the angle between two lines, edges, or
Angle points.
Measure Measures the length of closed loops defined by face
Loop boundaries, or other geometry.
Measure Measures the area of contiguous, enclosed regions.
Area
Add to Adds the measurement in the Measurement box to
Accumulate accumulate a total measurement.
Clear Clears all measurements from the accumulate,
Accumulate resetting the sum to zero.
Display Displays the sum of all measurements you have
Accumulate added to the accumulate.
Precision/ Displays eight formatting values and the option to
All display all decimals.
Decimals
Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization >

Derived parts and assemblies


Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Export Objects
Enables you to specify which derivable objects to mark for export. Objects must
be marked for export in order for them to be derived. This optimizes the update
process, requesting changes to referencing documents on a per-object, rather
than per-file basis.

Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Export Objects

Provides the following command buttons, enabling you to


Status
change the status on multiple selected objects at the same
time.

Marks the selected objects for export.

Excludes the selected objects from export.


Symbols Indicates whether the object is marked for export. Either
click the icon next to an individual object and toggle the
status, or select multiple objects and click a status button at
the top of the dialog box. A hand symbol superimposed on
the item icon identifies an exported object.
Solid Body When exported, the solid body can be derived.
Note It is one object that is, by default and regardless of its
export state, implicitly marked for derive when a derive
feature is created. If you turn off export with the Export
Objects command, any derive that references the solid body
enters the Design Doctor.
Sketches When selected, any unconsumed visible 2D or 3D sketches
in the component are exported and can be derived.
Work When selected, any visible work features in the component
Geometry are exported and can be derived.
Surfaces When selected, any visible surfaces in the component are
exported and can be derived.
Parameters When selected, any parameters in the source assembly are
exported and can be derived. The Parameters folder includes
a subfolder that contains folders from the Parameters dialog
box. The Parameters and Export Objects dialog boxes share
the same parameter statuses.
iMates When selected, any iMates defined in the source assembly
are exported and can be derived.
Autodesk Inventor >

System Performance

Topics in this section

Network license
Increase performance and capacity
Increase performance in file migration
Autodesk Inventor > System Performance >

Network license

License timeout functionality

Network connectivity requirement

License borrowing

Additional Information

Contact your CAD manager for more information about using Autodesk Inventor
with a network license.
Autodesk Inventor > System Performance >

Increase performance and capacity


Concept Procedure

Application Options tips

You may find that by implementing LOD's, Shrinkwrap or Derived substitutes, and
using some of the other techniques described previously, you eliminate
performance issues. If not, the next section offers suggestions for adjusting the
Application Options to consume the least amount of resources.

Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Application Options

The following settings on the tabs listed below can affect performance and/or
capacity:

General

File

Colors

Display

Hardware

Drawing

Sketch

Notebook
Autodesk Inventor > System Performance >

Increase performance in file migration

Access:

Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor [version]


Tools Task Scheduler.

In the Task Scheduler main menu, click Create Task Migrate


Files.

TIPS

In the Migrate Files dialog box, click Options tab Total Rebuild.
Although this method takes longer than selecting an entire project at a
time for migration, following these steps ultimately increases Autodesk
Inventor performance.

Always make a backup.

Migrate all part (.ipt) files first , next all subassemblies, and finally, the
main assembly.
The following method reduces the time to open an assembly model,
since Autodesk Inventor does not need to migrate files before opening
them.
Although this method may slow down the migration, it ultimately
increases Autodesk Inventor performance.
Note This method is a faster than selecting an entire project at a time
for migration within Autodesk Inventor

To ensure the full benefit of Memory Saving Mode, migrate all your
Autodesk Inventor R10 and earlier files. To facilitate this task, use Task
Scheduler. Access Task Scheduler: Programs Autodesk Autodesk
Inventor [release] Tools Task Scheduler.

1. In the Migrate Files dialog box, click Add. Select Add Folder
to migrate 2 or more part (.ipt) files, and then select From
Local or From Vault.

2. Browse to the appropriate folder and click OK.

3. Click the down-arrow in the File name column, and select .ipt
to display only part files.

4. Once completed, repeat the previous steps for all the


subassemblies (not the main assembly).

5. Repeat the steps for the main assembly.

6. Finally, migrate the drawing (.idw) and the presentation (.ipn)


files.

Note This method is more efficient than


selecting an entire project at a time for
migration. Using this method, Autodesk
Inventor loads each part and subassembly into
memory on a one by one basis before freeing
up the memory for the item.
Migrating just the main assembly, Autodesk
Inventor loads every part and subassembly
separately into memory including reoccurring
parts and patterned assemblies. This
technique can result in "out of memory" and
stability issues with large assemblies since
Windows on a 32-bit operating system can
only allocate a maximum of 2 GB of memory
to each CPU process (this 2-GB limit may be
spread over RAM or the pagefile). With large
assemblies containing Component Patterns, it
can start to be a major issue.
Autodesk Inventor >

Glossary

active part
The part that is being edited. In an open part file, the part is active and
available for edit. In an assembly file, select the part in either the browser
or the graphics window before it can be edited. If a part or subassembly
was previously hidden or designated as background, it must be enabled
before activation. The active part may be edited. See also background,
enabled, and undisplayed parts.

active sketch
The current sketch to edit.

active standard style


In drawing documents, the default styles associated with the active
standard.

adaptive compared to associative


Associative geometry has a one-way parametric relationship between parent
and child geometry. Child geometry projected from a parent part is
dependent on parent geometry. Child geometry updates when the parent is
modified.
Adaptive geometry can have two-way dependencies. One part is designated
as fixed geometry, and its adaptive counterparts update when the fixed
geometry is changed. Whenever a part is reassigned from adaptive to fixed
geometry, then changes made to that part update the remaining adaptive
counterparts.

adaptive feature
A feature that can resize when constrained to other features. Individual part
features may be designated as adaptive using the context menu. Features
are constrained to a specified size, unless they are designated as adaptive.

adaptive part
Underconstrained part geometry can resize when designated as an adaptive
part in an assembly. Assembly constraints position adaptive parts relative to
other parts and adapt the part topology to fully constrained part features.
Features that were underconstrained in the part file can resize according to
assembly constraints and positions of other parts.

adaptive status
The status of a part that is not constrained to a specified size or shape.
Parts are rigid bodies by default, but may be designated as adaptive in the
context menu or the Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. Using
assembly constraints to adjust size and shape relative to other parts may
modify adaptive part topology. In assemblies, one occurrence sets the
adaptive status for multiple placements of a component.

adaptive subassembly
In the context of an assembly, designation of a component that contains
underconstrained parts or subassemblies. When an adaptive subassembly is
constrained within its parent assembly, or to a component in another
assembly, underconstrained geometry in an adaptive part resizes. For
example, adaptive piston and rod subassemblies are sized and positioned
when inserted in an air cylinder assembly.

adaptive work features


Construction geometry (such as work points, work planes, and work axes)
within a part that is positioned by the geometry of other parts. For
example, a 3D sweep feature relies on adaptive work points positioned
relative to other components in an assembly to establish its position. The
position of the work features adapts to changes made to the referenced
geometry.

AEC Exchange Connector


A preparation tool that enables Autodesk Inventor content to be used in a
connected system in mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP)
applications.

aligned dimension
A linear dimension parallel to a line spanning the minimum distance
between two measurement points.

all components suppressed


Suppresses all children of the assembly, which results in a fast load of only
the assembly file. Subassemblies are fully suppressed so that their browser
structure is not visible. All Components Suppressed is the lowest-weight
loading of an assembly.

all content center suppressed


Suppresses all components designated as content, and does not load their
occurrences in memory. For example, consider the hundreds of fasteners in
a design. If the content center files are stored in a remote location, reduced
network traffic may also result.

all parts suppressed


Suppresses all parts at all levels of the assembly hierarchy. Subassemblies
are loaded. You can investigate the assembly structure, constraints, and
other attributes without loading part files.

all styles
Styles in the current document and the style library.

all-around symbol
An open circle at the vertex of the welding symbol that indicates the weld is
to go around the entire joint.

alternate unit dimension


A dimension that displays two compatible units of measurement. Also called
alternative dimension or dual dimension.

angle constraint
An assembly constraint that controls the angle between planes on two
components in an assembly.

angle dimension
A dimension that denotes the angle formed by two lines.

arc
Geometry is defined four ways in sketches: center-point arc (specified by a
center point and two points on a curve), three-point arc (specified by two
endpoints and a radius), tangent arc (specified from the endpoint of a curve
to another point), and an arc tangent or perpendicular to a curve (created
by dragging with the line tool).

array
See pattern feature.

arrow side
In weld situations such as a T-shaped joint, there are two potential places
for a weld. The side of the joint to which the arrow points is known as the
arrow side. The arrow side weld is made with the instructions given below
the reference line for an ANSI symbol and above the reference line for all
other standards.

aspect ratio
The proportional relationship of height and width. For example, a bitmap
used in a sketch can be resized but it retains its original aspect ratio. The
proportions of the height to width do not change.

assembly
Two or more components (parts or subassemblies) considered as a single
model. An assembly typically includes multiple components positioned
absolutely and relatively (as required) with constraints that define both size
and position. Assembly components may include features defined in place in
the assembly. Mass and material properties may be inherited from
individual part files.

assembly constraints
Rules that determine how parts in an assembly are placed relative to other
parts in the assembly. Constraints remove degrees of freedom. Assembly
constraints include angle, flush, mate, and tangent. Constraints may be
placed between faces of features, part edges, points, inferred axes, and
part work features such as planes, axes, and points.

assembly features
Features (chamfers, extrude cuts, holes, weld beads) that are created and
saved in the assembly file. The topology is not passed down to the
component files. Used to define specific manufacturing processes such as
match drilling and post-weld machining.

assembly pattern
In an assembly, components arranged in a circular or rectangular pattern.
All elements in the pattern are identical. Assembly patterns are used to
place multiple bolts in holes, or to position any component or components in
a symmetrical arrangement. An assembly pattern can be associative to a
feature pattern, updating when the feature pattern is edited.

assembly presentations
See presentation views.

assembly structure
The hierarchical tree shown in the browser that graphically illustrates
relationships among components in the assembly model. The assembly
structure shows the ownership of constraints and components within a
subassembly. In general, component position in the assembly structure
compares to the sequence of assembly during manufacturing.

associative design view representation


A drawing view that is associated to a design view representation in the
assembly environment that updates automatically when changes are made
to the design view representation in the assembly environment.

associative flat pattern views


In sheet metal design, flat pattern views are associated with the 3D model,
like drawing views. When the model changes, the flat pattern view is
updated. However, flat pattern dimensions do not update 3D models.

associative sketch pattern elements


In sketch patterns, all pattern elements are fully constrained as a group.
Changes to an element update all other elements in the pattern. If
association is removed during pattern creation or editing, constraints are
removed. Pattern geometry becomes copied geometry with no association
to other elements.

associative spline
When creating an offset from an ellipse, an associative spline is created
instead of a true mathematical ellipse if the offset selection point does not
display the parent ellipse axis. The result is a spline equidistant from the
ellipse.

attribute
A data management description of information associated with a part of
subassembly. In an assembly or a bill of materials, an attribute typically
refers to a file-level property to incorporate into a structured bill of
materials.

AutoCAD spline fit method


Creates an Autodesk Inventor spline using the same method used by
AutoCAD.

automatic edge chain


A selection setting used during creation of 3D fillets. When Automatic Edge
Chain is on, selecting an edge automatically selects all edges tangent to it.

axis of revolution
The centerline of a revolved feature.

axonometric projection
A type of orthographic view created by projection lines that are
perpendicular to the viewing surface or plane, where a 3D model appears as
inclined, exposing the X, Y, and Z view planes simultaneously. For example,
an isometric view is axonometric.

base feature
The first feature created in a part. May be an imported base solid (.sat or
.step file format), in which case the base feature is a fixed size. Sketched
or placed features add details to the base feature and are positioned
relative to one another using dimensional or geometric constraints. The
base feature should represent the most basic shape in the part.
base solid
A model in SAT or STEP file format imported in Autodesk Inventor as a base
feature (the first feature in a model). A base solid is fully dimensioned; its
size can be changed only by commands in the Solids environment, but the
solid can be modified by adding features.

beam
Typically a horizontal structural member of a frame often analyzed for load
bearing capacity.

bend
In sheet metal design, a corner seam can be converted to a bend. A bend is
the small radius between faces that represents the fabrication process in
which bends are applied to a flat pattern to form a 3D part.

bend allowance
In sheet metal design, a factor applied when converting a bend to an
unfolded condition. Material thickness, material type, and bend radius are
used to calculate the amount of distortion.

bend lines
In sheet metal design, bend lines can be displayed in the flat pattern
drawing view to show the start, center, and end of the bend zone.

bend relief
In sheet metal design, a small notch cut at the end of a bend to prevent
material from tearing.

bend zone
In sheet metal design, the area where material deformation takes place,
often referred to in the flat pattern as the area between bend lines.

bill of materials
For an assembly, a document that describes components details such as
component name, material, and quantity. Bills of materials can be single or
multiple levels (exploded).

bottom-up design
A sequential assembly design technique that adds previously designed
components to an assembly model and positions the components using
assembly constraints.

bounding rectangle
A virtual rectangle that represents the extents of an image in Autodesk
Inventor. When an image is placed in a sketch, constraints and dimensions
can be applied to the bounding rectangle to position the image.

broken view
A drawing view that was divided with cosmetic break lines and
foreshortened. It allows a component view and its critical annotation areas,
which in an unbroken view are prohibitively small, to display at a legible
scale.

browser
The graphical hierarchy showing relationships among geometric elements in
parts, assemblies, and drawings. Icons represent sketches, features,
constraints, or attributes for each model. Objects are shown in the browser
in the order in which they were created. Objects can also be edited,
renamed, added, deleted, copied, and moved to a different location in the
browser.

cached data
In the computer memory, the last used solution that yielded usable sketch
or system data. For example, when a part containing an iSketch is edited
outside of the parent assembly, the assembly displays a message warning
that changes may not be reflected in the part because the last-known
(cached) data is used to represent the part in the assembly.

catalog
Microsoft Windows folder hierarchy. Catalog folders are used to manage
iFeatures in a user-defined hierarchy.

center point
A work point placed at the intersection of the default reference planes in a
part or assembly file.

centerline
The axis about which a profile is revolved (revolve feature) or swept (sweep
feature). To automate centerline selection, right-click a curve, and then
change the linetype to a centerline.

chamfer
A placed feature that bevels a part edge and is defined by its placement,
size, and angle.

child
In a hierarchical design relationship, a child element is dependent on
another (parent) element. A typical example is a feature, such as a cut, that
depends on a base feature. In the browser, the child, or dependent feature,
is indented under its parent. A child feature can be a parent to other
features. In most cases, deleting the child feature has no effect on the
parent feature.

circle
Geometry defined two ways in sketches: a center-point circle (defined by a
center point and a point on its circumference) and a tangent circle (defined
as tangent to three lines on its circumference).

coincident constraint
A geometric constraint that constrains two points together or constrains one
point to a curve. When this constraint is applied to the center points of two
circles, arcs, or ellipses, the result is the same as the concentric constraint.

collinear constraint
A geometric constraint that causes two or more line segments or ellipse
axes to lie along the same line. In an assembly, a collinear constraint is
achieved with a mate constraint between two lines, edges, or axes.

combine
Performs a cut, join, or intersect operation on selected solid bodies.

component
A part or subassembly placed into another assembly. Assembly components
can be single parts or combined parts that operate as a unit (or
subassembly). Components can be treated as parts within other assemblies.

composite iMate
A group of individual iMates, selected and named in the browser, that are to
be used as a unit. In an assembly, when a component with a composite
iMate is matched with another component with a composite iMate of the
same name, all constraints in the iMate collection solve at once.

concentric constraint
A geometric constraint that causes two circles, arcs, or ellipses to have the
same center point. The result is the same as that of a coincident constraint
applied to the centers of the curves.

configuration file
A file that specifies the options for opening AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop
files, or saving files in DWG or DXF format.

connection point
A point that you can define for use in inferencing or snapping to other
geometry. You can add connection points and use them to position
sketched symbols, title blocks, and other drawing objects.

constant-radius fillet
A fillet that has the same radius along its entire length. Use the Constant
tab on the Fillet feature dialog box to select the edges and specify the
radius for a constant-radius fillet feature.

constraints
Rules that govern the position, slope, tangency, dimensions, and
relationships among sketch geometry or the relative position between parts
in an assembly. Geometric constraints control the shapes and relationships
among sketch elements or assembly components. Dimensional constraints
control size. Applying constraints removes degrees of freedom.

construction environment
Imported data resides in the construction environment until it is promoted
to the part environment. For example, when importing data in IGES or SAT
format, a Construction icon is placed in the browser, with data groups
nested below it. In the active construction environment, tools modify the
geometry, such as repairing errors in imported data.

construction geometry
Geometry used to assist in the creation of sketches or features, but not
used to define profiles or paths. The line style designates a curve as
construction geometry.

consumed sketch
A sketch incorporated into a feature, such as a sketch used in an extrusion.
By definition, the sketch is consumed by the feature.

containing selection window


Dragging your cursor from right to left creates a crossing selection. Objects
that are fully within the containing window are selected.

context menu
The menu that appears when the right mouse button is clicked. Displays
commands and Help for the current operation.

coordinate system
The set of magnitudes (visually represented by the X, Y, and Z axes) that
determine the position of points, lines, curves, and planes in part and
assembly files. By default, a grid displays on the active sketch plane of the
coordinate system.

corner break
In sheet metal design, a corner break applies either a radius or chamfer
edge to the end of a flange.

corner relief
In sheet metal design, a small notch that prevents material from tearing is
placed where two bends join.

corner seam
In sheet metal design, a corner seam mates edges where two bends join,
including the alignment or overlap of edges, miter of angled flanges, and
inserts corner relief.

cosmetic welds
In a weldment model, cosmetic welds are graphic elements that indicate
welded edges. Cosmetic welds represent a wide range of weld types. They
do not add mass to the assembly and cannot be used in interference
checking. Cosmetic welds always reside in the Welds feature group.

curves
Geometric objects in a sketch, including lines, arcs, circles, splines, and
ellipses.

custom iPart
An iPart factory generates iParts, each of which has a unique instance with
parameters, properties, and other values that are maintained in an
embedded spreadsheet. Each row in the spreadsheet represents an
individual iPart with a unique instance. When a custom iPart is used in an
assembly, specific values specified during the iPart definition can be
modified (such as length, width, or thickness).

cut
In sheet metal design, cuts are sketched shapes that define material to
remove from a single face, a specified depth, or an entire 3D part.

cut length
For frames, the overall length of the raw stock required to create a
structural member (including enough material to accommodate end
treatments on either end).

cut list
A cut list is a table listing components with dimensions and cut treatment
information for fabrication and accounting purposes. Each treatment on a
frame member produces a custom property called CUTDETAIL(n), which you
can add as manufacturing notes in the cut list.
cut operation
One of 3 Boolean operations (cut, join, and intersect) that define the
relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. A cut
operation removes the volume of a sketched feature from an existing
feature. Not available for base features.

cutting plane
Used to display an assembly section temporarily for defining new features.
A cutting plane is an existing plane defined by default work planes within
the assembly or within one of the component parts of the assembly.

deck
The walking surface of a platform, typically constructed of diamond plate or
expanded metal.

degrees of freedom
The variables by which an object can move. In assemblies, a body floating
free in space with no constraints to another grounded body can be moved
along three axes of translation and around three axes of rotation. Such a
body is said to have six degrees of freedom. Constraints remove degrees of
freedom by restricting the ways sketch geometry can change or a free-
floating body can move.

demote
In the browser hierarchy, dragging a feature or component farther from the
top level.

dependent features
Features that are geometrically dependent on another feature, such as
chamfers and fillets.

derived part
A new part that uses an existing Autodesk Inventor part as its base feature.
A part can be scaled or mirrored when inserted into a file, and additional
features can further modify the body. A derived part is linked to the original
part and can be updated to reflect changes to the original part.

derived part feature


A base feature in a new part that is derived from an existing Autodesk
Inventor part. When creating a derived part, you import a part as the base
feature. The base feature is listed as a derived part feature in the browser.
Part modeling features can further modify the derived part feature.

design elements
See iFeatures
design layout
A 2D master drawing or sketch that is drawn to scale with minimal detail to
capture the known design parameters of a problem or project. The design
layout is a dynamic document that becomes less useful as a project nears
completion. It is superseded by detailed part and assembly designs.

design properties
The file properties that can be used to find and manage Autodesk Inventor
files. Design properties are also used to maintain and update information
automatically in title blocks, parts lists, bills of material, and sketched
symbols. See also iProperties

design view representation


A named and saved assembly view where components have characteristics
selectively designated, usually to present an uncluttered working
environment. A design view captures characteristics such as selection status
(enabled or not enabled), visibility status, color and style, zoom
magnification, and viewing angle. The design view representation can be
named, and when recalled, components are shown with the designated
display characteristics.

diameter dimension